JP2021183239A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving a role of state switch means.SOLUTION: A displacement direction of a slide displacement member 370 goes along a flow-down direction of game balls, so that a rolling mode of game balls can be changed by displacing the slide displacement member 370 in the state that game balls are approximate to or in contact with the slide displacement member 370. Thus, a role of the slide displacement member 370 can be improved. For example, while game balls are flowing leftward, the slide displacement member 370 is slid and moved rightward in the state that the game balls are upon it and load rotating the game balls in a forward direction of rolling is given to the balls, so that game balls can be accelerated.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 20

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a large prize-winning component capable of configuring a plurality of types of flow paths of a gaming ball toward a ball detection hole (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-185021

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the role of the opening / closing plate (state switching means). The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the role of a state switching means.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a path-constructing means configured to allow a game ball to flow down and a passing means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the route-constituting means to pass through. The state switching means is provided with a state switching means capable of changing a state between an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the route forming means and a non-introduction state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the route forming means. Is configured so that the direction of displacement generated in the state change is along the flow direction of the game ball.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the role of the state switching means can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device and a sorting device. (A) and (b) are front perspective views of the variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a game board. It is a rear perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a base plate, a variable winning device, a gutter, and a sorting device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a base plate, a variable winning apparatus, a gathering gutter, and a sorting apparatus. It is an exploded front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a variable winning device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting device. It is a front view of a receiving member and a sorting device. FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view of a variable winning device and a sorting device on the XVI-XVI line of FIG. FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view of a variable winning device and a sorting device in the XVII-XVII line of FIG. FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view of a variable winning device and a sorting device on the line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view of a variable winning device and a sorting device in the XVII-XVII line of FIG. FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view of a variable winning device and a sorting device on the line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. It is a front view of the variable winning device and the sorting device. 16 is a perspective view of a variable winning device and a sorting device in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 16. 16 is a perspective view of a variable winning device and a sorting device in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter and the hit in the ordinary symbol. It is a figure which showed the clock change of the operation pattern of the opening / closing plate of the variable winning device of the 1st round, and the operation pattern of the slide displacement member of a distribution device in each jackpot type. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit which shows an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit which shows an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit which shows an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit which shows an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit which shows an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit which shows an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit which shows an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit which shows an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in the effect standby state. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit in the effect standby state. It is a side view of the 1st operation unit in the direction view of the arrow XLII of FIG. 40. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in the intermediate effect state. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit in the intermediate effect state. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in the overhanging state. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit in the overhanging state. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the displacement amount and the displacement angle of the supported member with the rotational displacement of a rotating member. (A) and (b) are schematic views showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount on the driven side of the supported member when the rotating member rotates in the tilting direction in a mode of constant angular velocity. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the angle with the rotation of a rotating member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rear case and a 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rear case and a 2nd operation unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame in the LIIa-LIIA line of FIG. 28, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame in the LIIb-LIIB line of FIG. 28. be. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame in the line LIIIa-LIIIa of FIG. 33, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame in the line LIIIb-LIIIb of FIG. 33. be. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame in the LIVa-LIVA line of FIG. 30, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame in the LIVb-LIVA line of FIG. be. It is an exploded front perspective view of the up-and-down reversal effect device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the up-and-down reversal effect device. (A) and (b) are front views of a transmission device holding plate, an upside down member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a transmission device holding plate, an upside-down member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member in the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa of FIG. 57 (a), and FIG. 57 (b) is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 57. It is sectional drawing of (b) (A) to (c) are front views of the effect device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a part of the structure of the 3rd operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the structure of the 3rd operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a part of the structure of the 3rd operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the structure of the 3rd operation unit. (A) and (b) are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. (A) and (b) are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. (A) and (b) are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. (A) and (b) are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. It is a timing chart which shows the arrangement of the elevating arm member, the drive mode of a drive motor, and an example of the output of a detection sensor in chronological order. It is sectional drawing of the 3rd operation unit in the LXIX-LXIX line of FIG. 28. (A) to (d) are the front schematic views of the operation unit schematically explaining the example of the combination operation of each operation unit in chronological order. (A) to (d) are the front schematic views of the operation unit schematically explaining the example of the combination operation of each operation unit in chronological order.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 71, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1 will be described with the front side of the paper as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, so that a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyway 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. NS.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front view (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. The pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, and a large number of nails for ball guidance (shown below the center frame 86, in the upper half of the game area. (Not shown) and windmill (not shown), rail 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit. It is configured by assembling 80 and the like, and its peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 can be visually recognized by the player from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a tapping screw or the like is provided from the front side of the game board 13. Is fixed by.

The base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, on the outside of the center frame 86, various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof can be shielded invisible to the player.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first one. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variation jackpot, a 4R probability variation jackpot, and a 4R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. Further, "4R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot of 4 rounds, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. In the high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability increases during a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 fluctuations in the present embodiment), and the hit probability of the second symbol described later increases and the second Includes the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win in the winning opening 140. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased and the second winning opening 140 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300, which will be described later, in the first round of the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot game ends changes by 100. During the number of times, it becomes a high probability state. If it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the game state after the jackpot game ends will be in a time-saving state for 100 fluctuations.

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 140a (electric accessory) attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is compared with the normal time. And a long time is set. When the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 140 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 140a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric motor is operated once. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 140a is opened more than in the normal state. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 140a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and at one time. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 140a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to increase compared to the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to display the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is fastened and fixed to the rear case 510 so as to fill the opening 511a of the rear case 510 described later, and the center frame 86 is arranged so as to border the window portion of the base plate 60. It is set up. That is, when viewed from the front, it seems that the center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, but in reality, the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86 are arranged apart from each other in the front-rear direction. Has been done.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of, for example, a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle, and lower. Three symbol columns of are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device lights the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) alternately every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 140 may be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 140a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 140a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball launched on the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning opening 140 in which the ball can win is arranged below the front view of the first winning opening 64. When a ball wins a prize in the second winning opening 140, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 140 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. The electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged). The state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 140.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol of "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 140a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 140 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 140. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 140. Therefore, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 140 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 140.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a symmetrical configuration of the game board 13, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 140 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of launching a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the troublesomeness of changing the way of hitting the ball.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 140 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 71. The out openings 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged (not shown). ).

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the board boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is equipped with a case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispenses balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used for main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and an opening / closing plate 65b of a specific winning opening 65a (FIG. 11). A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side with the lower side as an axis, and the MPU 201 is connected to these via the input / output port 205. Various commands and control signals are sent to it.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 631,731,782,861.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and the like is performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a period sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the structure around the variable winning device 65 will be described. 5 is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, and FIGS. 6A and 6B are front perspective views of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 6A illustrates a closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b in which the opening / closing plate 65b is closed so as to restrict the flow of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a, and FIG. 6B shows the closing state of the opening / closing plate 65b to the specific winning opening 65a. The open state of the opening / closing plate 65b in which the opening / closing plate 65b is opened so as to allow the flow of the sphere is shown. In the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

In the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b (see FIG. 6B), the variable winning device 65 receives the ball landing on the opening / closing plate 65b and guides the ball to the specific winning opening 65a in the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b. The upper surface of the opening / closing plate 65b is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back surface side.

Since the electric accessory 140a is arranged above the left and right central portions of the opening / closing plate 65b (see FIG. 2), the ball landing on the opening / closing plate 65b is limited to a ball that deviates from the electric accessory 140a and flows down. .. That is, the landing of the ball on the opening / closing plate 65b does not occur in the left and right central portions, but mainly occurs in the left and right outer portions of the electric accessory 140a. In other words, the arrangement of the sphere that lands on the opening / closing plate 65b is limited to the position closer to the left / right outer side of the opening / closing plate 65b.

The arrangement of the sphere after landing on the opening / closing plate 65b is not limited to this. That is, depending on how the sphere flows after landing on the opening / closing plate 65b, the sphere may be arranged closer to the left / right center position of the opening / closing plate 65b.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 2) that covers the electric accessory 140a from the front side is curved so as to secure a space on the opening / closing plate 65b side (glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). ) And is formed as a curved surface that projects downward from the lower end of the front end to the back side). It is possible to reduce the degree of collision and loss of momentum. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that the sphere is arranged near the center position on the left and right of the opening / closing plate 65b.

The center of the radius of curvature of the curved shape at the lower part of the front design member 141 may be arranged either front or back. In the present embodiment, the radius of curvature in the lateral view is formed so as to be arranged below the front side, so that a larger space on the opening / closing plate 65b side can be secured. Further, since the front design member 141 has a shape in which the left-right width becomes smaller toward the lower side at the left-right end portion, it is possible to easily secure a space between the front design member 141 and the opening / closing plate 65b on the left-right side.

In the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b, the ball landing on the opening / closing plate 65b is guided to the specific winning opening 65a with almost no leakage. On the front side of the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, a inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that inclines downward toward the rear is arranged at a vertical position that can guide the ball to the ball passage hole 163b.

The inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is formed one step lower than the left and right end portions of the lower surface portion 163a so that a ball rolled to the left and right outside by the lower surface portion 163a can be transferred with less resistance. In order to reduce the flow resistance of the ball landing on the opening / closing plate 65b on the left and right outer sides of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, the guide plate portion 163a2 is formed on the left and right outer sides of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1.

The guide plate portion 163a2 is a plate-shaped portion extending from the rear wall portion and the left and right inner wall portions of the receiving member 163 to the front side and the left and right inside, and the front end surface is an inclined surface whose arrangement is displaced rearward toward the left and right inside. It is formed.

As a result, when the ball that rolls on the opening / closing plate 65b comes into contact with the front end surface of the guide plate portion 163a2, the sphere can be guided to flow down along the inclination of the inclined surface, so that the sphere can be guided to the lower surface of the inclined flow. It is possible to guide the 163a1 with less resistance. Therefore, when the opening / closing plate 65b starts the closing operation with the ball on the opening / closing plate 65b, the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b is performed even if the ball is arranged on the left and right outside of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1. The degree of inhibition can be reduced.

That is, for example, the flow of the sphere becomes poor and the closing of the opening / closing plate 65b is delayed, or the sphere flowed backward due to the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b bounces off the rear wall portion of the receiving member 163 and hits the opening / closing plate 65b again. By applying a load in the direction of opening the opening / closing plate 65b (front side), it is possible to reduce the possibility of malfunction such as the opening / closing plate 65b being unintentionally opened.

When the opening / closing plate 65b operates from the open state to the closed state, the opening / closing plate 65b closes by the rising operation. That is, the ball landing on the opening / closing plate 65b is guided (swallowed) to the specific winning opening 65a by the operation of the opening / closing plate 65b. The ball on board is guided to the specific winning opening 65a almost without omission.

At this time, if the arrangement of the spheres on the opening / closing plate 65b is closer to the left and right outside, or if the number of spheres is large, the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b may be delayed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the shapes of the lower surface portion 163a, the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 and the guide plate portion 163a2 of the receiving member 163 are devised, the flow of the ball guided to the specific winning opening 65a is retained. It is possible to maintain the quickness of the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b.

Further, instead of devising the shape of the receiving member 163, the rolling surface of the opening / closing plate 65b on which the ball rides in the open state is formed in a flat shape (see FIG. 6B). Therefore, the ball landing on the opening / closing plate 65b in the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b flows backward once, and then flows in the left-right direction due to the action of the shape of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passing hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid the collision of balls on the opening / closing plate 65b.

That is, even if a plurality of spheres land on the opening / closing plate 65b at the same time, the spheres are once translated backward, so that it is possible to prevent the spheres from colliding with each other on the opening / closing plate 65b. Therefore, as compared with the case where the rolling surface of the opening / closing plate 65b has a shape having an inclined surface in the left-right direction like the lower surface portion 163a and a flow in the left-right direction is formed on the rolling sphere, the rolling surface on the opening / closing plate 65b. Since the possibility that the movement of the ball becomes irregular can be reduced, it is possible to prevent an unintended malfunction.

The receiving member 163 is formed with a contact surface portion 163a3 for contacting the rotating tip portions at the left and right ends of the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b to improve the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening / closing plate 65b. There is. Since the contact surface portions 163a3 are formed in pairs on the left and right, and are formed so as to be able to make surface contact instead of point contact by the shape design according to the shape of the opening / closing plate 65b, it is easy to stabilize the arrangement of the opening / closing plate 65b. In addition, stress concentration can be avoided by receiving a load at the time of contact on the surface, so that durability can be improved.

Further, on the lower side of the contact surface portion 163a3, an auxiliary contact surface 163a4 formed in a surface shape that is substantially parallel to the opening / closing plate 65b arranged to face each other with a slight gap is formed. The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is provided as a fail-safe when the contact between the contact surface portion 163a3 and the opening / closing plate 65b becomes poor for some reason.

In the present embodiment, a fixed member 161 that restricts the flow of the sphere is arranged on the front side of the contact surface portion 163a3, and the sphere is basically configured so as not to collide with the contact surface portion 163a3. However, for example, if the rotating tip portion of the opening / closing plate 65b that abuts on the contact surface portion 163a3 is chipped, the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state may not be maintained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the normal contact between the opening / closing plate 65b and the contact surface portion 163a3 cannot be maintained, the front-rear width portion and the auxiliary contact surface 163a4 at the left and right ends of the opening / closing plate 65b The surface contact with the opening / closing plate 65b is caused, and the stability of the arrangement of the opening / closing plate 65b is maintained. This makes it possible to improve the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state.

The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 may be configured to come into contact with the opening / closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal. In this case, since the contact surface portion 163a3 comes into contact with the opening / closing plate 65b when the shape is normal, there may be a disadvantage that the load is likely to be accumulated, but the area for distributing the load can be expanded, so that the opening / closing plate 65b can be expanded. It is possible to reduce the magnitude of the local load received by the contact surface portion 163a3 due to the contact with the contact surface portion 163a3.

When the opening / closing plate 65b operates from the open state to the closed state, the game ball being accepted by the opening / closing plate 65b can be configured to be received by pushing it into the opening / closing plate 65b by the shape of the front design member 141 described above. ..

That is, the ball hits the lower shape of the front design member 141 in a state of being accepted (for example, a state of being sandwiched between the rotating tip of the opening / closing plate 65b and the opening frame portion of the specific winning opening 65a). When they come into contact with each other, they can be guided to the inside of the specific winning opening 65a by guiding them to the curved shape. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which a ball deviating from the opening / closing plate 65b falls on the front side of the third flow path constituent portion 336, so that it is easy to secure a field of view to the third flow path constituent portion 336. can do.

Since the ball does not land on the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b, the arrangement of the balls flowing down the front side of the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b is on the left and right outside of the electric accessory 140a. Limited to.

Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, the arrangement of the spheres that flow down without being guided by the specific winning opening 65a in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b can be limited to the left and right outer positions of the electric accessory 140a. As a result, it is possible to secure a field of view on the lower side of the electric accessory 140a at the left and right inner positions of the electric accessory 140a with respect to the left and right ends.

Next, the configuration of the downstream side of the specific winning opening 65a (the side through which the ball passing through the specific winning opening 65a flows) will be described. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 8 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. Note that FIGS. 7 and 8 show a state in which the configurations other than the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 are removed from the configurations arranged on the base plate 60.

As shown in FIG. 8, at the rear position of the variable winning device 65 on the back side of the base plate 60, a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the general winning opening 63 (see FIG. 2). A gutter 150 is provided to form a path for flowing the ball into a ball discharge path (not shown).

The collecting gutter 150 includes a groove-shaped portion forming a flow path, and the front side portion facing the base plate 60 in the groove-shaped portion is opened. When this open portion is closed by the base plate 60, a path for flowing the ball to the ball discharge path is completed.

The collecting gutter 150 includes a first flow path portion 151 that forms a flow path for a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64, and a second flow path portion 152 that forms a path for a ball that has entered the second winning opening 140. And a plurality of third flow path portions 153 that form the flow paths of the balls that have entered the general winning openings 63 arranged on both the left and right sides on the left and right sides, respectively.

The first flow path portion 151 is configured as a flow path inclined in the lower left direction from the rear position of the first winning opening 64, and the second flow path portion 152 is inclined in the lower right direction from the rear position of the second winning opening 140. It is configured as a flow path. The third flow path portion 153 is configured as a flow path extending downward of the general winning opening 63.

Therefore, when viewed from the front, the flow of balls entering the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is such that the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 are arranged at the left and right center positions of the game area. , It is moved from the left and right center position to the left and right outside by the gathering gutter 150. As a result, a space can be provided below the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 described later can be arranged using this space.

FIG. 9 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150 and the sorting device 300, and FIG. 10 shows the base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150 and the sorting device 300. It is an exploded rear perspective view of. In FIGS. 9 and 10, only the lower half of the base plate 60 is shown, and the other parts are omitted, and the other configurations to be assembled to the base plate 60 are not shown. The ground of the base plate 60 is visible. Further, in FIG. 9, for convenience of explanation, the center frame 86 is shown in a state of being assembled to the base plate 60.

The fixing of the variable winning device 65, the set gutter 150, and the sorting device 300 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like. The collecting gutter 150 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the back surface side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

Then, in the distribution device 300, the insertion hole 311 is fastened and fixed to the variable winning device 65 at the upper portion, and the insertion hole 331 is fastened and fixed to the collecting gutter 150 at the left and right portions. That is, unlike the variable winning device 65 directly fixed to the base plate 60 and the set gutter 150, the presence or absence of the distribution device 300 does not affect the completion of the game board 13.

In other words, the variable winning device 65 and the set gutter 150 in the present embodiment can be diverted as they are depending on whether the sorting device 300 is arranged or not. As a result, the variable winning device 65 and the set gutter 150 can be shared regardless of the presence or absence of the sorting device 300.

Next, the details of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to receive a ball from the game area through the specific winning opening 65a, and the sorting device 300 constitutes a flow path of the ball accepted by the variable winning device 65. In the present embodiment, the profit obtained by the player is controlled to change based on the detection result of the sphere flowing through the flow path of the distribution device 300, which will be described in detail later.

FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the variable winning device 65 is a fixed member 161 fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like, and the fixed member arranged on the front side of the fixed member 161. A receiving member 163 that is arranged on the back side of the front design member 162 that is fastened and fixed to 161 and is fastened and fixed to the fixed member 161 so that a ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a can be received. And an intervening member 164 arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163, fastened and fixed to the receiving member 163, and intervening as a connecting portion with the distribution device 300, and arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163, the receiving member 163. It is provided with a state switching device 165 which is fastened and fixed to and can switch the open / closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b depending on the presence or absence of energization.

The fixed member 161 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and the shape on the front side thereof is formed on a flat surface except for a through hole for screw insertion, a fastening position with the front design member 162, and a specific winning opening 65a. .. On the other hand, the shape of the fixed member 161 on the back surface side is a three-dimensional shape that projects toward the back surface side inside the thin-walled portion that is in contact with the base plate 60 on the outer peripheral portion.

In particular, the boundary portion 161a with the thin-walled portion is formed in a horizontally long substantially elliptical frame shape, and a through hole having a size capable of arranging the boundary portion 161a is formed through the base plate 60. That is, the boundary portion 161a is a portion inserted into the through hole of the base plate 60.

Inside the boundary portion 161a, the specific winning opening 65a and a horizontally long plate extending rearward in a horizontally long plate shape parallel to the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a slightly below the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a. An extended support plate 161b having a pair of left and right substantially T-shaped portions provided with a vertically elongated plate-shaped portion extending downward at an intermediate position between the portion and the horizontally elongated plate-shaped portion is formed.

The extended support plate 161b functions to support both the range behind the specific winning opening 65a and the flow path of the distribution device 300 described later. The protruding support portion 161c projecting from the horizontally elongated plate-shaped portion of the extended support plate 161b, the protruding support portion 161d projecting from the vertically elongated plate-shaped portion of the extended support plate 161b, and the lower edge of the boundary portion 161a. The protruding support portion 161e projecting from the upper surface of the portion has a function as a portion for supporting the distribution device 300, and the details will be described later.

Inside the boundary portion 161a, the symmetrical projecting portion 161f projecting in a symmetrical shape below the left-right center position of the specific winning opening 65a abuts on the ball flowing down the distribution device 300 and guides the flow of the ball. Has a function.

A plurality of through holes 161g for inserting the fastening screw to be screwed into the front design member 162 are arranged inside and outside the boundary portion 161a. A plurality of fastened portions 161h having female screw portions for screwing the fastening screw to be inserted into the receiving member 163 are arranged inside the boundary portion 161a.

The fastened portion 161i having a female screw portion for screwing the fastening screw to be inserted into the intervening member 164 is arranged outside the boundary portion 161a at the cut (left-right center position) of the boundary portion 161a. That is, among the through holes formed in the base plate 60, the connecting portion between the through hole for inserting the boundary portion 161a and the through hole for inserting the second winning opening 140 and the electric accessory 140a (see FIG. 9). ), The fastened portion 161i is arranged.

The front design member 162 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and the front side thereof is formed in a flat shape so as to have a uniform distance from the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). The ball can flow down within the range of the back side of the front design member 162 and the front side of the fixed member 161.

On the back surface side of the front design member 162, a plurality of female screw portions are arranged at positions that match the through holes 161 g of the fixed member 161 and have female screw portions formed so that the fastening screws inserted through the through holes 161 g can be screwed in. It is provided with a fastened portion 162a and a plurality of extending portions 162b and 162c extending to the back surface side in a shape that covers the fastened portion 162a from above.

Since the extending portions 162b and 162c can prevent the ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 from directly colliding with the fastened portion 162a, the durability of the fastened portion 162a can be improved. Can be improved.

Further, the upper surface of the extending portions 162b and 162c is formed as an inclined surface, so that the flow path of the sphere can be restricted. That is, the upper surface of the extension portion 162b (two locations on the left and right center side) extending near the left and right edges of the specific winning opening 65a is formed as an inclined surface that inclines downward to the left and right outside. It is possible to prevent the ball on the portion 162b from flowing to the specific winning opening 65a side. That is, the ball on the extension portion 162b falls downward on the left and right outside of the extension portion 162b, and then flows down toward the out port 71 along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2).

Further, the upper surfaces of the extension portions 162c (two locations on the left and right ends) extending to the left and right ends are formed as inclined surfaces that incline downward to the left and right inward, so that the ball flowing on the extension portion 162c can be formed. The flow path can be combined with the flow path of the ball on the extension portion 162b. As a result, the range in which the flowing spheres are placed can be narrowed compared to the number of flowing spheres (the placement density of the spheres can be increased), and the portion where the visibility of the spheres is not impaired (the flow path is). Space that is not constructed) can be secured.

The front design member 162 shown in FIG. 11 is described as plain, and the visibility on the back side is good, but it is not necessary to configure the front design member 162 in plain color. For example, a sticker on which a pattern or a character is illustrated may be attached to the front side of the front design member 162 to decorate the front design member 162, or a groove is dug in the front design member 162 with a geometric pattern and the groove is irradiated with light. By doing so, the geometric pattern may emerge and be visually recognized. Further, the front design member 162 may be configured to be non-transparent after being plain or decorated as described above.

The receiving member 163 is formed in a horizontally long frame shape (or box shape) whose front side is open from a light-transmitting resin material, and includes the above-mentioned guide plate portion 163a2, contact surface portion 163a3, and auxiliary contact surface 163a4. , A lower surface portion 163a forming a flow lower surface inside the frame, a ball passage hole 163b arranged as a through hole through which a ball flowing down the lower surface portion 163a can pass, and a position that meets the fastened portion 161h of the fixed member 161. A plurality of insertion holes 163c into which the fastening screws to be fastened and fixed to the fastened portion 161h are inserted from the back side, and a female screw portion into which the fastening screw to be inserted into the intervening member 164 is screwed. It includes a pair of fastened portions 163d disposed on the side, and a plurality of fastened portions 163e having female screw portions into which fastening screws to be inserted into the state switching device 165 are screwed.

The lower surface portion 163a is formed as a left-right inclined surface that inclines downward from the left-right center portion to the left-right outer side, and is an inclined flow that inclines downward one step from the left-right outer end portion of the left-right inclined surface. By providing the lower surface 163a1, the ball flowing down the rear end portion of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is arranged so as to pass through the ball passage hole 163b with a small resistance.

The ball passage hole 163b is a detection hole formed in the detection sensor SE1 engaged with the back surface side of the receiving member 163. That is, the fact that the sphere has passed through the sphere passage hole 163b is detected by the detection sensor SE1.

The intervening member 164 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, has a main body portion 164a having a light refracting surface that inclines downward toward the rear, and is formed through the upper portion of the main body portion 164a to be fastened. In a pair of insertion holes 164b into which a fastening screw screwed into 163d can be inserted, a light emitting substrate 164c arranged above the insertion hole 164b and an LED being arranged, and both left and right ends on the lower end side of the main body portion 164a. A pair of fastened portions 164d formed by having a female screw portion into which a fastening screw to be inserted into the distribution device 300 can be screwed, and a fastened member 161 formed through the upper portion of the main body portion 164a. It is provided with an insertion hole 164e through which a fastening screw screwed into the portion 161i can be inserted.

The light emitting substrate 164c is arranged so that the surface on which the LED is arranged faces diagonally forward and upward, and in the assembled state, the light emitting substrate 164c is located directly above the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 6) and the second winning is won. It is placed directly below the mouth 140. From such an arrangement, the light from the light emitting substrate 164c easily enters the field of view of the player who wants to enter the second winning opening 140 or the specific winning opening 65a and looks at the portion diagonally backward and downward.

Therefore, by controlling the LED of the light emitting board 164c to be turned on when the ball entering the second winning opening 140 or the specific winning opening 65a is detected, the ball entering the second winning opening 140 or the specific winning opening 65a is controlled. It is possible to easily make the player grasp whether or not the occurrence of the above.

From the above configuration, the intervening member 164 is fastened and fixed to both the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163. As a result, the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 can be firmly fixed as compared with the case where the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 are only fastened and fixed. Further, since the arrangement of the distribution device 300 connected and fixed to the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 via the intervening member 164 can be stabilized, the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 and the distribution device 300 can be arranged. Relative misalignment can be suppressed.

The state switching device 165 has a plurality of insertion portions 165a through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 163e of the receiving member 163 is inserted, and has a plurality of openings for wiring and heat dissipation. The lower case portion 165b formed in a deep box shape with the upper side open, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c housed in the lower case portion 165b, and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c engaged with the tip of the plunger and together with the plunger. The slide portion 165d that slides and displaces, and the rotation tip portion that protrudes from the front end portion of the lower case portion 165b is rotatably supported by the lower case portion 165b and rotates with the slide displacement of the slide portion 165d. It includes a moving portion 165e and an upper lid portion 165 g that is fastened and fixed to the lower case portion 165b by fastening screws that are inserted into the plurality of insertion holes 165f.

The rotating tip of the rotating portion 165e is recessed so that a rod-shaped portion can be engaged, and the transmission protrusion 65c projecting to the right from the right end portion of the opening / closing plate 65b enters the recessed portion. Be engaged. The transmission protrusion 65c is arranged at a position eccentric from the metal shaft rod portion 65d forming the rotation axis of the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b. With this configuration, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b can be generated with the rotation of the rotating portion 165e.

13 and 14 are exploded front perspective views of the sorting device 300. FIG. 13 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 as viewed from above, and FIG. 14 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 as viewed from below.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the distribution device 300 has an upper member 310 having a pair of insertion holes 311 through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 164d of the intervening member 164 is inserted. A middle member 330 having a pair of insertion holes 331 that are fastened and fixed to the upper member 310 in the vertical direction and that are formed through the fastening screw that is screwed into the female screw portion of the collecting trough 150 so as to be inserted therein. A substrate 350 housed between the member 330 and the upper member 310 and having a light emitting means 351 such as an LED arranged on the front side, and a state housed at a position between the middle member 330 and the upper member 310 depending on the presence or absence of energization. A state switching device 360 that is configured to be switchable, and a slide displacement member 370 that is arranged below the middle member 330 and slides back and forth between the front position and the rear position as the state of the state switching device 360 is switched. An insertion hole that is arranged below the middle member 330 so as to sandwich the slide displacement member 370 with the middle member 330 and is formed through the fastening screw that is screwed into the female screw portion of the collecting trough 150. A lower member 380 having a 381 and a lower member 380 are provided.

Before explaining the details of the configuration of each part, the outline of the function of the distribution device 300 will be described. The distribution device 300 is a device that constitutes a flow path through which the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b (see FIG. 12) of the detection sensor SE1 flows down.

The sphere that has passed through the sphere passage hole 163b flows down in the order of the inside of the upper member 310, the flow path constituents 334, 335, 336 formed between the upper member 310 and the middle member 330, and the inside of the lower member 380. Then, the ball flowing down from the lower member 380 is discharged to the ball discharge path (not shown).

The ball flowing down inside the distribution device 300 is configured to be visible to the player, and depending on the flow-down mode, the player can obtain not only a mere directing effect that entertains the player's eyes. It has effects related to game profits such as changing profits.

The difference in the flow mode of the sphere flowing inside the distribution device 300 is mainly caused by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370. That is, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 when the sphere flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380 makes a difference in which part of the lower member 380 the sphere passes through.

Therefore, the line of sight of the player tends to be easily gathered at the place where the ball flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380 (the place where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged as described later). It has been devised on the premise of concentration.

Next, the details of the configuration of each part of the distribution device 300 will be described. The upper member 310 is a thin-walled member having a U-shaped top view formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has the above-mentioned insertion hole 311 and a pair of openings 312 formed through the ball so as to be acceptable, and a mark. A pair of colored (red in this embodiment) transparent sealing member 313 attached as, a pair of upper surface portions 314 extending from the lower edge of the opening 312 to the front side along the outer peripheral portion, and a middle member. A plurality of insertion tube portions 315 having through holes through which fastening screws screwed into the 330 can be inserted, and a fastened portion 316 having a female screw into which the fastening screw inserted into the middle member 330 can be inserted. A pair of front-rear long protrusions 317 that are long portions in the front-rear direction and are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction so as to project downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310, and downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310. A pair of left and right inner protrusions 318, which are long portions in the left-right direction and are arranged between the pair of front-rear long protrusions 317, and the upper member 310 downward from the lower surface. A pair of left and right outer protrusions 319 that are long in the left-right direction and are arranged on the left and right outside of the pair of front-rear length protrusions 317, and a size that allows the upper part of the substrate 350 to be arranged. It is provided with a housing recess 320 formed as a recess of the above.

The opening 312 is a passage-shaped portion (tunnel-shaped portion) that receives a ball that has passed through the ball passing hole 163b of the variable winning device 65 and flows it downward, and the upper leading edge portion is an inclined posture detection sensor SE1 ( (See FIG. 12) The shape is such that it is cut on an inclined surface so as to be flush with the back surface of the plate. As a result, the upper leading edge portion of the opening 312 can be brought into contact with the back surface of the plate of the detection sensor SE1.

Further, the opening portion 312 is formed with an opening degree that does not penetrate the inside of the opening of the ball passing hole 163b when viewed in the opening direction of the ball passing hole 163b. This makes it possible to reduce the flow resistance when guiding the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b to the opening 312.

The seal member 313 functions as a member that attracts the attention of the player by being brightly visually recognized by receiving the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350, and the details will be described later.

The upper surface portion 314 is a thin plate portion having an inclination formed in accordance with the flow path of the sphere below the upper member 310. The first upper surface portion 314a arranged on the front side of the opening portion 312 is formed so as to incline downward toward the front side, and is connected to the front end portion of the first upper surface portion 314a and is arranged on the left and right inner sides. The 314b is formed so as to incline downward toward the left and right inward. Then, by configuring the left and right second upper surface portions 314b so that the left-right distance becomes longer toward the front side, it is possible to secure the field of view of the player who visually recognizes the ball through the space between the second upper surface portions 314b.

A counterbore for receiving the screw head of the fastening screw is formed on the upper surface side of the insertion tube portion 315. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the screw head of the fastening screw from being visually recognized by the player, even though the fastening screw is inserted from above.

The insertion tube portion 315 is arranged at a position that matches the fastened portion 332d having the female threaded portion formed on the middle member 330. In particular, the fastened portion 332d corresponding to the insertion tube portion 315 on the left side also serves as a support portion for supporting the rotating portion 363, and the details will be described later.

The fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 is arranged with the screw portion facing upward and the screw head facing downward. Therefore, although the fastened portion 316 is arranged on the front side, the screw head is made inconspicuous to the player who is visually recognized from diagonally above. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sorting device 300 from being deteriorated in appearance due to the fastening screw while fixing the upper member 310 and the middle member 330 to the strength.

The reason why the fastened portion 316 is formed only on the right side is that the insertion tube portions 315 are already arranged at two places on the rear side, so one fastening position on the front side is sufficient, and the screw head faces downward. The reason is that the distribution device 300 looks better if the arrangement is omitted if it is not necessary even though it is inconspicuous. The arrangement of the fastened portion 316 is not limited to this. For example, it may be arranged on the left side or may be arranged in pairs on the left and right.

The arrangement of the fastened portion 316 is set as a position where the flow path of the ball is avoided and the deterioration of the appearance of the sorting device 300 is minimized, but the details will be described later.

The front and rear long protrusions 317, the left and right inner protrusions 318, and the left and right outer protrusions 319 formed in pairs are curved so that the arrangement is lowered as the distance from the same location is the same. Formed as a surface. This curved surface has a different shape in the front-rear long protrusion 317, the left-right inner protrusion 318, and the left-right outer protrusion 319, and it is intended to control the flow mode of the sphere by the difference in the shape.

The middle member 330 has the above-mentioned pair of insertion holes 331, a rear frame-shaped portion 332 formed in a frame shape (substantially box-shaped) having a lower bottom portion on the rear side, and a frame shape (substantially) having a lower bottom portion on the front side. A pair of front frame-shaped portions 333 formed in a box shape), a pair of first flow path constituent portions 334 recessed on the left and right outer sides of the front frame-shaped portion 333 to form a flow path of a sphere, and a first thereof. A pair of second flow path constituents 335 connected to the front end of the flow path constituent portion 334 to form a flow path of the sphere and recessed on the front side of the front frame-shaped portion 333, and a second flow path constituent portion thereof. It is provided with a pair of third flow path constituents 336 that are connected to the left and right inner ends of the 335 to form a flow path for the sphere and are recessed on the left and right inner sides of the front frame-shaped portion 333.

Further, the middle member 330 has a left-right long shape formed through the lower bottom on the rear side of the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 and functions as a discharge path for a ball, and the discharge hole 337 and the discharge hole 337 thereof. A partition plate portion 338 formed in a long plate shape in the front-rear direction so as to partition the third flow path constituent portion 336 to the left and right, and a rectangular plate long left and right from the lower side surface at the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336. A pair of alignment projecting portions 339, which are projecting as shape convex portions, are provided.

Unlike the front side portion that constitutes the flow path of the sphere, the rear frame-shaped portion 332 does not form the flow path of the sphere, but is mainly configured as a portion that supports the substrate 350 and the state switching device 360. The rear frame-shaped portion 332 has an arrangement through hole 332a formed through the front end portion of the left and right central portion in the vertical direction so that the slide displacement member 370 can be arranged, and as a long through hole in the left and right direction. A plurality of female screw portions having a guide hole 332b formed through the lower bottom portion to guide the slide displacement of the guided portion 362c of the state switching device 360 and a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted into the lower member 380 is formed so as to be screwable. It includes a fastened portion 332c and a cylindrically fastened portion 332d having a female screw portion at the upper tip into which a fastening screw inserted into the insertion cylinder portion 315 of the upper member 310 can be screwed.

Since the front frame-shaped portion 333 is light-diffused on the inside of the frame and the front and back surfaces of the lower bottom portion, the visibility of the back side of the front frame-shaped portion 333 is lowered. The front frame-shaped portion 333 is formed in a frame shape having a substantially square shape when viewed from above, and is formed as an insertion hole 333a through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 of the upper member 310 can be inserted. To prepare for.

The first flow path constituent unit 334, the second flow path constituent unit 335, and the third flow path constituent unit 336 are portions that constitute the flow path of the sphere, so that the flow direction of the sphere, the inclination angle, and the like are different. It is designed, but details will be described later.

The symmetric projecting portion 161f (see FIG. 12) of the variable winning device 65 can enter the open portion 335a in which the front side is opened at the connection position between the second flow path constituent portion 335 and the third flow path constituent portion 336. It is a void for making. That is, the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is arranged so as to enter the inside of the flow path through the opening portion 335a so as to be able to come into contact with the sphere flowing down the distribution device 300.

The discharge holes 337 are partitioned by the partition plate portion 338, and are composed of a pair of left and right spheres, and are formed in a size that allows the spheres to be discharged in at least two paths. That is, it is composed of at least a left-right length that is at least twice the diameter of the sphere. In the present embodiment, since a plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged side by side in the lower member 380 arranged below the discharge hole 337, the discharge hole 337 is arranged according to the arrangement of the ball through holes of the detection sensor SE1. You just have to design the shape of.

The partition plate portion 338 functions as a guide portion for guiding the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in addition to the function of partitioning the third flow path constituent portion 336 as described above, and the details will be described later. The alignment protrusion 339 is fitted to the protrusion 383a of the lower member 380 to avoid a misalignment between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, and the details will be described later.

The substrate 350 is formed in an inverted T shape in which the lower portion 353 is longer on the left and right than the upper portion 352, and is recessed in the lower end portion on the left end side of the lower portion 353 for alignment. A unit 354 is provided.

The recessed portion 354 is positioned in the left-right direction by engaging with the corresponding portion as the internal shape of the middle member 330, and the left and right long lower portions 353 are front and rear of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 of the middle member 330. Positioning is performed in the front-rear direction by being supported so as to be sandwiched between the upper members 310, and the upper portion 352 is accommodated in the accommodating recess 320 of the upper member 310 to prevent the upper portion 352 from falling off so that the arrangement is fixed. Although it is configured, details will be described later together with the intention of arranging the light emitting means 351.

The state switching device 360 is a device housed in the rear frame-shaped portion 332 of the middle member 330, and is a tip of a plunger supported by the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so as to be displaced in a linear motion in the left-right direction. A slide portion 362 that is engaged with and slides and displaces together with the plunger, and a rotating portion 363 that is rotatably supported by being inserted through the fastened portion 332d on the left side and rotates with the slide displacement of the slide portion 362. , Equipped with.

The slide portion 362 includes a recessed portion 362a in which the disk portion 361a at the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is recessed so as to be acceptable from above, an overhanging portion 362b protruding from the right side surface to the right side, and a lower side surface. It is provided with a guided portion 362c which is projected downward from the front and rear central portion of the above and is formed in a long oval cross section in the left-right direction.

Since the disk portion 361a supports the slide portion 362 from above from the forming direction of the recessed portion 362a, it is possible to prevent the slide portion 362 from falling off upward. Therefore, the arrangement of the slide portion 362 can be maintained between the disc portion 361a and the lower bottom portion of the middle member 330 without fixing the slide portion 362 to the disc portion 361a with an adhesive or the like.

The guided portion 362c is a portion for preventing the displacement direction of the slide portion 362 from deviating from the left-right direction by being inserted into the guide hole 332b of the middle member 330. In particular, in the present embodiment, since it is formed to be long in the left-right direction, the posture of the slide portion 362 can be maintained by engaging the guided portion 362c with the guide hole 332b. The cross-sectional shape of the guided portion 362c is not necessarily limited to this, and may be, for example, a circle or a rectangle.

The rotating portion 363 is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from above, and is formed in a vertically long cylindrical shape at the L-shaped connecting portion, and penetrates a size capable of inserting the fastened portion 332d of the middle member 330. A support cylinder portion 363a having a hole, an upper columnar portion 363b which is projected upward in a columnar shape from the tip on the short side of the L-shape and is inserted into a through hole of the overhanging portion 362b, and an L-shaped longitudinal portion. It is provided with a lower columnar portion 363c that is projected downward from the side tip portion in a columnar shape and is inserted into the recessed portion 378 of the slide displacement member 370.

With the above configuration, the rotating portion 363 is configured to be rotatable around the support cylinder portion 363a as a central axis. The displacement of the rotating portion 363 is caused by a change in the state of the electromagnetic solenoid 361. That is, when the plunger is displaced by being energized by the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the slide portion 362 is displaced in the left-right direction, the upper cylindrical portion 363b inserted through the through hole of the overhanging portion 362b is displaced accordingly. The lower cylindrical portion 363c is displaced, resulting in displacement of the slide displacement member 370.

The slide displacement member 370 is a member that is supported so as to slide and displace in the front-rear direction at a position between the upper and lower members of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, and is a lower bottom portion and a lower member of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 of the middle member 330. A thin plate portion 371 that is sandwiched and supported by 380 from above and below, an upper protrusion 376 that projects upward in pairs from the thin plate portion 371, and a center on the left and right behind the upper protrusion 376. It is provided with a recessed portion 378 that is recessed at the protruding end portion of the protruding portion that is projected upward in the portion and is formed so as to be able to accept the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363.

The thin plate portion 371 has a pair of left and right supported holes 371a formed through the rear half portion, and the front and rear lengths are shorter than the arrangement interval between the front side end portion and the upper protrusion portion 376 in the left and right central portions. A recessed portion 372, a pair of lower protrusions 373 that are projected downward in the shape of a protrusion along the edge of the recessed portion 372, and a protrusion along the left and right edges in the rear half portion. A plurality of vertical protrusions 374 that are projected in both the upper and lower directions in a strip shape, and a columnar protrusion 375 that is projected downward from the rear end in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the guide slot 386 of the lower member 380. Be prepared.

The lower ridge portion 373 and the upper and lower ridge portions 374 are portions that are supposed to face and slide with the middle member 330 or the lower member 380 arranged on the upper and lower sides, and are in the middle as compared with the contact on a flat surface. It is a ridge for reducing the contact area with the member 330 and the lower member 380. By reducing the contact area, the displacement resistance of the slide displacement member 370 can be reduced, so that it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the slide displacement member 370 from slowing down.

The upper projecting portion 376 is a columnar portion having a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view, and is arranged so as to pass through the arrangement through hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear side frame-shaped portion 332. The width and length of the left and right inner gaps of the upper projecting portion 376 are designed to be slightly longer than the left and right thickness of the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330. With this configuration, the partition plate portion 338 can guide the displacement of the upper protrusion portion 376.

In other words, the upper projecting portion 376 is arranged so as to sandwich the partition plate portion 338 in the gap between the left and right inner sides, and is configured to suppress the positional deviation in the left-right direction due to the contact with the partition plate portion 338. As a result, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be satisfactorily guided, and the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 can be maintained in the front-rear direction.

The recessed portion 378 is formed as a long hole in the left-right direction so as to be able to cope with the displacement of the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 required to cause the displacement in the front-rear direction of the slide displacement member 370. NS.

The projecting portion on which the recessed portion 378 is formed is configured to pass through the placement through hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332, so that the lower cylinder of the rotating portion 363 is formed. The portion 363c can be easily inserted into the recessed portion 378.

As described above, the shape of the placement through hole 332a includes the entire range in which the upper projecting portion 376 to be inserted and the projecting portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed are arranged inside. Designed as a through hole.

The lower member 380 has the above-mentioned insertion hole 381, a plate-shaped portion 382 formed in a long thin plate shape on the left and right, and a plurality of detection sensors (four in the present embodiment) on the lower side of the plate-shaped portion 382. It is provided with a sensor holding frame portion 389 formed in a frame shape so that SE1s can be arranged side by side.

The sensor holding frame portion 389 has a frame shape in which an opening is formed between a rear side surface into which the detection sensor SE1 is inserted and an upper and lower side surfaces through which a sphere passing through a through hole of the detection sensor SE1 passes, and the other portions are closed. Is formed in.

In the plate-shaped portion 382, a through hole is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole of the detection sensor SE1 in the same manner as the through hole in the vertical direction is formed in the sensor holding frame portion 389, and the two detection sensors on the left and right inside are formed. A pair of protrusions 383 that are projected upward in the shape of a long protrusion in the front-rear direction at the intermediate position of SE1 and a pair of protrusions that are projected at positions separated from the front end of the protrusion 383 to the left and right. A pair of guide protrusions 384 that are projected at a position that can be inserted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370 at a position rearward from the provision portion 383a and the protrusion portion 383, and a guide protrusion portion 384 thereof. A pair of guide ridges 385 formed as long ridges in the front-rear direction at both positions on the left and right sides of the ridge, and a long hole-shaped guide ridge 386 extending in the same straight line as the ridge portion 383 in the top view. A curved surface portion 387 formed in the shape of a curved surface projecting rearward on the front side surface, and an insertion hole 388 formed through the fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 332c of the middle member 330 so as to be inserted. ..

The ridge portion 383 is formed as a ridge having a thickness slightly shorter than the left and right gap width of the recessed portion 372 of the slide displacement member 370, and the slide displacement member 370 sandwiches the ridge portion 383 with the recessed portion 372. Be placed. That is, the ridge portion 383 functions as a guide portion for guiding the displacement in the front-rear direction of the slide displacement member 370.

The protrusion 383a is designed so that the left and right inner ends are at the same positions as the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusion 339 of the middle member 330. That is, the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusion 339 are fitted to the left and right inner ends of the pair of protrusions 383a in such a manner that the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusions 339 are in contact with each other. The position of the direction can be determined appropriately. At the same time, the lower side surface of the frame front portion of the lower member 380 (the portion connecting the protrusion portion 383 with the protrusion portion 383a on the front end side) and the front side surface of the alignment protrusion portion 339 are brought into contact with each other. The position of the middle member 330 in the front-rear direction with respect to the member 380 can be appropriately determined.

As a result, it is possible to easily avoid a positional shift between the third flow path constituent portion 336 as a configuration of the middle member 330 and the detection sensor SE1 as a configuration of the lower member 380.

The guide protrusion 384 is formed in an oval shape that is long on the left and right, and is inserted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370 to limit the displacement of the slide displacement member 370. That is, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the displacement within the range in which the guide protrusion 384 is arranged inside the supported hole 371a.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the slide displacement member 370 from colliding with the ridge portion 383. Therefore, for example, the displacement end in the forward direction is determined by the position where the slide displacement member 370 and the ridge portion 383 collide. Compared with the configuration, the durability of the ridge portion 383 can be improved. Therefore, the guidance effect of the ridge portion 383 can be continuously played for a long time.

The guide protrusion 384 does not immediately affect the operation of the slide displacement member 370 even if it is damaged, but functions as a portion for preventing a collision with the protrusion 383. Therefore, normally, the design is made with a strength that can maintain the use for a set period (for example, 3 years) in a state where the guide protrusion 384 is not damaged, but after the guide protrusion 384 is damaged, the protrusion 383 is used. The strength of the guide protrusion 384 and the protrusion 383 may be designed in anticipation of use in a state where the slide displacement member 370 collides with the slide displacement member 370. That is, the life of the guide protrusion 384 may be set to be less than the set period (for example, 2 years), and the remaining period may be designed to withstand the strength of the protrusion 383. In this case, the degree of freedom in setting the resin material used for the lower member 380 and the degree of freedom in shape can be improved.

The guide ridge 385 is arranged with a gap width slightly longer than the left-right width of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, and the thin plate portion 371 is formed so as to be able to be arranged in the gap. The displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the displacement on the left and right inside of the guide ridge 385. As a result, the displacement in the front-rear direction of the slide displacement member 370 can be generated with a small displacement in the left-right direction.

The guide long hole 386 is a long hole formed with a left-right width through which the cylindrical protrusion 375 of the slide displacement member 370 can be inserted. The direction of displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited in the front-rear direction by guiding the cylindrical protrusion 375 to the guide slot 386.

The curved surface portion 387 is a contact surface for guiding the flow of a sphere flowing down below the middle member 330. In the present embodiment, the flow of the ball that has entered the out port 71 will be guided, but the details will be described later.

A fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 388 with the screw head facing downward. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being conspicuously visually recognized. Further, the insertion holes 388 are arranged on the left and right outer sides and the back side of the range in which the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 388 obstructs the view of the ball passing through the vicinity of the detection sensor SE1 or the through hole of the detection sensor SE1.

As described above, the slide displacement member 370 has a plurality of portions, that is, a guide protrusion 385 for the thin plate portion 371, a guide protrusion 384 for the supported hole 371a, a recessed portion 372, and a lower protrusion 373. It is guided in the front-rear direction by being guided by the protrusion 383, the guide slot 386 for the columnar protrusion 375, the partition plate portion 338 for the upper protrusion 376, and the like. As a result, the load at the time of guidance can be distributed to a plurality of positions, so that it is possible to avoid applying the load locally, and it is possible to avoid damage to the slide displacement member 370 and the guide portion for guiding the slide displacement member 370. Can be done.

As can be seen from this, the slide displacement member 370 is not guided by a single member, but is guided by at least a plurality of members of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380. That is, in the slide displacement member 370, at least the pair of upper protrusions 376 is guided to the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330, and the recessed portion 372 is guided to the protrusions 383 of the lower member 380.

Therefore, if the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are poorly assembled and the arrangement is large, the movement of the slide displacement member 370 is hindered. Here, the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are preferably placed so that the displacement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is kept small as a portion that continuously constitutes the flow path of the sphere, and the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is considered to be good. It can be guaranteed that the displacement is small.

In other words, if the misalignment of the lower member 380 with respect to the middle member 330 becomes excessively large, the slide displacement member 370 will not be displaced satisfactorily. Therefore, by detecting that the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is defective. , It is possible to control to execute the error notification as the relative arrangement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 may be defective.

Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game from being continued in a state where the relative arrangement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is poor, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player suffers an unexpected disadvantage.

Next, the details of the internal structure of the sorting device 300 will be described. Here, a configuration related to the flow of the sphere inside the distribution device 300 and a configuration of entering the flow path side of the sphere will be mainly described.

15 is a front view of the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300, FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 in the XVI-XVI line of FIG. 15, and FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view. 15 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 on the XVII-XVII line, and FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 on the XVIII-XVIII line of FIG.

In FIGS. 15 to 18, when shown, the opening / closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in a state of being arranged at the front position. First, the details of the flow path of the sphere flowing down inside the distribution device 300 will be described.

The ball landing on the opening / closing plate 65b when the opening / closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6B) rolls on the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passing hole 163b. The sphere that has passed through the sphere passage hole 163b passes through the opening 312 of the upper member 310 and is guided to the first flow path constituent portion 334 of the middle member 330. The first flow path component 334, the second flow path component 335 following it, and the third flow path component 336 following it are all configured as a downwardly inclined flow path, and the flow paths connected to each other are connected to each other. Is formed in a spiral shape at an angle of 90 degrees when viewed from above.

That is, the first flow path component 334 is formed as an inclined flow path for flowing the sphere toward the front side in the front-rear direction, and the second flow path component 335 is based on the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the first flow path component 334. The third flow path component 336 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down in the left-right direction rotated by 90 degrees, and the third flow path component 336 is the same as the previous rotation direction with respect to the flow direction of the ball flowing down the second flow path component 335. It is formed as an inclined flow path that causes a sphere to flow down to the back side in the front-rear direction rotated by 90 degrees in the direction.

By forming the flow path in a spiral shape having a right-angled bending angle in this way, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the flow velocity of the sphere increases toward the downstream side. More specifically, the sphere flowing down the first flow path component 334 accelerates toward the front side, but the flow direction in the subsequent second flow path component 335 does not have a front-back direction component, so that the first flow path has no component. It is possible to realize a flow mode in which the influence of the acceleration in the component unit 334 is suppressed. Further, in the third flow path component 336 following the second flow path component 335, the flow flows backward in the direction opposite to the acceleration direction in the first flow path component 334, so that the flow is received from the acceleration in the front-rear direction. It is possible to realize a flow mode in which the influence is suppressed.

Therefore, for example, unlike the flow-down mode in which the ball flows consistently in the same direction (for example, to the left) from beginning to end, it is possible to easily avoid an excessive flow-down speed of the sphere on the downstream side. In other words, the flow velocity of the ball can be made uniform in the entire flow path, the player's attention to the ball can be kept high, and the situation where the player loses sight of the ball can be easily avoided. It has the effect of being able to do it.

Further, for example, it is possible not to form the second flow path constituent portion 335, but it is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged or backflow by forming the second flow path constituent portion 335. When the second flow path constituent portion 335 is not formed (when the length of the second flow path constituent portion 335 in the left-right direction is 0), that is, the first flow path constituent portion 334 and the third flow path constituent portion 336 are formed. When they are connected, it is necessary to reverse the flow direction of the sphere from the flow on the front side to the flow on the rear side by 180 degrees at the connection point. In this case, the switching angle of the flow direction of the sphere is large, and in particular, it is necessary to reverse the velocity direction back and forth, so that it is difficult to flow the sphere smoothly, and the sphere tends to stay, clog, or backflow, which is a problem. May occur.

On the other hand, if the switching angle in the flow direction is 90 degrees or less (90 degrees in the present embodiment) as in the present embodiment, the sphere does not reverse in the velocity direction, so that the sphere flows smoothly. This makes it easier to avoid stagnation, clogging, and backflow of balls.

The shape of the flow path at the connection end of each flow path component 334 to 336 will be described. At the connection end portion between the second flow path constituent portion 335 and the third flow path constituent portion 336, the above-mentioned symmetrical projecting portion 161f is arranged as a portion for guiding the flow of the sphere in a manner of bending the flow direction of the sphere. Will be done.

The symmetrical projecting portion 161f is formed so that the portion arranged on the downstream side recedes from the path of the sphere rather than the portion arranged on the upstream side of the sphere. For example, the left-right width of the symmetrical projecting portions 161f arranged opposite to each other is formed longer than the left-right width of the partition plate portions 338 arranged adjacent to each other. Further, the rear end portions on the left and right end sides of the symmetrical projecting portions 161f that are arranged to face each other are arranged on the front side rather than the flow path side surface of the second flow path constituent portion 335 near the open portion 335a (FIG. 17). reference).

Thereby, when the sphere collides with the symmetrical projecting portion 161f, it is possible to prevent the sphere from being excessively decelerated or causing a backflow of the sphere.

Further, at the connection end portion between the second flow path constituent portion 335 and the first flow path constituent portion 334, the side wall portion 334a curved and formed at the front left and right ends of the middle member 330 bends the flow direction of the sphere. It is formed as a portion that guides the flow of the sphere in the embodiment.

Further, at the upstream end of the first flow path component 334, the curved surface shape (see FIG. 16) whose arrangement is lowered toward the front side is projected upward from the flow bottom portion of the first flow path component 334. The curved protrusion 334b is formed as a portion that guides the flow of the sphere in a manner of bending the flow direction of the sphere.

That is, the sphere that has passed through the opening 312 rolls on the curved protrusion 334b, flows down the first flow path constituent portion 334, and abuts on the side wall portion 334a during the flow to switch the flow direction, and the second flow direction is switched. The flow direction is switched by flowing down the flow path constituent portion 335 and abutting against the symmetrical projecting portion 161f during the flow down, and the third flow path constituent portion 336 flows down to reach the discharge hole 337.

The side wall portion 334a engages with the projecting support portion 161d of the fixed member 161 and is formed from a shape that can be aligned. That is, the side wall portion 334a is supported so as to be sandwiched between the left and right projecting support portions 161d, and the positional deviation in the left-right direction is restricted, so that the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 are aligned in the left-right direction. It can be performed.

The ratio of the inclination angle and the length in the longitudinal direction of each flow path constituent unit 334 to 336 will be described. Regarding the inclination angle in the longitudinal direction, the first flow path component 334 has an inclination angle of about 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and the second flow path component 335 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal. The flow path constituent portion 336 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal. That is, the inclination angle is set to the maximum in the first flow path constituent unit 334, and is set to a slightly looser common inclination angle in the second flow path configuration unit 335 and the third flow path configuration unit 336.

Regarding the length, each flow path constituent portion 334 to 336 has a front side frame-shaped portion 333 formed in an outer square shape as an inner side surface in a top view, and has the same center as the center of the square formed by the front side frame-shaped portion 333. It is formed so that the large square it has is the outer side surface. Here, in the present embodiment, the length of one side of the front frame-shaped portion 333 is 21 mm, and the length of one side of the large square described above is 45 mm, so that a flow path having a width of 12 mm is formed around the perimeter. It is formed.

Therefore, since the clearance with the flow path is 1 mm in total on both sides of the sphere having a diameter of 11 mm, which is normally used, the sphere will flow down with almost no misalignment in the width direction. .. Considering that the distance between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) is defined by about 19 mm, it can be said that this is a small clearance, and the position of the flowing ball is displaced. It can be suppressed.

Of the portions constituting the end portions of the flow path constituent portions 334 to 336 arranged on the square surrounding the square front frame-shaped portion 333, the upstream end portion of the first flow path constituent portion 334 is used. Since only the constituent curved protrusions 334b are arranged inside (front side) from the apex of the square, the first flow path component 334 is attached to the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336. Compared to short.

Speaking from the measured values in the top view, the flow path formed by the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336 has substantially the same length (33 mm at the distance between the center of the sphere), and the length is It is about 1.5 times the length of the flow path formed by the first flow path component member 334 (22 mm at the distance between the centers of the spheres).

From the ratio of the inclination angle and the length in the longitudinal direction of each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 described above, it can be explained that the time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 is not constant. That is, the time for passing through the first flow path component 334 having the maximum inclination angle and the shortest flow path length is the second flow path component 335 in which the inclination angle is loosened and the path length is 1.5 times longer. And shorter than the time to pass through the third flow path component 336.

In the present embodiment, with this configuration, the arrangement shifts to the back side when passing through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, and a part of the detection sensor SE1 is hidden by the non-permeable resin portion. The state in which the visibility of the ball deteriorates can be displaced to the front side at an early stage, and the state can be switched to a state in which the ball is close to the player and the visibility of the ball is high. This makes it easier for the player to avoid losing sight of the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

Furthermore, when the visibility of the ball is high, by slowing the flow speed of the ball, it is not necessary for the player to quickly move the line of sight toward the ball, and the player's game burden (movement of the eyeball) paying attention to the ball. (Eye strain due to) can be reduced.

When paying attention to the sphere flowing down the second flow path constituent portion 335 and the third flow path constituent portion 336, the sphere flows down in the left-right direction along the second flow path constituent portion 335. Compared with the case, when the ball flows down in the front-rear direction along the third flow path component 336, the displacement amount of the ball in the front view is smaller, so that the player who pays attention to the ball has a game burden. , It can be minimized when paying attention to the sphere flowing down the third flow path component 336.

In other words, since the length and the inclination angle are the same, the time required for the sphere to pass through the second flow path component 335 and the time required for the sphere to pass through the third flow path component 336. However, since the displacement amount of the sphere in the front view is different, as a result, the apparent flow speed of the sphere (displacement speed of the sphere in the front view) flows down the third flow path component 336. The sphere is slower than the sphere flowing down the second flow path component 335.

The flow path of the ball changes only at the rear end of the third flow path component 336, which minimizes the game load and makes it easy to draw attention to the ball. It is common in. Therefore, the line of sight of the player tends to be naturally concentrated on the rear end portion of the third flow path component portion 336, and the game burden of the player who concentrates the line of sight in this way can be effectively reduced.

Further, in order to secure the field of view of the player paying attention to the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336, in the present embodiment, the open portion 335a is formed on the front side surface of the second flow path constituent portion 335. (See FIG. 17), it is possible to avoid obstructing the line of sight toward the third flow path constituent portion 336 by the meat portion of the second flow path constituent portion 335.

Further, the symmetrical projecting portion 161f arranged inside the open portion 335a is formed only with a portion necessary for contact and guidance with the flowing sphere, and the formation of the shaped portion is omitted on the upper and lower sides thereof. Will be done. In other words, the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is formed as a thin plate-shaped portion on the upper and lower sides, and a space is secured on the upper and lower sides thereof (see FIG. 18). Therefore, as compared with the case where the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is formed with a thickness in the vertical direction, there is a possibility that the line of sight toward the rear end portion of the third flow path component portion 336 is obstructed by the symmetrical projecting portion 161f. It can be lowered and visibility can be improved.

Further, the spheres are configured so as to deviate from the opening / closing plate 65b and head toward the out port 71 toward the visual field side centered on the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 (see FIG. 5). In particular, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the out port 71 flows down below the third flow path constituent portion 336, abuts on the curved surface portion 387 of the lower member 380, and is discharged downward.

Therefore, assuming a line of sight for visually recognizing the ball flowing down the third flow path constituent portion 336 from the diagonally upper front side, the ball entering the out port 71 flows down the back side of the third flow path constituent portion 336. Therefore, since the ball flowing down the third flow path constituent portion 336 and the ball entering the out port 71 are covered in the front-rear direction and visually recognized, pay attention to the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336. The total number of spheres that enter the field of view increases.

In other words, the ball does not depend on whether it is a ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a and flows down the third flow path component 336, or a ball that does not enter the specific winning opening 65a and enters the out opening 71. Enters the field of view paying attention to the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336.

Therefore, regardless of the ease with which the ball faces the specific winning opening 65a, that is, the nail configuration (so-called gauge quality) planted on the base plate 60, most of the fired balls (other winning openings 63, The rear end portion (the portion that attracts the attention of the player) of the third flow path constituent portion 336 is arranged at the position where the balls (excluding the balls that have entered 64 and 140) gather and the positions where the balls are covered in the front-rear direction. As a result, the line of sight can be efficiently guided to the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 by the flowing sphere.

As described above, the visibility at the position closer to the front side has been improved, but in the present embodiment, the visibility at the position closer to the back side is excluded except for the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336. It is configured to reduce it.

For example, a light diffusion processed surface 333b for causing a light diffusion action is formed on the inner surface of the front frame-shaped portion 333 of the middle member 330 in a shape that resembles a prism. In FIG. 17, the portion visually recognized as a sawtooth is the light diffusion processed surface 333b, which is formed on almost the entire inner circumference of the inner side surface and over the upper and lower sides.

When the action of light diffusion occurs, the light is diffused in multiple directions, so that the entire surface is visually recognized as if it is shining. The visibility of the back side is deteriorated. According to the present embodiment, the visibility is deteriorated when the light is irradiated from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350, and conversely, when the light is not irradiated, at least compared with the state where the light is irradiated. The visibility can be improved.

On the other hand, if there is a shield between the light and the light, the shadow of the shield is visually recognized as a black spot, and it becomes easy to determine the position.

A machined surface similar to the light diffusion machined surface 333b is formed in other portions. For example, a light diffusion processed surface 319a formed on the back side surface of the left and right outer protrusions 319, a light diffusion processed surface 332e formed on the back side surface of the frame front portion of the rear side frame-shaped portion 332, and the like (FIG. 17). reference).

Further, the machined surface formed in the same shape is a plate-shaped portion extending on the back surface side of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310, and is formed on the front frame-shaped portion 333 of the middle member 330 in the assembled state. Examples thereof include a light diffusion processed surface 314c formed on the upper surface side of the portion to be covered, a light diffusion processed surface 340 formed over the entire lower surface of the portion on the front side of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 of the middle member 330, and the like. Will be done.

With these configurations, in the present embodiment, light is diffused on the back surface side, the lower surface side, the inner side surface of the vortex, and the upper side surface of the vortex of the flow path formed in a vortex shape from the flow path constituent portions 334 to 336, respectively. A machined surface is formed, and the effect of the change in visibility due to light irradiation is aimed at.

In a state where the light diffusion processed surface is not irradiated with light, the direction is changed from the third flow path component 336 to the left and right from the player's point of view paying attention to the rear end of the third flow path component 336 from the front side. The sphere can be hidden by the front frame-shaped portion 333 to make it difficult to see immediately.

Further, let's look at the ball after passing through the detection sensor SE1 held by the sensor holding frame portion 389 and falling from the player's point of view to visually recognize the ball flowing down the third flow path constituent portion 336 when viewed from diagonally above. Even so, since the line of sight passes through the light diffusion processed surface 340, it becomes difficult to identify the sphere after passing through the detection sensor SE1 and falling due to the light irradiation on the light diffusion processed surface 340. ..

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, it is controlled so that the profit obtained by the player changes depending on how the ball flows down the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336.

Therefore, in order to grasp how the sphere has flowed down from the rear end of the third flow path component 336, it is necessary to confirm the behavior of the sphere at the rear end of the third flow path component 336. , It is possible to further improve the attention to the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336.

On the other hand, if the light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, it is possible to configure a state in which the shadow of the sphere is easily recognized as a black spot. In this way, by switching the presence or absence of light irradiation according to the situation, it is possible to switch between good and bad visibility of the sphere. Further, depending on the presence or absence of the arrangement of the sphere on the front side of the black dot, it is possible to configure a situation in which the black dot is hidden by the sphere and a situation in which the black dot is not hidden by the sphere.

As described above, the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, 340 are formed in the vicinity of the flow path constituents 334 to 336, but the flow is consistently formed by the flow path constituents 334 to 336. It is formed on the side surface on the side that does not come into contact with the ball flowing down the road.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, 340 from being scraped by contact with the sphere, so that the shapes of the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, 340 can be maintained for a long period of time. And can maintain the action of light diffusion.

Further, when the sphere comes into contact with the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, 340, it is possible to prevent the sphere from being hindered from flowing down or being affected by deceleration. In addition, by ensuring the visibility inside the flow path, the visibility of the sphere is reduced even while the sphere is flowing down the flow path formed by the flow path constituents 334 to 336. You can avoid that.

The light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 may be intentionally formed on the flow path side. In this case, depending on the setting of the size of the prism, the effect of causing the action of light diffusion and the effect of decelerating the sphere by collision with the sphere can be achieved.

In the front frame-shaped portion 333 of the middle member 330, the formation of the light diffusion processed surface 333b is omitted at the fastening position with the fastened portion 316 due to the difficulty of processing, and the visibility is maintained high without countermeasures. there is a possibility. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the visibility is reduced by the fastening screw.

That is, the fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 is made of metal and is non-transparent, so that it can be used as a blindfold in a place where it is difficult to form the light diffusion processed surface 333b. When the front frame-shaped portion 333 is irradiated with light, the light diffusion processed surface 333b shines brightly, and the fastening screw reflects light and shines in the portion where the formation of the light diffusion processed surface 333b is omitted, so that the light is diffused. It is possible to reduce the visibility of the back side of the front frame-shaped portion 333 in the line of sight from the front side, including the portion where the formation of the machined surface 333b is omitted.

The light diffusion processed surface 332e of the middle member 330 is formed on the back surface side of each flow path constituent portion 334 to 336. For this purpose, in addition to shining brightly, the substrate 350 arranged on the back surface side. And to give rise to the function of the state switching device 360 as a blindfold. In particular, since the state switching device 360 is arranged on the back side of the substrate 350 (see FIG. 17), the substrate 350 becomes a blindfold, and it is possible to easily prevent the state switching device 360 from being visually recognized by the player.

The substrate 350 is housed in a form of being supported by the rear frame-shaped portion 332 of the middle member 330, but is arranged in the left and right central portions with a gap from the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332, and slides in the gap. The displacement member 370 is arranged (see FIG. 18). That is, the substrate 350 is arranged at a position where the slide displacement member 370 is sandwiched between the slide displacement member 370 and the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332.

More specifically, the substrate 350 is supported so that the lower side portion 353 is sandwiched between the rear side frame-shaped portions 332 at the left and right ends from the front and back (see FIG. 17). At this support location, the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 is provided with a wall thickness portion 332f having a wall thickness (see FIG. 16), and there is a gap in the vicinity of the left and right center positions due to the absence of this wall thickness. Born, the slide displacement member 370 can be placed in the gap (see FIG. 18).

As shown in FIG. 18, the upper portion 352 of the substrate 350 enters the inside of the accommodating recess 320 of the upper member 310 and is arranged so as to face the light diffusion processed surface 164f formed in the intervening member 164 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, by irradiating light from the light emitting means 351 arranged on the upper side portion 352, the light diffusion processed surface 164f of the intervening member 164 can produce a brilliant effect, and further, the back side of the intervening member 164 can be produced. The visibility of the range of can be reduced.

Here, the light emitting means 351 arranged on the upper portion 352 irradiates light near the lower end portion of the light diffusion processed surface 164f, and the light diffusion processed surface 164f has a cross-sectional shape portion imitating a prism along the surface. Since it is formed in the entire vertical direction, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized as light having a wide vertical width. Therefore, from the player's point of view, it is possible to make it appear as if the light is emitted above and below the specific winning opening 65a.

In the field of view from the front side, the light diffusion processed surface 164f is arranged at the left and right center side positions of the receiving member 163, but even if it is arranged on the back side of the detection sensor SE1, the detection sensor SE1 obstructs the field of view and is good. Since it cannot be visually recognized, a sufficient effect can be obtained if it is formed in at least the arrangement gap of the pair of detection sensors SE1.

The lower portion 353 of the substrate 350 is arranged so as to irradiate the seal member 313 and the portion below the seal member 313 where the sphere flows down, and the details will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, switching of the flow path of the sphere passing through the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 and its significance will be described. In the description of FIGS. 19 and 20, FIGS. 15 to 18 will be referred to as appropriate.

19 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 on the XVII-XVII line of FIG. 15, and FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 on the XVIII-XVIII line of FIG. It is a figure. In FIGS. 19 and 20, when shown, the opening / closing plate 65b is shown in the closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in the state of being arranged at the rear position.

Here, the four left and right detection sensors SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame portion 389, the flow of a sphere to each detection sensor SE1, and the functions of each detection sensor SE1 will be described.

Two sets of the four detection sensors SE1 are arranged symmetrically, and include a probability variation detection sensor SE11 having a common function and a normal detection sensor SE12. The probability variation detection sensor SE11 is arranged inside in the left-right direction, and the normal detection sensor SE12 is arranged outside in the left-right direction.

The functions of these four detection sensors SE1 are different from those of the detection sensor SE1 arranged behind the opening / closing plate 65b. The detection sensor SE1 arranged behind the opening / closing plate 65b is a ball entry sensor that causes the payout of the prize ball. That is, when it is detected that a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a has entered the detection sensor SE1 behind it, a predetermined number of prize balls (10 for each detection in this embodiment) are paid out. It is paid out to the player side by the control device 111 (see FIG. 4).

On the other hand, the detection sensor SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame portion 389 is not a detection sensor that causes the payout of the prize ball, but as a detection sensor for changing the game state after the big hit game by detecting the incoming ball. Function.

As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the detection sensor SE1 arranged in the sensor holding frame portion 389 is used for switching the presence / absence of transition to the probabilistic state, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, the detection sensor SE1 may function as a ball entry sensor for switching whether or not to win the next big hit.

When the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front position (see FIGS. 17 and 18), the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so as to cover the thin plate portion 371 on the upper side of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 is provided. The ball is prevented from passing through. Therefore, the sphere passing through the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 is guided to the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 so as to be guided by the upper protrusion portion 376 of the slide displacement member.

Since the front side surface 376a facing the sphere of the upper projecting portion 376 is formed in an arc shape having a concave flow path side, the flowing sphere can be smoothly flowed toward the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12. Can be done.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), the slide displacement member 370 retracts rearward from above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and enters the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. The passage of the ball is allowed.

That is, which detection sensor SE1 the sphere passes through corresponds to the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 (front position or rear position). Then, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 during the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot game is controlled to be the probability variation state. In other words, if the ball is not detected as having passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and only passes through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the gaming state after the jackpot game is in the normal state (or the time saving state). ).

Here, it has been described above that in the present embodiment, probabilistic jackpots and normal jackpots are prepared as jackpot types. In order to realize this, in the present embodiment, different operation patterns are prepared as the operation patterns of the slide displacement member 370 for each jackpot type.

In other words, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled so as to operate in an operation pattern such that the sphere easily passes through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 in the case of a probability variation jackpot, and in the case of a normal jackpot, the sphere is controlled. The operation is controlled so as to operate in an operation pattern that is difficult to pass through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and easily passes through the through hole of the detection sensor SE12. The details of the control will be described later.

As described above, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is directly linked to the profit obtained by the player, and the arrangement naturally attracts the attention of the player. On the other hand, not a few fraudulent acts that attempt to illegally switch the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 have been found, and countermeasures against them are regarded as important.

As a premise, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is switched depending on whether or not the electromagnetic solenoid 361 of the state switching device 360 is energized. That is, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is not energized, the plunger and slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are arranged on the right side by an urging spring (not shown), and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is in front. By arranging on the side, the slide displacement member 370 is maintained in the front position.

On the other hand, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger and the slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are moved to the left side by the electromagnetic force, and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 (see FIG. 13, the concave portion of the slide displacement member 370). The slide displacement member 370 is maintained at the rear side position by displacing the portion (the portion inserted into the setting portion 378) toward the back surface side. This is a normal operation mode, and the energization of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 have a one-to-one correspondence.

A person who commits the above-mentioned fraudulent act may insert a fine metal wire such as a piano wire into the sorting device 300 through, for example, a ball payout opening or a gap between the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). There is a possibility that the thin metal wire is pressed against the slide displacement member 370 and the slide displacement member 370 is pushed inward to illegally create a state in which the ball can enter the probability variation detection sensor SE11. be.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the slide displacement member 370 is arranged, the thin plate portion 371 is arranged below the lower bottom portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 (see FIG. 18), so that the third flow When the thin metal wire is passed through the road constituent portion 336 and pressed against the slide displacement member 370, it is difficult to press it against the front end portion of the thin plate portion 371, and the metal wire is pressed against the upper protrusion portion 376. Since the front side surface 376a of the upper projecting portion 376 has a curved surface shape that allows the load to escape to the left and right outside as described above, even if a thin metal wire is pressed against it, the load can be released to the left and right outside. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the slide displacement member 370 is illegally displaced to the rear position.

In addition, the path to reach the slide displacement member 370 is not a straight line but a spiral, and the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 itself is far from the front side surface to the back surface side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). Since they are separated (about 10 cm), it is possible to make it difficult for the thin metal wire to reach the slide displacement member 370 in the first place.

From these configurations, there is also an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the state switching device 360 can be improved. That is, in the past, in response to the above-mentioned fraudulent activity, it is often configured to maintain the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 by mechanically devising a mechanism for transmitting the driving force (displacement regulation). The configuration of the state switching device 360 was limited. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is configured so that the load is not easily applied to the slide displacement member 370, so that the conditions required for the state switching device 360 can be partially omitted, and the design of the state switching device 360 is free. The degree can be increased.

Further, when a pressing load is applied to the slide displacement member 370 with a thin metal wire crawl through the third flow path constituent portion 336, the thin metal wire itself flows down the ball that tries to flow down the third flow path constituent portion 336. Therefore, it can be difficult to make the sphere reach the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

As described above, the profit obtained by the player changes greatly depending on whether the ball passes through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12. It is desirable to avoid it.

In the conventional model, when the ball is allowed to enter the probability variation detection sensor SE11, it is usually configured to restrict the entry into the detection sensor SE12, but in the present embodiment, the probability variation detection is performed. There is no movable member that restricts entry into the normal detection sensor SE12 in a state where entry into the sensor SE11 is permitted (see FIGS. 19 and 20), and entry into the normal detection sensor SE12 is also not provided. It is a configuration that can be made to.

Even with this configuration, if at least one ball passes through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 when 10 balls flow down, the probability variation state after the big hit game is secured. In the present embodiment, from such an idea, the material cost can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced by omitting the arrangement of the movable member that normally opens and closes the detection sensor SE12. Further, as a result of not arranging the movable member, maintenance due to a failure or malfunction of the movable member becomes unnecessary, and the pachinko machine can be used for a longer period of time than the life of the movable member.

On the other hand, as a device different from the movable member, as a device for guiding the sphere to the detection sensor SE1 on the appropriate side, the shape of the flow path and the arrangement of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319. And the shape are devised. That is, a portion (that is, a protrusion) in which a mechanism for preventing an unexpected ball from flowing to the normal detection sensor SE12 while the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear position is fixedly arranged inside the flow path. It is designed to be realized by the shape of the setting part 317, 318, 319). This will be described below.

First, the device of the flow path shape will be described. The lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path constituent portion 336 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines downward at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal toward the center side in the left-right direction (partition plate portion 338 side) in the lateral direction. (See FIG. 15).

Since this inclination angle is set so that the angle and direction are the same as the inclination in the longitudinal direction of the second flow path constituent unit 335, the second flow path configuration unit 335 to the third flow path configuration unit 336. It is possible to reduce the bounce of the ball (bounce in the direction away from the partition plate portion 338) when the ball flows in.

Due to this inclination in the lateral direction, the arrangement of the spheres flowing down the third flow path constituent portion 336 can be brought closer to the partition plate portion 338 side. Therefore, the ball when flowing down from the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 to the detection sensor SE1 side can be arranged on the side close to the partition plate portion 338, so that the slide displacement member 370 is located at the rear side position. In the arranged state, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball accidentally passes through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (detection sensor SE1 arranged away from the partition plate portion 338).

Further, regardless of the inclination of the lower bottom surface 336a in the lateral direction, the flow path formed by the flow path constituent portions 334 to 336 has a left-right direction path formed only by the second flow path constituent portion 335. Since the inclination direction is the center side of the left and right (partition plate portion 338 side), the speed in the left and right direction is generated inward to the left and right. This also reduces the possibility that the sphere will accidentally pass through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (detection sensor SE1 arranged away from the partition plate portion 338).

Next, the arrangement and shape of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, and 319 will be described. The spheres that have flowed down the third flow path constituent portion 336 are first arranged in close proximity to the left and right inner protrusions 318. The left and right inner protrusions 318 are the smallest protrusions among the protrusions 317, 318, and 319, but are on the front side of the center of the detection sensor SE1 and on the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370. Since it is arranged on the front side of the partition plate portion 338, it comes into contact with a ball passing through the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 without leakage while sliding on the partition plate portion 338.

The protruding tip surface of the left and right inner protruding portions 318 is configured as a downwardly concave curved surface when viewed from the front (see FIG. 15), and the rear end side of the protruding portion is left and right than the front end side of the protruding portion. It is formed so as to spread outward and downward, and the front and rear ends are connected by a concave curved surface (see FIG. 17). Therefore, the sphere that has passed through the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 and has come into contact with the left and right inner projecting portions 318 receives a load in the direction in which the left and right outward components and the downward components are mixed and flows down. ..

On the other hand, since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are formed in a small size, the flow direction of the sphere is not determined by the load received from the left and right inner protrusions 318, but the momentum. Functions as an attachment. Since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are arranged on the upstream side of the slide displacement member 370, the above-mentioned momentum occurs regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370.

The case of the flow of the sphere after the contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318 will be described separately. In the state where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged in the front position, the sphere rolls the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 while abutting on the upper protrusion 376 and the front-rear long protrusion 317 (see FIG. 18). It moves and normally flows to the detection sensor SE12 side.

The protrusion end portion of the front-rear length protrusion portion 317 has the same use as the upper protrusion portion 376. That is, since it is formed as a curved surface for switching the flow direction of the sphere, the radius of curvature of the curved surface is substantially the same as the radius of curvature of the front side surface 376a of the upper projecting portion 376. As a guide, the upper protrusion 376 constitutes a curved surface starting from the left and right inside and ending at the rear position of the center position of the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 in the top view (see FIG. 17), while the front and rear. The long projecting portion 317 has a curved surface whose starting point is the ceiling surface of the flow path and whose end point is close to the end point position (rear end position) of the front side surface 376a at the front side position of the slide displacement member 370 in the left-right direction view. It is configured (see FIG. 18).

Here, the upper side surface of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines downward to the left and right outside, and the ball that is urged to the left and right outside by contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318 makes use of that momentum. Since the flow flows in the left-right outward direction, the flow of the sphere can be smoothly formed.

Further, the left and right outer protrusions 319 are formed above the ball flowing in the left-right outward direction, and the ball bounce is suppressed, so that the ball can be smoothly flowed down. Since the purpose of the left and right outer protrusions 319 is not to switch the flow direction of the ball but to suppress the ball bounce, its shape is significantly different from that of the front-rear long protrusions 317, and the protrusion end is a probability change detection sensor. It is formed as a curved surface having a large radius of curvature formed from above the SE11 to above the normal detection sensor SE12.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the left and right outer protrusions 319 are arranged on the front side of the center of the opening of the detection sensor SE1 (that is, the center of the flow path) (see FIG. 19), the left and right outer protrusions 319. When the provision portion 319 and the sphere are in contact with each other in the vertical direction, the center of the sphere is likely to be arranged on the rear side of the thickness center of the left and right outer protrusion 319. Therefore, when the left and right outer protrusions 319 and the sphere come into contact with each other in the vertical direction, it is possible to easily apply a load having a rearward component to the sphere, so that the sphere flows backward to the front side. Can be prevented.

From these configurations, it is possible to easily prevent ball clogging or backflow of balls when a plurality of balls flow down.

In the state where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear position, the thin plate portion 371 and the upper projecting portion 376 are retracted behind the front-rear long projecting portion 317, so that the ball is retracted behind the front-rear long projecting portion 317. It comes in contact with and flows.

The front-rear long protrusion 317 has a surface shape of the protrusion end (curved surface) such that the normal passes through the center of the third flow path constituent portion 336, and is the center of the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. Since the thickness center is arranged directly behind the position, it is easy to give a load in which the components in the left-right direction are suppressed to the abutting sphere. This load functions as a load for flowing the sphere diagonally forward and downward because the protrusion tip of the front-rear long protrusion 317 has a concave curved surface shape (see FIG. 20).

Therefore, the ball that cannot reach the right by the momentum from the left and right inner protrusions 318 receives the load from the front-rear long protrusions 317 and flows diagonally forward and downward to the probability change detection sensor SE11 side.

Here, there is a concern that the ball may bounce back to the front side (backflow occurs) depending on the collision location with the front-rear long protrusion 317, but in the present embodiment, as described above, the left and right internal collisions may occur. Since the ball is squeezed diagonally downward from the left and right due to the contact with the setting portion 318, even if the sphere bounces toward the front side, the sphere remains at the rear end of the lower bottom portion of the third flow path component 336 (see FIG. 20). It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the third flow path constituent portion 336 flows backward only by colliding with the rear side surface (see FIG. 19) of the front side frame-shaped portion 333.

What is unique in this embodiment is that even when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear side position and the sphere flows to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 side, the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front side position and the sphere flows to the normal detection sensor SE12 side. As in the case, the sphere is displaced outward from the left and right inner protrusions 318 due to the load. This application will be described later.

The slide displacement member 370 is configured to be slidable at the front position and the rear position, and the slide displacement member is being flown down the third flow path constituent portion 336 toward the slide displacement member 370. When the 370 closes (moves from the rear position to the front position), a forward load may be applied to the sphere, and a load in the direction of backflowing the third flow path component 336 to the sphere (forward) is applied. May be given.

In order to prevent this, it is preferable to control the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370. For example, if the closing operation is controlled to be completed before the sphere reaches the slide displacement member 370, the possibility of the sphere colliding with the slide displacement member 370 in operation can be eliminated, so that the sphere can flow backward. The sex can be lowered.

Further, the front surface of the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 is formed as a curved surface facing the left and right outwards, and the left and right inner protrusions 318 are arranged so as to collide with each other without leaking to the ball. It is possible to cause an action of guiding the sphere that has reached the rear end portion of the flow path constituent portion 336 to the left and right outside. As a result, it is possible to prevent the backflow of the sphere from occurring.

Further, since the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 (the operation from the front side position to the rear side position) is not an operation in the direction opposite to the sphere but an operation toward the side away from the sphere, for example, the sphere is the slide displacement member 370. Even if the operation is executed while riding on the thin plate portion 371, the load of pushing the ball back to the front side is unlikely to occur. Therefore, it is considered that the opening operation is not likely to cause backflow of the sphere even if the control is executed at an arbitrary timing without considering the arrangement of the sphere.

When the sphere rolls on the thin plate portion 371 while rotating forward on the upper surface of the slide displacement member 370 (at the stage before it still flows to the left and right outside), the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 suppresses the rotation with respect to the sphere. Since the load is applied in the direction (backflip direction), the rotation of the sphere can be stopped, the flow of the sphere is stopped, and it is easy to move to free fall.

Therefore, when the slide displacement member 370 is opened while the sphere is rolling on the thin plate portion 371, it is possible to easily prevent the sphere from being guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by the rolling force up to that point. , The sphere can be easily guided to the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

The appearance of the distribution device 300 from the player's point of view in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment including the above-mentioned distribution device 300 will be described. In the following, as an example, cases will be described separately in a state where the angle of the line of sight with respect to the horizontal direction is different.

21 is a front view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 in the direction of arrow XXII of FIG. 16, and FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300. 16 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16.

As a premise, the player who operates the pachinko machine 10 can play the game in his / her favorite posture except that he / she grips and rotates the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 1). For example, the game is played by sufficiently separating the head from the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) with a line of sight (see FIG. 22) in a direction of horizontal or downward inclination of about 5 degrees from the horizontal. Alternatively, the game may be performed by bringing the head close to the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 with a line of sight (see FIG. 23) in a direction of downward inclination of about 30 degrees from the horizontal. In general, the former can secure a wider field of view, but it is difficult to notice small parts, while the latter has a narrow field of view, but it is easy to notice small parts in the field of view.

FIG. 21 is illustrated as a reference, and the following description will be made mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. In addition, in FIGS. 21 to 23, the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b is shown for convenience.

In FIG. 21, the light emitting means 351 is illustrated by an imaginary line. Although the light emitting means 351 is arranged symmetrically (see FIG. 13), only the left half portion is shown for ease of understanding. Since the functions of the light emitting means 351 arranged at the uppermost portion are as described above, the three light emitting means 351 in the left half portion arranged in the lower portion 353 will be described here.

First, the upper light emitting means 351 irradiates the seal member 313 with light. Since the seal member 313 is formed to be transparent in red as described above, when light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, the periphery of the seal member 313 is illuminated in red. This makes it possible to improve the player's attention to the seal member 313 and its surroundings. Since the seal member 313 is arranged directly above the third flow path constituent portion 336 (see FIG. 18), attention can be paid to the third flow path constituent portion 336.

The formation of the light diffusion processed surface 332e is omitted on the front side of the light emitting means 351 on the upper side (see FIG. 18). As a result, it is possible to prevent the light from the light emitting means 351 from being visually recognized as being stretched in the vertical direction by the light diffusion processing surface 332e, and it is possible to intensively illuminate the periphery of the seal member 313.

The light emission control is not limited in any way, but for example, during the jackpot game, the seal member 313 is controlled to irradiate light in a situation where it is desired to pay attention to the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336. By doing so, the seal member 313 can be focused on, and the line of sight can be naturally guided to the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 arranged below the seal member 313.

Next, the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side correspond to the positions directly above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, respectively. That is, the control of the light emitting means 351 causes the light emitting means 351 arranged directly above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 to emit light when the sphere enters the probability variation detection sensor SE11, while the sphere causes the normal detection sensor SE12 to emit light. By controlling the light emitting means 351 arranged at a position directly above the detection sensor SE12 to emit light when the ball enters, the player can be notified of the passage point of the ball.

The light emitted from these light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side is directed to the light diffusion processed surface. That is, the light emitting means 351 on the left and right center side is arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 332e (see FIG. 18), and the light emitting means 351 on the left and right outer sides is arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 319a (see FIG. 17). ing. The light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 332e are formed above and below each part.

Therefore, the position where the light from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized is not limited to the height position of the LED of the light emitting means 351 but is formed as a range having a vertical spread (as a band-shaped light extending vertically). Visible). Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23, the visibility of the light from the light emitting means 351 can be improved even if the angle of the line of sight of the player changes.

The angle of downward inclination (5 degrees) from the horizontal in FIG. 22 is the same as the inclination angle of the third flow path constituent portion 336. Therefore, in FIG. 22, the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 arranged at the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 can be visually recognized. However, since the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction, it is difficult to grasp the change due to the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in this view.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, in the directional view at an angle of 30 degrees from the horizontal, the vertical width of the field of view at the rear end portion of the third flow path component 336 is narrowed, so that it is compared with the directional view in FIG. Therefore, it becomes more difficult to confirm the switching of the flow mode of the sphere at the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336. However, in this view, it is easy to grasp the displacement of the upper protrusion 376 when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

Since the through hole 332a for arranging the middle member 330 is formed as an opening having a minimum size sufficient for passing the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370, the inside of the rear frame-shaped portion 332. The state switching device 360 (see FIG. 17) arranged in the above can be hidden so as to be difficult to see.

During the actual jackpot game, a plurality of balls are guided to the specific winning opening 65a during the round game, and flow down the flow path constituents 334 to 336 in order. When a plurality of spheres are simultaneously arranged in each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336, the line of sight toward the sphere on the back side may be obstructed by the sphere on the front side.

For example, when a plurality of spheres are arranged in the third flow path constituent unit 336, the spheres are arranged at the same position in FIG. 22. Therefore, the ball on the front side hides the ball on the back side.

Further, when the sphere normally flows to the detection sensor SE12 side, it flows in the left-right outward direction from the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336. After deviating from the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction, visibility is reduced by the light diffusion processed surface 333b of the front frame-shaped portion 333, so that the movement of the sphere in the process of deviating from the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction. It is preferable to grasp the flow from the downstream end position (position of the sphere P1) of the second flow path constituent portion 335 to the upstream end position (position of the sphere P2) of the third flow path constituent portion 336. If there is a sphere (a sphere slightly displaced in the left-right direction from the third flow path component 336), the sphere hides the sphere in the process of deviating from the rear end of the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction.

In other words, whether or not the sphere has flowed to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 is determined by whether or not the flow direction of the sphere is switched to the left or right outside at the rear end of the third flow path component 336. It is possible if it is visually recognized, and it is sufficient to pay attention to the inside of the third flow path constituent portion 336 and the periphery of the right edge portion. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at the connection position between the third flow path component 336 and the second flow path component 335 on the upstream side in the direction of the line of sight, the inside and right of the third flow path component 336. It is configured so that the sphere can flow down in a path including the periphery of the edge (movement from the position of the sphere P1 to the position of the sphere P2). Therefore, depending on the arrangement of the sphere flowing down on the upstream side, it may be difficult to grasp whether the sphere has flowed to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

Further, in the line of sight of FIG. 23, the sphere flowing through the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 and the sphere flowing through the second flow path constituent portion 335 are clearly separated by the arrangement in the vertical direction, and thus the upstream side. It is easy to avoid the situation where the ball is blindfolded. On the other hand, since the vertical width of the flow path visually recognized at the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 is narrow, the area of the sphere that can be visually recognized in the directional view becomes small.

In particular, as described above, the sphere that has passed through the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 heads for the probability variation detection sensor SE11 after once flowing diagonally downward to the right regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370. The flow path is switched between the flow path and the flow path toward the normal detection sensor SE12. Therefore, the area of the sphere visually recognized at the switching position is smaller than that of the case where the sphere is switched depending on whether the sphere flows straight down or the sphere's flow direction is switched to the right as the flow path of the sphere.

As another mode of switching, it is assumed that the switching position is arranged on the upstream side, such as the case where the flow path of the sphere flows directly below or switches to the right. For example, when the left and right inner protrusions 318 are not formed and the sphere toward the probability variation detection sensor SE11 flows straight down from the rear end of the third flow path component 336, the switching position is at least the third flow path. It is located behind the center line of the component 336.

On the other hand, when the switching position is displaced to the right side of the center line rear of the third flow path constituent portion 336 as in the present embodiment, the sphere is below the lower bottom portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336. By falling (only the vertical difference between the upper surface of the lower bottom portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336 and the upper side surface of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, see FIG. 18), the sphere is attached to the third flow path constituent portion 336 itself. In addition to the action of partially concealing the sphere, the sphere is displaced to the left and right outside the range visible through the third flow path component 336, so that the sphere is partially concealed by the front frame-shaped portion 333.

Therefore, since the area of the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path constituent portion 336 that can be visually recognized from the player's point of view becomes small, it is difficult to grasp which flow path the ball has flowed down. Become. As a result, it is possible to further improve the attention to the sphere flowing down near the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the plurality of directional views (see FIGS. 22 and 23) described as the directional view for identifying the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the rear end portion of the third flow path constituent portion 336. , Each has its strengths and weaknesses. As a result, even if the method of visually recognizing the distribution device 300 is taken, the player can adjust and select the preferred visual recognition method instead of requiring the player to play a one-sided game, and the game mode can be widened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

The player's field of view can be secured by various methods, but in the present embodiment, in particular, a gap is formed between the second upper surface portions 314b of the upper member 310, so that the third flow path constituent portion is formed. Since the roof portion of the 336 can be removed, the third flow path constituent portion 336 can be easily visually recognized.

With respect to the directional view of FIGS. 22 and 23, the visibility on the front side of the sorting device 300 will be described. Although not shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, since the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 (see FIG. 5) are arranged on the front side of the distribution device 300, they are transmitted depending on the thickness of the members. Since less light is emitted, the view is obstructed.

Since the range in which the field of view is obstructed by the front design member 162 is narrowed, the directional view in FIG. 23 can make it easier to see the ball flowing down inside the sorting device 300 as compared with the directional view in FIG. There is sex.

The fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 basically have a flat shape as described above, and are configured so that refraction of light is unlikely to occur (see FIG. 12). As a result, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the sorting device 300 from being deteriorated.

It is formed so that the influence on the visibility is small even for the portion that cannot be functionally flat. For example, the projecting support portions 161c to 161e for positioning and engaging the distribution device 300 allow the player to see the flow path constituent portions 334 to 336 so as not to block the line of sight of the player facing diagonally downward. It is arranged outside the line of sight (upper rear, left and right outside, left and right side lower).

Further, for example, the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is formed at the center height of the sphere, and is formed thinly with the minimum thickness necessary for strength (see FIG. 18). As a result, even if the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is arranged between the ball and the player's eyes, it is possible to prevent the entire ball from being hidden, so that the ball flowing down the flow path constituent portions 334 to 336. Visibility can be ensured.

A ball deviating from the specific winning opening 65a flows down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, and flows down toward the out opening 71. The influence of the ball flowing down toward the out port 71 on the field of vision will be described.

In FIGS. 22 and 23, an example of the arrangement of the spheres flowing down toward the out port 71 in the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b is illustrated. While the opening / closing plate 65b is open, the ball flowing down from above the opening / closing plate 65b rides on the opening / closing plate 65b and is guided to the specific winning opening 65a side. Therefore, the ball flowing down toward the out opening 71 is the opening / closing plate. It becomes a ball deviated to the left and right of 65b. These balls flow down between the extension portion 162b and the extension portion 162c, and are guided by the inner rail 61 and flow down toward the out port 71.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, from the player's point of view, the arrangement of the spheres flowing through the inner rail 61 is below each of the flow path components 334 to 336. It is possible to easily avoid deterioration of the visibility of the sphere flowing down the components 334 to 336.

On the other hand, the flow of the ball flowing down the inner rail 61 is a mode in which the ball flows down toward the center side in the left-right direction of the game area at a gentle angle, similar to the flow of the ball flowing down the second flow path component 335. Similar to the ball flowing down the second flow path constituent portion 335, it has the effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the left and right center positions of the game area. This effect guides the player's line of sight to the out port 71 and also to the third flow path component 336. That is, since the left-right position of the out port 71 and the third flow path component 336 is the same position (left-right center position), the player moves the line of sight up and down to move the out port 71 and the third flow path. The line of sight is guided to a state in which both of the constituent parts 336 can be visually recognized.

Therefore, whether the ball launched toward the game area can be efficiently entered into the specific winning opening 65a (whether the waste ball during the big hit game can be reduced) or the extension portion 162b and the extension portion are deviated. The effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the third flow path component 336 by the flowing ball regardless of whether the ball flowing down between 162c and the ball frequently occurs (whether the waste ball during the big hit game frequently occurs). Can be played.

That is, when the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third flow path constituent portion 336 while flowing down the second flow path constituent portion 335, and the ball can be guided to the specific winning opening 65a. In the case of deviating from the above, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third flow path component 336 while flowing down the inner rail 61.

The ball heading to the out port 71 usually does not cause any action in the game as a waste ball, but in the present embodiment, by configuring as described above, the player's line of sight to the ball heading to the out port 71. Can have a role of guiding to the third flow path constituent unit 336.

In the closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b, the ball flows on the front side of the opening / closing plate 65b and passes on the front side of the second flow path constituent portion 335, so that the visibility of the second flow path constituent portion 335 can be reduced. There is sex.

On the other hand, the second winning opening 140 and the electric accessory 140a are arranged above the left and right center positions of the specific winning opening 65a, and the third flow path component 336 is arranged below the left and right center positions of the specific winning opening 65a. According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the ball can be prevented from flowing down by the second winning opening 140 and the electric accessory 140a, so that the ball can be prevented from flowing down on the front side of the third flow path constituent portion 336. can do. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the visibility around the third flow path constituent portion 336 and the rear end portion is deteriorated due to the sphere flowing down the front side of the opening / closing plate 65b.

In the present embodiment, the time required for the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be secured by the formation length of the flow path constituent portions 334 to 336, but the arrangement is likely to occur as an adverse effect. We are trying to avoid the increase in space. That is, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the arrangement interval between the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 as a guide for the arrangement of the third flow path constituent portion 336 from the player's point of view. Is formed short.

Not only that, since the slide displacement member 370 is arranged behind the lower side of the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 18), as shown in FIG. In, it is visually recognized that the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 is so close to the outer shape of the specific winning opening 65a that the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 bites into the outer shape.

In addition, the flow path of the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a configured to be long on the left and right and has passed through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1 arranged at both left and right ends thereof has a symmetrical flow path configuration. It is collected in the lower left and right center side of the specific winning opening 65a via the portions 334 to 336. As a result, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be shortened as compared with the case where the ball flows down the left-right width of the specific winning opening 65a in the left-right direction. In addition, the structure required for the flow path of the sphere can be a structure in which the left-right length becomes shorter toward the lower side, so that it can be easily arranged near the lower edge portion of the curved inner rail 61. can.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the design concept is that the specific winning opening 65a is arranged close to the out opening 71, but the structure is not such that the ball flows down from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path constituent portion 335, but the second. By adopting a structure in which the sphere flows backward from the left and right inner ends of the flow path component 335 by the third flow path component 336, it is arranged on the front side (upstream side) of the out port 71 (curved surface portion 387). Can be formed at a position directly below the second flow path constituent portion 335. As a result, the vertical distance between the specific winning opening 65a and the out opening 71 is shortened.

In this way, by shortening the vertical arrangement width and the horizontal width of the specific winning opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 from the player's point of view, it is specified in the design of the game area where the size in the front view is limited to a certain standard. Since the vertical width of the range occupied by the winning opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 can be shortened, the degree of freedom in designing the game area can be improved.

For example, as in the present embodiment, since the arrangement of the specific winning opening 65a can be arranged near the lower end of the game area, the variable winning device 65 can be effectively used in the symmetrical game area.

Next, an example of the flow of the ball after entering the distribution device 300 and the operation pattern of the movable accessory (variable winning device 65, slide displacement member 370) in consideration of the flow will be described.

First, as a premise, the sphere that has passed through the opening 312 flows down the first flow path constituent portion 334, the second flow path constituent portion 335, and the third flow path constituent portion 336 in this order (see FIGS. 16 and 17). The time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 can be arbitrarily set, but in the present embodiment, the time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 is set to pass in about 0.3 seconds. It is designed.

That is, it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the first flow path constituent unit 334, 0.3 seconds to pass through the second flow path constituent portion 335, and the third flow path after entering the specific winning opening 65a. It is configured to take 0.3 seconds to pass through the component 336.

Therefore, even if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a immediately after the opening / closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened, it is arranged at the rear end of the third flow path constituent portion 336 for 0.9 seconds. It is configured so that the sphere does not reach the detection sensor SE1. As a result, for 0.9 seconds after the opening / closing plate 65b is opened, the position of the slide displacement member 370 does not move, and the sphere cannot pass through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. , The operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 can be designed without fear of erroneous winning of the ball.

Therefore, for example, control to release the opening / closing plate for a short time at the start of the round game R in order to prevent erroneous winning of the V winning sensor, which is generally seen in pachinko machines equipped with a V probabilistic attacker (incompatible with the operation of the opening / closing plate). Control with naturalness) can be eliminated. As a result, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate that opens / closes the specific winning opening becomes a natural operation, and it is possible to provide the player with an environment in which he / she can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

Further, in the pachinko machine provided with the V probability variation attacker in the above example, the ball entering immediately after the opening of the V probability variation attacker is likely to cause an erroneous winning, but in the variable winning device 65 of this case, as will be described later, immediately after opening. On the contrary, a favorable effect (for example, an effect of hiding the movement of the slide displacement member 370 with a ball) is produced by the ball entering the ball, so that it is not necessary to devise a method for preventing the ball from entering immediately after opening. ..

The time required for the sphere to pass can be arbitrarily set depending on the length and inclination of each flow path constituent portion 334 to 336, the shape of the inner wall portion of the flow path (smooth or uneven shape, etc.).

The contents of ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24A is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, and FIG. 24B is a schematic diagram of the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 24 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol.

As shown in FIG. 24A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has a random number table 202a per first, a type selection table 202b per first, and a random number table 202c per second as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data. , And the variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

The first random number table 202a is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first random number counter, which is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec), is stored. When the value of the first random number counter acquired based on the start winning prize matches any of the determination values specified in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 24B) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type. , And the type of winning opening that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first winning opening 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9". Is defined with the jackpot A1 associated with it (see 202b1 in FIG. 24 (b)).

When the jackpot A1 is reached, a four-round jackpot game is executed in the first operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

The jackpot A2 is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "10 to 19" (see 202b2 in FIG. 24 (b)).

In the case of a jackpot A2, a four-round jackpot game is executed in the first operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20 to 39", the jackpot B1 is associated and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 24 (b)).

When the jackpot is B1, a four-round jackpot game is executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "40 to 49", the jackpot B2 is associated and defined (see 202b4 in FIG. 24 (b)).

In the case of a jackpot B2, a four-round jackpot game is executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 79", the jackpot C1 is associated and defined (see 202b5 in FIG. 24 (b)).

When the jackpot is C1, a four-round jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 99", the jackpot C2 is associated and defined (see 202b6 in FIG. 24 (b)).

In the case of a jackpot C2, a four-round jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

As described above, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first winning opening 64), the big hit game of 4 rounds is selected in any case. Therefore, it is not possible to expect a large number of prize balls as compared with the case where a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 2 described later. On the other hand, since the 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than the 15-round jackpot game, the launch of the ball for the subsequent jackpot acquisition can be started at an early stage.

On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second winning opening 140), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99", which is a big hit. a is associated and specified (see 202b7 in FIG. 24B).

When the jackpot a is reached, a 15-round jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is executed in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

As described above, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second winning opening 140), the big hit game of 15 rounds is selected in any case. Therefore, the player who wins the jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery can obtain a large amount of payout prize balls as compared with the case where the jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery is won, so that the player can obtain the special symbol. It is possible to increase the motivation to perform a game for performing the lottery of 2 (a game in which a ball is fired so as to enter the second winning opening 140).

Further, since the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is fixed by the operation pattern X, there is little possibility that the disadvantage caused to the player will be large even if the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is not ensured. Therefore, there is a disadvantage that the visibility to the slide displacement member 370 is slightly deteriorated, but there is an advantage that the ball is likely to enter the specific winning opening 65a. When there is a third operation pattern as an operation pattern, the special symbol 2 is drawn. By setting the operation pattern of the jackpot variable winning device 65 in the third operation pattern, the influence of the disadvantages can be reduced and only the advantage that the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened can be emphasized. ..

That is, since it is possible to reduce the possibility that the jackpot game in the lottery of the special symbol 2 will be delayed, it is possible to realize a jackpot game that is comfortable for the player (the time efficiency of paying out the prize ball is good).

The setting of the jackpot type of the special symbol 2 is not limited to this. For example, as the jackpot type of the special symbol 2, a jackpot type in which the slide displacement member 370 is displaced and controlled by the operation pattern Y may be provided. Further, this jackpot type may be provided at a small rate (for example, about 20%).

As a result, the player's attention to the slide displacement member 370 can be improved, so that it is possible to prevent the player from playing the jackpot game indiscriminately. That is, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the displacement motion of the slide displacement member 370, to make the player happy and unhappy at the timing of the displacement motion, and to enhance the interest of the player.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 140a when the normal symbol is hit is increased. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easy to put the ball into the second winning opening 140, and it becomes easy to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the probabilistic state of the special symbol, which is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol and is likely to be a big hit a (a jackpot with a good profit balance) when it becomes a big hit, is repeated. As it becomes easier, it becomes easier for the player to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 24C) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the normal symbol is stored. Specifically, "5-28" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 24 (c)). Further, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, "5-204" is defined as the determination value that is a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 24 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the ordinary winning opening 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to, and the ordinary symbol is hit. It is determined whether or not it is. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing timekeeping changes between the operation pattern of the opening / closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 in the first round and the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 of the distribution device 300 in each jackpot type.

When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed. Hereinafter, operation control of the opening / closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 of the distribution device 300, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described. In the description of FIG. 25, FIG. 24 will be referred to as appropriate.

In this control example, the driving mode differs depending on the jackpot type only in the first round, and the driving mode is common to the second and subsequent rounds. Therefore, the driving mode of the first round for each jackpot type will be described.

In the case of the jackpot A1 or the jackpot A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening / closing plate 65b operates based on the first operation pattern. The MPU 201 is an electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that when the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the timer means (not shown) holds the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state so that the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. In the first operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that the opening operation for 0.2 seconds is executed at intervals of 1.0 second, and the opening / closing plate 65b is operated for a long time.

The initial opening time is longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a when the game balls are continuously fired, and a specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) are used. It is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

The opening time of 0.2 seconds in the first operation pattern is set to limit the number of balls entering the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a to one while the opening / closing plate 65b is opened. It is a setting of the opening time to prevent multiple balls from entering in a row on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a (hereinafter, also referred to as "entering with a continuous ball"), and entering the specific winning opening 65a. It is not intended to limit the number of balls to one. That is, even with an opening time of 0.2 seconds, it is possible that one ball each reaches the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a and enters the specific winning opening 65a at a time.

In the case of the jackpot A1, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening / closing plate 65b. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state, and at the same time, the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the front position. The drive is controlled so that it is displaced to the rear position.

Therefore, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through each flow path constituent unit 334 to 336 (see FIG. 19), passes through the front side of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 20). ..

At this time, since the number of spheres arranged in the flow path constituent portions 334 to 336 on one side of the left and right sides is limited to one, the visibility is not deteriorated by the other spheres. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the situation in which the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

In the case of the jackpot A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening / closing plate 65b. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state, and at the same time, the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the front position. The drive is controlled so as to be displaced to the rear position, and the slide displacement member 370 is driven and controlled to be displaced from the rear position to the front position after 0.8 seconds have elapsed.

As described above, the time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17) is set to about 0.9 seconds, so that the sphere reaches the slide displacement member 370 before the sphere reaches the slide displacement member 370. The slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the front position.

Therefore, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through each flow path constituent unit 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17), passes above the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 17). ..

At this time, since the number of spheres arranged in the flow path constituent portions 334 to 336 on one side of the left and right sides is limited to one, the visibility is not deteriorated by the other spheres. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the situation in which the ball passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

The idea that 0.8 seconds as the displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is shorter than the time required for the sphere to pass through each flow path component 334 to 336, and the sphere is the third flow path component. It is set from the idea that the time is longer than the time required to reach 336.

That is, according to the present embodiment, about 0.6 seconds after the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, it passes through the second flow path constituent unit 335 and reaches the third flow path constituent unit 336. Even if a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of 0.2 seconds as the opening time of the opening / closing plate 65b, the slide displacement member after the ball reaches the third flow path component 336. The 370 can be displaced.

Therefore, as long as the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the operation of the slide displacement member 370 can be hidden by the ball arranged in the third flow path constituent portion 336 regardless of the ball entry timing ( See FIG. 22). As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement motion of the slide displacement member 370 from being conspicuous, and attention is paid to the sphere flowing down each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 as a sphere entering the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. Can be improved.

The displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is not limited to 0.8 seconds. For example, it may be set to 0.4 seconds. In this case, since the slide displacement member 370 can be displaced before the sphere reaches the third flow path component 336, it is unlikely that the sphere will block the line of sight, and the slide displacement member 370 is displaced. Can be visually recognized by the player.

However, even in this case, since the second flow path constituent portion 335 is arranged close to the front plate portion of the fixed member 161 and is arranged closer to the slide displacement member 370, the player's line of sight. Is easy to gather on the sphere flowing down the second flow path constituent portion 335. That is, by paying attention to the sphere flowing down the second flow path constituent unit 335 (for example, by displaying "Attention to the flowing sphere!" On the third symbol display device 81), the displacement of the slide displacement member 370. Can be easily avoided from being visually recognized by the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, each flow path constituent unit 334 to 336 is configured to be separated at the center of the left and right, so that if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a on one side of the left and right, the ball enters. By paying attention to the rear side of the third flow path constituent portion 336 on the non-existing side, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be visually recognized without being obstructed by the flowing ball (see FIG. 22).

In this way, in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, the number of spheres arranged in each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 on one side of the left and right sides is limited to one, thereby improving the attention to the spheres. At the same time, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize whether the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of the jackpot B1 or the jackpot B2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening / closing plate 65b operates based on the second operation pattern. The MPU 201 is an electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that when the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the timer means (not shown) holds the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state so that the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 1.0 second. In the second operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that the opening operation for 1.0 second is executed at intervals of 1.0 second, and the opening / closing plate 65b is operated for a long time.

The initial opening time is longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a when the game balls are continuously fired, and a specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) are used. It is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

The opening time of 1.0 second in the second operation pattern is set as a time during which a plurality of balls can enter the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a while the opening / closing plate 65b is opened. This is an opening time setting for allowing a plurality of balls to enter in a row on one of the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a (hereinafter, also referred to as "entering a ball with a continuous ball").

In this control example, the firing interval of the sphere is 0.6 seconds, so even if the flow interval of the sphere does not change from that at the time of firing, the opening / closing plate 65b opens once in 1.0 second. During this time, two balls may enter the specific winning opening 65a. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening / closing plate 65b is limited to every 1.0 second, the next ball is the next flow path component 334 before the two balls pass through each flow path component 334 to 336. Entry into ~ 336 can be restricted.

In the case of the jackpot B1, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the above-mentioned operation pattern X. Further, in the case of the jackpot B2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of the jackpot B1, the sphere that has passed through the flow path constituents 334 to 336 passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and in the case of the jackpot B2, the sphere that has passed through the flow path constituents 334 to 336 is the normal detection sensor SE12. Pass through.

At this time, the appearance of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 differs depending on whether the number of spheres arranged in the flow path constituents 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides is one or two (or more). When there is one ball arranged in each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides, the visibility is not reduced by the other balls as in the case of the jackpots A1 and A2, so that the game is played. The person can easily visually recognize the situation in which the sphere passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when there are two (or more) balls arranged in each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides, the upstream ball is arranged in the line of sight of the player looking at the downstream ball. Therefore, the visibility of the sphere on the downstream side may decrease. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the ball flowing down each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336. ..

In the case of jackpot C1, jackpot C2 or jackpot a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening / closing plate 65b operates based on the third operation pattern. The MPU 201 is an electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that when the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the timer means (not shown) holds the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to make it an open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. The opening / closing plate 65b is allowed to operate for a long time within the operating time T1.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

In this control example, since the opening / closing plate 65b is maintained in the open state during the round game R of the first round, a situation may occur in which a plurality of balls enter the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a in a continuous ball. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening / closing plate 65b is not limited, unlike the second operation pattern, the next sphere is each before the two spheres pass through the respective flow path components 334 to 336. It may also occur that the ball enters the flow path constituents 334 to 336. Therefore, compared to the second operation pattern, in the third operation pattern, the visibility of the sphere arranged on the downstream side of each flow path component 334 to 336 is increased by the sphere arranged on the upstream side. It is easy for a situation to decline.

In the case of the jackpot C1 or the jackpot a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the above-mentioned operation pattern X. Further, in the case of the jackpot C2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of the jackpot C1 or the jackpot a, the sphere that has passed through the flow path constituents 334 to 336 passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and in the case of the jackpot C2, the sphere that has passed through the flow path constituents 334 to 336 is normal. It passes through the detection sensor SE12.

In this way, the control mode is such that the opening / closing plate 65b is maintained in the open state regardless of whether the ball is passed through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. Since the time required for reaching is controlled from the structure, the possibility of malfunction of the slide displacement member 370 due to ball biting can be excluded.

At this time, the appearance of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 differs depending on whether the spheres arranged in the flow path constituents 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides are one or two. When there is one ball arranged in each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides, the visibility is not reduced by the other balls as in the case of the jackpots A1 and A2, so that the game is played. The person can easily visually recognize the situation in which the sphere passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when there are two spheres arranged in each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 on one side of the left and right sides, the sphere on the upstream side is arranged on the line of sight of the player looking at the sphere on the downstream side, so that the sphere is arranged downstream. The visibility of the sphere on the side may be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the ball flowing down each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336. ..

In the third operation pattern, since there is no limit to the timing at which the specific winning opening 65a can be entered in the round game R of the first round, the flow path components 334 to 336 are compared with the second operation pattern. The arrangement of spheres tends to be disordered. Therefore, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 tends to decrease.

On the other hand, the fact that there is no limit to the timing at which the specific winning opening 65a can be entered has the effect of allowing the round game R to proceed at an early stage. That is, the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) as the round end condition (the winning of the specified number of balls). It is easy to fill the prize at an early stage, and it is possible to avoid delaying the jackpot game.

In particular, in the jackpot of the special symbol 2, the slide displacement member 370 is driven and controlled by the operation pattern X with a 100% probability, so that the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 if the ball is inserted into the specific winning opening 65a. Is promised. In this case, the player's attention to the detection sensor SE and the slide displacement member 370 is low in the first place.

Therefore, even if the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, the disadvantage felt by the player is small. In the third operation pattern, it is possible to realize the progress of the jackpot game in a short time by giving priority to avoiding the delay of the jackpot game while allowing the detection sensor SE1 to deteriorate in visibility. We are trying to improve the interest of the players in the jackpot game.

Regardless of the jackpot type, when the first round game R is completed, the timer means is an electromagnetic solenoid so as to keep the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. The 165c is driven and controlled, and after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to the open state to specify the winning opening. The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so as to open the 65a, so that the opening / closing plate 65b operates for a long time. From the second round onward, the slide displacement member 370 is always maintained at the front position, so that the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 and is discharged (see FIG. 17).

Then, when the round end condition (the lapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round game R, the round end condition is satisfied. The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so as to displace the opening / closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

After that, as in the second round, the round game R from the third round to the final round (fourth round) is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds sandwiched between each round game R, and the opening / closing plate 65b. Is displaced between the closed state and the open state, and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven so that the timer means keeps the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. It is controlled and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

In this control example, the case where the short-open displacement operation of the opening / closing plate 65b and the drive control of the slide displacement member 370 are executed only in the first round is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be executed in all rounds, or may be executed in rounds other than the first round (for example, the third round, the eighth round, the twelfth round, etc.).

As described above, according to this control example, the mode of entering the ball into the opening / closing plate 65b is changed depending on the difference in the opening pattern (first operating pattern to the third operating pattern) of the opening / closing plate 65b, and each flow. The visibility of the detection sensor SE1 arranged on the downstream side of the road constituent units 334 to 336 and the third flow path constituent portion 336 can be made different. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player who pays attention to the passage of the ball of the detection sensor SE1 arranged on the downstream side of the third flow path constituent portion 336 to devise the launch mode of the ball.

For example, the decrease in visibility of the detection sensor SE1 may be caused by the simultaneous arrangement of a plurality of spheres in the flow path constituents 334 to 336, and therefore, if necessary (for example, a second operation pattern or a second operation pattern or By intentionally widening the firing interval of the ball (in the jackpot type of the third operation pattern), it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the detection sensor SE1. In the first operation pattern, since the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a is restricted, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 regardless of the firing mode.

On the other hand, if the firing interval of the balls is widened, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a is extended, so that the round game R may be delayed. That is, the player can select the method of playing the round game R between the game mode in which the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is prioritized and the game mode in which the avoidance of the extension of the round game R is prioritized.

For example, in order to visually recognize the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, a slight period (for example, 1.0 second) is allowed after the start of the round game R so that the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a. Is also good. In this case, the situation where the ball is arranged in the third flow path constituent portion 336 at the timing when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced (the timing when 0.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round game R in the case of the operation pattern Y) is avoided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370 from being obstructed by the sphere.

On the other hand, if the period until the ball is launched is set to be open, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a is extended, so that the round game R may be extended. That is, the player can select the method of playing the round game R between the game mode in which the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is prioritized and the game mode in which the avoidance of the extension of the round game R is prioritized.

For example, according to the present embodiment, the flow path constituent portions 334 to 336 and the slide displacement member 370 are symmetrically configured, and a ball can be entered from either the left or right side through the specific winning opening 65a.

That is, for example, the above-mentioned firing mode for widening the firing interval of the ball and the firing mode for allowing a period until the ball is launched are maintained in the ball entry on the left side, and the ball is launched in any launch mode for the ball entry on the right side. Even if the game is to fire, the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Specifically, as a launch mode in which the launch of the ball toward the specific winning opening 65a is divided into left and right, at least the first ball is launched to the right side, and some (for example, the second) ball is launched. Can be fired to the left and the remaining balls can be fired to the right.

In this case, by paying attention to the sphere flowing down the left flow path instead of paying attention to the sphere flowing down the right flow path as each flow path component 334 to 336, it is possible to avoid blocking the line of sight by other spheres. While doing so, it is possible to visually check whether or not the sphere flowing down the left flow path passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11. In addition, in this case, since the balls are constantly fired toward the right side portion of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to avoid extending the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to prevent the round game R from being delayed.

It should be noted that the purpose of launching the ball to the left and right is not to make one ball enter the left flow path. In particular, it suffices if the number of spheres arranged in each of the left flow path constituents 334 to 336 can be limited to one in about 0.9 seconds until the number of spheres passes through the left flow path, and other periods. In the case, the ball may be arbitrarily inserted into the left and right flow paths.

As a result, when the opening width above the specific winning opening 65a is not long as in the present embodiment (for example, the path where the ball enters a small number of paths from the arrangement of the electric accessory 140a and the arrangement of the nails (see FIG. 2)). In the case limited to), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which balls heading toward the specific winning opening 65a collide with each other and one of them spills to the left and right outside of the specific winning opening 65a. Although the nail arrangement is asymmetrical in FIG. 2, the nail arrangement may be symmetrical.

Next, the structure of the operation unit 500 to be fastened and fixed to the back surface side of the game board 13 will be described. The operation unit 500 is a unit that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 from the back side.

FIG. 26 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and FIG. 27 is a rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. In FIG. 27, the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) arranged in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the back side is visually visible through the opening 511a. Further, in the description of FIGS. 26 and 27, FIG. 2 is referred to as appropriate.

The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape with the front side open from the bottom wall portion 511 and the outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511. The rear case 510 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in front view).

The rear case 510 is extended as a flat plate along the back surface of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall portion 512, and faces the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). A support plate portion 513 for supporting is provided.

The support plate portion 513 has a positioning convex portion 513a projecting toward the front side in a shape that can be fitted with a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and the base plate 60. A plurality of insertion holes 513b are provided so as to be able to insert a fastening screw to be fastened to.

By fitting the positioning protrusion 513a into the fitting recess of the base plate 60, the rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60, the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b, and the fastening screw is screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

The shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, a convex portion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (circular or oval in this embodiment) of the fitting recess of the base plate 60 may be used, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability at the time of assembly. A protrusion having such a shape (smaller outer shape) may be used. Further, when the inner shape of the fitting recess is formed into a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is also rectangular.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. That is, the operating unit 500 includes a rear case 510, a first operating unit 600 disposed on the inner right portion of the rear case 510, and a second operating unit 700 disposed on the inner lower portion of the rear case 510. A third operating unit 800, which is arranged on the inner upper part of the rear case 510, is provided. It should be noted that, on the inner left portion of the rear case 510, a substrate having a light emitting means such as an LED and a substrate are arranged so as to cover the substrate from the front side and formed of a light transmissive material, and light diffusion processing is performed throughout. The diffusion decorative plate LB1 to be formed is arranged.

Specifically, the first operating unit 600 is at the right position of the opening 511a, the second operating unit 700 is at the lower position of the opening 511a, and the third operating unit 800 is at the upper position of the opening 511a. It is arranged on the bottom wall portion 511 of the case 510. First, an outline of the operation control of the operation unit 500 will be described.

28 to 35 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of the operation of the operation unit 500. In FIG. 28, each operation unit 600 to 800 in the effect standby state is shown, and in FIG. 29, a state in which the first operation unit 600 is changed from the effect standby state of each operation unit 600 to 800 to the overhang state is shown. FIG. 30 illustrates a state in which the second operating unit 700 has changed from the effect standby state of each operating unit 600 to 800 to the overhanging state.

In addition, in FIG. 30, the second operation unit 700 is shown in a state where the surface facing the front side of the lining member 787 is different from that of the second operation unit 700 shown in FIG. 29.

In FIGS. 28 to 35, the inner shape of the center frame 86 is illustrated by an imaginary line. Inside this, the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side can be clearly seen, but on the outside of the center frame 86, although the base plate 60 is made of a transparent resin member. , The view is easily obstructed by the nails arranged on the base plate 60, various winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 140, etc., the through gate 67, etc. (see FIG. 2). Therefore, for example, in a state where the center frame 86 is arranged outside as shown in FIG. 28, the visibility of each operation unit 600 to 800 in the front view tends to decrease.

The frame shape of the center frame 86 is different from that of the center frame 86 shown in FIG. 2 in relation to the configuration of the operation unit 500, but its role is the same. Further, although the inner frame shape of the center frame 86 is curved downward on the front side of the third operation unit 800, it is not curved downward to the outer frame of the center frame 86, and the center frame. On the inner frame side of the 86, a circular transparent decorative thin plate is overhangingly formed so as to cover the third operation unit 800 from the front side. Therefore, the role of rolling the ball on the upper side of the center frame 86 to the left and right sides is the same as that shown in FIG. 2, and the upper part of the frame (upper part of the outer frame) of the actual center frame 86 is the third operation. It is arranged so as to straddle the upper side of the unit 800 on the left and right.

31 and 32 show a state in which the third operation unit 800 has changed from the effect standby state of each operation unit 600 to 800 to the overhanging state. In FIG. 31, the first decorative member 870 faces the front side and the individual united state of the third operating unit 800 is illustrated. In FIG. 32, the second decorative member 880 faces the front side and a series of the third operating units 800. The coalesced state is illustrated.

The displacement in which the state of FIG. 31 and the state of FIG. 32 can be switched occurs in a displacement mode in which linear displacement and rotational displacement are combined. Since the decorative members 870 and 880 collide with each other to cause a problem, the third operation unit 800 is executed in the overhanging state.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the third operation unit 800 is in an overhanging state (or a state in which the decorative members are displaced downward to an extent sufficient to avoid collision of the decorative members 870 and 880 from the effect standby state). Assuming that the displacement of 870 and 880 is allowed in the virtual circle 800F (see FIG. 32), the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is used to execute the reverse displacement (switching rotation operation). It is controlled, but details will be described later.

In FIG. 33, the third operating unit 800 in the overhanging state and the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate effect state slightly downwardly displaced from the overhanging state are shown, and in FIG. 34, the first operating unit from the state of FIG. 33 is shown. The state in which the 600 is displaced to the intermediate effect state is illustrated, and in FIG. 35, the state in which the third operation unit 800 is displaced to the effect standby state and the first operation unit 600 is displaced to the overhang state from the state of FIG. 33 is shown. Illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the displacement locus of the third operating unit 800 and the displacement locus of the first operating unit 600 or the displacement locus of the second operating unit 700 partially overlap in a front view. Therefore, for example, when the third operating unit 800 is in the overhanging state (see FIG. 31), if the first operating unit 600 or the second operating unit 700 changes state from the effect standby state, there is a possibility of collision.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the state change of the first operation unit 600 from the effect standby state can be executably controlled on condition that the third operation unit 800 is in the effect standby state, or the third operation. By controlling the state change of the unit 800 from the effect standby state executably on the condition that the first operation unit 600 is in the effect standby state, the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 can be controlled. It is possible to avoid overlapping in front view. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arrangement of the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 can be improved (it is permissible that the front and rear positions overlap).

Further, in the present embodiment, the state change of the second operation unit 700 to the overhanging state can be executably controlled on condition that the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 are in the effect standby state. By setting the arrangement of the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33) when the third operating unit 800 is in the overhanging state, the second operating unit 700 is in front of the other operating units 600, 800. It is possible to avoid overlapping visually. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging each of the operating units 600 to 800 (it is possible to allow the front and rear positions to overlap).

In particular, there are a plurality of cases in which the second operation unit 700 is visually recognized in an overhanging state closer to the opening 511a and in a state where the second operation unit 700 is slightly retracted from the opening 511a but is placed close to the third operation unit 800. By configuring the state, the function of the second operation unit 700 as a production device is improved.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the first operation unit 600 is displaced on the right side of the third symbol display device 81. The second decorative rotating member 660 of the first operation unit 600 includes a box-shaped member 661 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the box-shaped member 661 has a first effect surface 661a facing diagonally to the left in the effect standby state and a first effect thereof. It includes a second effect surface 661b formed on the back surface side of the surface 661a, and a third effect surface 661c as a surface adjacent to the first effect surface 661a and the second effect surface 661b. The production surfaces 661a to 661c are optionally decorated with figures, patterns, characters and the like.

In the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 is arranged on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, where visibility from the front side tends to decrease due to the arrangement of the center frame 86. However, since the first effect surface 661a is oriented diagonally toward the player (the front surface is tilted 45 degrees toward the arrow L with respect to the arrow FB), the third effect surface is the third. The first in the player's eyes to visually recognize the second decorative rotating member 660 from the inside of the opening of the symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86 in an oblique direction through the gap between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81. The visibility of the effect surface 661a can be improved.

On the other hand, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 is extended to the front of the third symbol display device 81 so that the player can visually recognize the inside of the center frame 86. Face to face. In this case, since the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture in which the second effect surface 661b faces directly in front, the visibility of the second effect surface 661b from the player's point of view to visually recognize the second decorative rotating member 660. Can be improved.

As described above, the second decorative rotating member 660 is configured so that the effect surfaces 661a to 661c to be visually recognized by the player can be switched according to the arrangement, and the visibility of the effect surfaces 661a to 661c to be visually recognized by the player can be improved. For the purpose of improvement, the posture can be switched according to the arrangement.

In other words, it is designed not only to change the posture in a plane parallel to the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) but also to change the angle intended for the relationship with the line of sight of the player. That is, the more the center frame 86 is arranged on the center side of the frame, the more the player's line of sight is in the front-back direction and it is easier to face each other. Since the player's line of sight tends to be slanted as the position is closer to the frame of the center frame 86, the visibility can be improved by slanting the effect surface so as to face the line of sight.

With the displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is interlocked and displaced. The overhanging decorative portion 652b is decorated with figures, patterns, etc. on the front surface of the board, and in the effect standby state (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 34) of the first operation unit 600, the rear case 510 By placing it in the upper right corner, it is hidden so that it cannot be seen by the player.

On the other hand, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 28), the overhanging decorative portion 652b of the center frame 86 overlaps with the right edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the front view. By arranging it inside the frame, it is configured to be visible to the player.

In this state, the outer right end portion of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is located on the right side of the right edge of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by utilizing the decoration on the front surface of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, it is possible to perform a display effect that makes the player feel as if the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is expanded.

More specifically, the right edge of the area where the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized is defined by the first operation unit 600, and the second decorative rotating member is defined in the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600. The left edge of the first effect surface 661a of the 660 and the right end RE1 of the area where the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized substantially coincide with each other.

On the other hand, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to exceed the right end RE1 of the region on the right side. Therefore, by associating or matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the decoration on the front surface of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is as if the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is the right end RE1 of the area. It can be visually recognized by the player as if it were expanded beyond. As a result, it is possible to realize an unexpected effect.

Examples of matching the above display with the decoration include an example in which a polka dot pattern is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the decoration on the front surface of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is made to have the same polka dot pattern. A number is written on the front of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b in the same typeface as the typeface of the numbers variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the numbers for notifying the success or failure of the lottery). An example of doing so is illustrated.

As an example of associating the above-mentioned display with the decoration, for example, 6 colors out of the 7 colors constituting the rainbow color are displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the front surface of the overhanging decoration portion 652b remains. An example of coloring with one color and a wooden stick arranged so as to align the right end with the right end RE1 of the area are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a flame is imitated on the front of the plate of the overhanging decorative portion 652b. An example is exemplified in which the decoration is reminiscent of ignition in the overhanging state of the first operating unit 600.

The effect mode of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is not limited to one type, and a plurality of types of effect mode can be configured by controlling the brightness of the overhanging decorative portion 652b. The light emitting means for changing the brightness of the unit 652b will be described later.

Further, by disposing a small liquid crystal device having a display surface on the front side instead of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, the display of the liquid crystal device can be changed by a plurality of types, so that the display exceeds the right end RE1 of the area. It is possible to avoid that the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the display area is enlarged is limited.

Further, the object related to the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is not limited to the display, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the decoration of the overhanging decoration portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (first decoration, second decoration) formed on the member of the second operation unit 700 (for example, the covering member 787). , The decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the decoration formed on the members of the third operation unit 800 (for example, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880) (the decoration of the first lining portion 875, the second covering). It may be related to the decoration of the setting part 885).

36 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit 600, and FIG. 37 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit 600. The first operation unit 600 is configured in a complicated displacement mode in which the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates while changing its posture, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b of the first decorative rotating member 650 is the second decorative rotating member 660. By relative displacement with reference to, the player can visually recognize different appearances before and after the displacement.

38 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit 600, and FIG. 39 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the first operating unit 600 includes a fixed means 610 that is fastened and fixed to the rear case 510, and a rotating member 620 that is rotatably supported by the fixed means 610. A drive transmission device 630 that transmits a driving force for rotating the rotating member 620, and a supported member 640 whose one end is rotatably supported by the rotating tip of the rotating member 620. A first decorative rotating member 650 rotatably arranged at the other end of the supported member 640, and a second decorative rotating member 660 rotatably supported by the first decorative rotating member 650. A decorative fixing member 670 fixed to the front side of the lower half of the fixed means 610 is provided.

The fixed means 610 is a base member 611 while creating a space between the base member 611 arranged to face the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 in the front-rear direction and the base member 611 arranged on the front side of the base member 611. The front lid member 612, which is fastened and fixed to, is provided.

The front lid member 612 has a transmission arrangement portion 613 for arranging the drive transmission device 630, a fixing portion 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670 on the front side of the transmission arrangement portion 613, and a fixing portion 614 thereof. A support fastening portion 615 for rotatably supporting the rotating member 620 inside the portion 614, and a guide elongated hole 616 formed as an elongated hole for guiding the other end of the supported member 640. Be prepared.

The guide slot 616 is formed from a unique shape in which a straight portion and a curved portion are mixed, and details and actions thereof will be described later.

The rotating member 620 is arranged at one end (lower end) of the main body 621 formed in the shape of a long plate and one end (lower end) of the main body 621, and is externally fitted and supported by the support fastening portion 615 of the fixed means 610. Cylindrical portion 622, a transmission elongated hole 623 formed in the middle portion of the main body portion 621 as a long hole extending in a linear direction, and an axial direction of the tubular portion 622 at the other end (upper end portion) of the main body portion 621. A circular through hole 624 drilled as a circular hole in a drilling direction parallel to the above, and a gear tooth portion 625 formed in a gear tooth shape along a part of a circle centered on the circular through hole 624. Be prepared.

A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the tubular portion 622. The torsion spring SP1 is configured such that one arm portion is in contact with the side wall of the main body portion 621 and the other arm portion is in contact with a projecting piece of the front lid member 612, and the direction in which the rotating member 620 is raised (front surface). It is configured to generate an urging force (in the clockwise direction).

In the shaft support of the tubular portion 622, the fastening screw is screwed into the female screw portion formed at the tip of the support fastening portion 615 while the support fastening portion 615 is inserted into the tubular portion 622. NS. As a result, the rotating member 620 is pivotally supported by the support fastening portion 615 so as not to fall off.

The transmission slot 623 functions as a guide hole through which the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is inserted, and the circular through hole 624 functions as an insertion hole through which the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is rotatably inserted and fixed. However, the details will be described later.

The drive transmission device 630 includes a drive motor 631 fastened and fixed to the front side of the front lid member 612, a drive gear 632 fixed to the drive shaft protruding to the rear side through the through hole 613a of the front lid member 612, and the drive gear 632 thereof. A transmission gear 633 that is pivotally supported by the tubular portion 613b of the front lid member 612 while meshing with the drive gear 632, and a transmission gear cam that is pivotally supported by the tubular portion 613c of the front lid member 612 while meshing with the transmission gear 633. 634 and.

With the tubular portions 613b and 613c inserted through the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634, the fastening screw is screwed into the female screw portion formed at the tip of the tubular portions 613b and 613c. As a result, the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are pivotally supported by the front lid member 612 so as not to fall off.

The front lid member 612 is formed with an arcuate hole 613d penetrating along an arc centered on the cylindrical portion 613c, and the arcuate hole 613d is on the front side at the eccentric position of the transmission gear cam 634. A cylindrical portion 634a projecting in a cylindrical shape is inserted into the cylinder.

The transmission gear cam 634 is a rotating member including a gear portion that meshes with the transmission gear 633, and extends in a plate shape in the outer diameter direction from an angular position including the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 634a and the cylindrical portion 634a. It is provided with a setting portion 634b.

The cylindrical portion 634a is inserted into the arcuate hole 613d, and is inserted into the transmission elongated hole 623 of the rotating member 620 on the front side thereof. Here, the width and length of the arcuate hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 are designed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 634a. As a result, the sliding resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a slides on the arcuate hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 can be reduced.

The extension portion 634b is configured to be able to enter the detection groove of the photocoupler type detection sensor KS1 which is fastened and fixed to the front lid member 612. Thereby, by reading the change in the output of the detection sensor KS1, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is configured to be able to grasp the posture of the transmission gear cam 634.

The supported member 640 includes a long main body portion 641, a cylindrical portion 642 projecting from the back surface side of the main body portion 641 with a cylindrical cross section that can be inserted into a circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620, and a cylindrical portion thereof. A cylindrical portion 643 projecting in parallel with the tubular portion 642, and an intermediate gear 644 formed so as to be meshable with the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 while being pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 643. , A bottomed cylindrical portion 645 formed in a large-diameter cylindrical shape having a bottom with a hole on the back side of the intermediate gear 644, and an end opposite to the end on which the bottomed tubular portion 645 is arranged. A extending support portion 646 extending to the front side of the portion is provided.

With the above configuration, it is possible to generate driving force transmission by meshing between the gear tooth portion 625 and the intermediate gear 644 with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

With the cylindrical portion 642,643 inserted through the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644, the fastening screw is screwed into the female screw portion formed at the tip of the tubular portion 642, 643. As a result, the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644 are pivotally supported by the main body portion 641 of the supported member 640 so as not to fall off.

In the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the back surface side of the bottom portion is arranged close to the front side edge portion of the front lid member 612, and the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 can be meshed with each other on the front surface side of the bottom portion. It is provided with an opening 645a formed in the peripheral surface portion so as to be such that, and an insertion hole 645b formed through a circular shape centered on a tubular center and capable of inserting a cylindrical support portion 651a. The details of the shape will be described later.

The extended support portion 646 functions as a support portion for rotatably supporting the second decorative rotating member 660, the details of which will be described later.

The first decorative rotating member 650 is a main body member 651 forming an orthogonal rotation axis, a front side rotating member 652 pivotally supported between the main body member 651 and a bottomed cylindrical portion 645, and a front side rotating member 652 thereof. The illuminated substrate 653, which is fixed to the back side of the decorative portion 652b and has a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the front side, and the rear rotating member 654, which is fastened and fixed to the rear side coaxially with the front rotating member 652. A wiring receiving member 655 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 651 from the front side to form a cylindrical space as a wiring through, and a fastening screw that is arranged on the front side of the wiring receiving member 655 and inserted from the back side into the main body member 651. It includes a front decorative portion 656 that is fastened and fixed by being screwed in, and an axial right-angled rotating member 657 that is externally fitted and pivotally supported by a cylindrical portion formed by a wiring receiving member 655 and a main body member 651.

The main body member 651 includes a cylindrical support portion 651a extending in a tubular shape on the back surface side, and the cylindrical support portion 651a has a pair of female screw portions 651b formed at the diameter position of the tip portion thereof. A notch 651c is provided on one side of a plane passing through the portion 651b so as to reduce the wall portion.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is formed with a thickness that allows electrical wiring to be inserted therein, and the notch portion 651c has a function as an opening for securing an inlet for electrical wiring.

The cylindrical support portion 651a has, in order from the base end side, the center hole of the front rotating member 652, the center hole of the rear rotating member 654, the insertion hole 645b of the bottomed tubular portion 645, the stepped ring-shaped collar C1 and the front lid. It is inserted into the guide slot 616 of the member 612, and the fastening screw inserted into the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is screwed into the female screw portion 651b at the tip thereof to fasten and fix the member.

That is, the above-mentioned cylindrical support portion 651a, front rotating member 652, rear rotating member 654, bottomed tubular portion 645, collar C1, and dish-shaped lid portion C2 are coaxially supported and guided by the axis line O1 extending in the front-rear direction. It is configured to be displaceable along the elongated hole 616.

The dish-shaped lid portion C2 has an opening C2a formed in a part of the circumferential portion, and this opening C2a is arranged to face the notch portion 651c of the main body member 651 in the assembled state, so that the path of the electric wiring can be passed. To form.

In this electrical wiring, a part of the wiring passes through the inside of the axis perpendicular rotation member 657, is guided to the inside of the second decorative rotation member 660, and the terminal is connected to the connector arranged on the illumination board 662. Further, other wiring is formed in a gap formed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 (upper side, that is, on the side opposite to the upper and lower sides of the half-cylinder shape portion 655a and facing the main body member 651. The terminal is connected to the connector of the illuminated board 653 by being guided behind the overhanging decorative portion 652b through the gap).

The rear rotating member 654 has gear teeth 654a formed along the circumferential portion of the rear end portion, and the gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 are formed so as to be meshable with each other. The gear teeth 654a are formed along a part of the circumference, not over the entire circumference, as an arrangement sufficient for the operation described later.

The front rotating member 652 includes a gear tooth 652a formed as a bevel gear and an overhanging decorative portion 652b overhanging outward in diameter. An illuminated substrate 653 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, and an effect of lighting or blinking the overhanging decorative portion 652b by light from a light emitting means arranged on the illuminated substrate 653 is executed. It is possible.

Since the front rotating member 652 is fastened and fixed to the rear rotating member 654, the rear rotating member 654 and the front rotating member 652 rotate integrally.

The axial perpendicular rotation member 657 is rotatably supported by a circular tubular portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portion 651d of the main body member 651 and the semi-cylindrical portion 655a of the wiring receiving member 655, and is rotatably supported by the gear of the front rotating member 652. It is provided with a gear tooth 657a formed as a bevel gear that can be meshed with the tooth 652a.

With this configuration, the axis perpendicular rotation member 657 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the front rotation member 652. That is, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, and the axis right angle rotating member 657 are interlocked, but the details of the operation will be described later. The gear teeth 652a and 657a are formed along a part of the circumference, not over the entire circumference, as an arrangement sufficient for the operation described later.

The second decorative rotating member 660 includes a box-shaped member 661 fastened and fixed to the axis right-angled rotating member 657, an illuminated substrate 662 fixed to the box-shaped member 661 inside the box-shaped member 661, and a box-shaped member 661. A wiring fastening plate 663 that is disposed between the shaft perpendicular rotation member 657 and fastened and fixed to the tip portions of the semi-cylindrical shaped portions 651d and 655a.

In the present embodiment, since the illuminated board 662 is also rotationally displaced with the rotation of the box-shaped member 661 described later, the semi-cylindrical shaped portions 651d and 655a are guided to the connector of the illuminated board 662. Where there is a possibility that the electrical wiring passing between them may be twisted or the arrangement may be disordered, the function of the wiring fastening plate 663 having a through hole for temporarily fastening the wiring causes the wiring to be twisted or disordered. We are trying to avoid being placed in.

In this embodiment, since the electrical wiring is fixed to the illuminated substrate 662, it is inevitable that the electrical wiring will be twisted. On the other hand, the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not caused by one or more rotations, but is a rotational displacement that reverses at a rotation angle of 135 degrees, so that an excessive load is applied to the electrical wiring or electricity is applied. It is possible to avoid the situation where the wiring is broken.

The second decorative rotating member 660 is formed from a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is rotatably configured with a rotating shaft (rotating shaft formed by the semi-cylindrical shaped portions 651d and 655a) parallel to the longest side of the rectangular side surface having the longest side. NS.

In the shaft right-angled rotating member 657, the wiring retaining plate 663 functions as a retaining plate and is supported by the semi-cylindrical shaped portions 651d and 655a so as not to fall off. Since the second decorative rotating member 660 is fastened and fixed to the axis right-angled rotating member 657, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the second decorative rotating member 660 comes off from the half-cylinder shaped portions 651d and 655a.

The illuminated substrate 662 is arranged so that the thickness direction of the plate and the thickness direction of the box-shaped member 661 coincide with each other. On the side surface of the illuminated substrate 662 in the thickness direction, the first effect surface 661a is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the front side and the optical axis faces in the thickness direction, and the first effect surface 661a is arranged on the back side and the optical axis faces in the thickness direction. The second effect surface 661b is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED, and the third effect surface 661c is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second effect surface 661b) and whose optical axis faces in the width direction. Is done.

As described above, the light emitting means arranged on the illuminated substrate 662 functions to individually illuminate each of the effect surfaces 661a to 661c, but the LED illuminating the third effect surface 661c is on the back side (second effect surface 661b). By being arranged on the illuminating side), the third effect surface 661c (the surface facing upward) is illuminated in the state where the second effect surface 661b is arranged on the front side (the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600). When the LED is made to emit light, the second effect surface 661b can be illuminated by the light traveling at an angle from the optical axis of the LED.

That is, unlike the case where the LED is arranged behind the illuminated substrate 662, it is possible to prevent the light from being hidden by the illuminated substrate 662, so that the light illuminating the third effect surface 661c causes the second effect surface 661b. Can also illuminate. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of effect modes that illuminate the second effect surface 661b, and it is possible to improve the brightness of the second effect surface 661b at the time of light emission effect.

The decorative fixing member 670 includes an illuminated substrate 671 in which decorative characters and figures are visibly formed from a light-transmitting resin material and irradiates light diagonally to the left and front from the back side thereof. .. The arrangement of the decorative fixing member 670 is fixed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, and the line of sight of the player with respect to the decorative fixing member 670 is always an oblique line of sight to the right. That is, by inclining the direction of the light emitted from the illuminated substrate 671 to the left side, the light can be irradiated to the side where the player's eyes are easily arranged.

The decorative fixing member 670 has a lower edge portion and a right edge portion raised on the back surface side, and a front-rear gap is formed between the upper edge portion and the left edge portion and the front lid member 612. This front-rear gap functions as a gap through which the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced.

40 is a front view of the first operation unit 600 in the effect standby state, FIG. 41 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600 in the effect standby state, and FIG. 42 is a rear view of the arrow XLII in FIG. 40. It is a side view of the 1st operation unit 600. The base member 611 (see FIG. 38) and the fastening screw are not shown in order to facilitate understanding of the shape.

In the effect standby state, the displacement start direction SD1 of the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is configured to be along (for example, parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission slot 623. As a result, it is possible to reduce the displacement resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a starts to be displaced while sliding on the transmission slot 623. That is, at the start of displacement, the assist of inertia cannot be obtained as compared with the middle of displacement, and the driving force required to be generated by the drive motor 631 tends to increase. Therefore, the displacement resistance is reduced as in the present embodiment. By configuring the above, it is possible to reduce the load on the drive motor 631 at the start of displacement.

Further, the same is true for the displacement start direction SD2 of the cylindrical portion 634a in the overhanging state (see FIG. 45). That is, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction of the cylindrical portion 634a arranged in the transmission slot 623 at both end positions of the rotating member 620 (position in the effect standby state, position in the overhanging state) is the displacement direction of the transmission slot 623. The displacement of the cylindrical portion 634a (ie, the shape of the transmission gear cam 634) is designed to be along the longitudinal direction (eg, parallel). As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the drive motor 631 at the start of displacement of the rotating member 620 from both end positions.

As shown in FIG. 41, the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 mesh with the intermediate gear 644 from both sides. In the present embodiment, since the radius R1 of the gear tooth portion 625 and the radius R2 of the gear tooth 654a are designed to have the same length, the rotation angle of the gear tooth portion 625 with respect to the intermediate gear 644 and the rear with respect to the intermediate gear 644 are provided. The rotation angle of the side rotation member 654 is the same.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the rear rotation member 654 can be changed to be variable depending on the design of the rotation angle (angle θ) generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

As shown in FIG. 42, the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 and the gear teeth 657a of the axial orthogonal rotating member 657 are meshed with each other, and the rotational driving force transmitted to the front rotating member 652 is orthogonal to the rotating shaft. It is transmitted to the second decorative rotating member 660.

The rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is the same as the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a, and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a is proportional to the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652. That is, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is proportional to the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 (see FIG. 41).

In the present embodiment, the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a are configured to be the same (gear ratio is 1), so that the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is determined. It is the same as the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

Next, the displacement of the first operation unit 600 from the effect standby state will be described in chronological order. FIG. 43 is a front view of the first operation unit 600 in the intermediate effect state, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600 in the intermediate effect state. Further, FIG. 45 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the overhanging state, and FIG. 46 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the overhanging state. The base member 611 and the fastening screw are not shown in order to facilitate the understanding of the shape.

The rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 19 degrees between the effect standby state and the intermediate effect state, and the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is 26 degrees between the intermediate effect state and the overhanging state. Is set to.

In the intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600, the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture in which the narrow third effect surface 661c faces the front side. In the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600, the second effect surface 661b is configured to face the front side (see FIG. 45).

As shown in FIG. 44, the guide slot 616 is connected to a linear portion 616a formed on a straight line extending in the vertical direction from the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the linear portion 616a, and is on a curved line (substantially arcuate shape). The curved portion 616b formed in the above is provided.

In the intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600, the axis O1 is arranged at the lower end position of the linear portion 616a, that is, at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600, the axis O1 is arranged at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b.

Therefore, the displacement of the axis O1 between the effect standby state and the intermediate effect state is a linear displacement along the linear portion 616a, and the displacement of the axis O1 between the intermediate effect state and the overhanging state is the curved portion. It is configured to have a curved displacement along 616b.

The first operation unit 600 is configured to be able to change the state as described above, and the rotating member 620 is arranged on the base end side of the state change. That is, the rotating member 620 is displaced by receiving the driving force from the drive transmission device 630, and the supported member 640, the first decorative rotating member 650, and the second decorative rotating member 660 are driven by the displacement of the rotating member 620. ..

Therefore, without countermeasures, the displacement resistance generated between the guide hole 616 and the guide hole 616 due to the sliding displacement of the portion guided by the guide hole 616 may increase. However, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 620 It is suppressed by being configured so that the longitudinal direction of the guide slot 616 is along the displacement direction.

For example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state (FIG. 41) is a displacement that tilts downward, and the guide elongated hole 616 is also formed so as to extend downward. Further, for example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the overhanging state (see FIG. 46) is a displacement that rises diagonally upward to the right, and the guide slot 616 is also formed so as to extend diagonally upward to the right. Has been done.

By aligning the displacement direction of the rotating member 620 and the longitudinal direction of the guide slot 616 in this way, the displacement resistance of the portion (and the axis O1) that displaces the inside of the guide slot 616 can be reduced. It can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the effect of the shape of the guide slot 616, including other effects, will be described. FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the displacement amount and the displacement angle of the supported member 640 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, and FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b) show the rotating member. It is a schematic diagram which shows the magnitude relation of the displacement amount on the driven side of the supported member 640 when the 620 is rotated in the tilting direction in a mode of constant angular velocity. The positive and negative numerical values are shown as a downward displacement amount in the positive direction and an upward displacement amount in the negative direction, and in FIG. 48 (b), the numerical value in FIG. 48 (a) is shown as a bar graph.

In FIG. 47, the arrangement of the support position of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620 is shown as the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 at 10-degree intervals, and the tension of the first operating unit 600 is shown. The rotating member 620 in the out position is shown by a solid line.

In FIG. 47, the angle θ is shown as an angle between a line segment connecting the axis O1 and the center of the circular through hole 624 and a line segment connecting the center of the circular through hole 624 and the center of the tubular portion 622. There is.

The guide elongated hole 616 functions as an elongated hole for guiding the end portion of the supported member 640 in which the axis O1 is arranged. The displacement in the guide slot 616 is a displacement caused by the displacement of the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 connected to the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620 with the rotation of the rotating member 620. In the following, the tubular portion 642 of the supported member 640 is also referred to as a driven side of the supported member 640, and the end portion of the supported member 640 in which the axis O1 is arranged is also referred to as a driven side of the supported member 640.

The outline of the operation centering on the rotating member 620 will be described. The vertical displacement of the supported member 640 supported by the rotating member 620 depends on the vertical displacement of the rotation tip (the driving side of the supported member 640) due to the rotation of the rotating member 620 and the posture displacement of the supported member 640. It occurs as a result of adding up the vertical displacement of the driven member of the supported member 640.

In the effect standby state, in addition to the supported member 640 being in a vertical posture, the speed component of the displacement of the rotating member 620 is larger in the left-right direction than in the vertical direction (the arrangement of the rotating arm is 45 degrees from vertical to left-right). Range). That is, as the displacement in the vertical direction, the conditions for reducing the displacement are doubled.

Both of these are reversed in the overhanging state, and the conditions for increasing the displacement in the vertical direction are doubled. Therefore, the velocity is low at the start of the downward displacement, and the velocity is likely to be high at the end of the downward displacement.

Next, the details of the operation centering on the rotating member 620 will be described. The displacement (tilt displacement) of the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state to the overhanging state will be described. When the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced mainly by its own weight.

Therefore, when the guide elongated hole 616 is formed in the vertical direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 may fall vigorously. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is preferable that the first operation unit 600 is stopped in the intermediate effect state (intermediate position of tilt displacement, see FIG. 44).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the shape of the guide elongated hole 616, an embodiment in which the curved portion 616b is combined below the linear portion 616a is adopted. As a result, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced by its own weight and enters the curved portion 616b, the displacement resistance applied to the driven side of the supported member 640 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from falling vigorously beyond the arrangement in the intermediate effect state.

The displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side in the linear portion 616a will be described. When the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a, the driven side of the supported member 640 straddles the extension line of the linear portion 616a. That is, in the effect standby state, the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the right side of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 41), and in the intermediate effect state, the driven side of the supported member 640 is on the left side of the linear portion 616a. Arranged (see FIG. 44). Therefore, while the rotating member 620 tilts and displaces without changing its direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 reciprocates in the vertical direction.

As a result, the displacement of the supported member 640 in the vertical direction can be kept small compared to the magnitude of the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, so that the driven side of the supported member 640 is a linear portion. While being arranged at 616a, the supported member 640 can be shown to the player in a displacement mode as if the supported member 640 is rotationally displaced about the driven side of the supported member 640.

According to this displacement mode, the slide displacement in the left-right direction can be generated by utilizing the run-up due to the rotational displacement centered on the driven side of the supported member 640, so that the entire supported member 640 can be moved from the start of the displacement. Compared with the case of sliding displacement in the left-right direction, the load required for displacement can be suppressed to a low level. Therefore, the load required at the start of operation of the supported member 640 can be reduced, and the degree of performance required for the drive motor 631 can be lowered. As a result, the cost of the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

On the other hand, while the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is suppressed to a small size, the displacement of the driven portion of the supported member 640 is sufficiently secured due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, and the supported member 640 The rotation direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 with respect to the driving portion of the above is maintained in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear (the direction is not switched). As a result, as described above, the direction of the posture change of the supported member 640 and the rotation direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 are maintained without being switched (without being inverted).

As a result, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are reciprocating (returning), and the second decorative rotating member 660 can be prevented from giving an impression. The displacement mode can be a vigorous displacement mode.

Further, even in a situation where the displacement of the driving portion of the supported member 640 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 is sufficiently secured, the displacement direction of the driving portion of the supported member 640 has a large horizontal component. Moreover, since the displacement is in the direction (downward) along the direction of gravity, the load required to start the displacement of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, and the degree of performance required for the drive motor 631 is lowered. can do. As a result, the cost of the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

The action caused by the curved portion 616b will be described. A state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b is defined as an intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600. As described above, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state is 19 degrees. Therefore, the state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the curved portion 616b roughly corresponds to the range of the angle width of 20 degrees to 45 degrees in FIG. 48.

First, as a premise, it is not necessary to adopt a curved portion in the guide slot 616. That is, the guide elongated hole 616 may be composed of only a linear portion regardless of whether or not a portion that bends in order to increase the displacement resistance is adopted in the intermediate effect state as described above.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by intentionally adopting the curved portion 616b, it is possible to prevent the speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the displacement. This will be described below.

Whether guided by the linear portion 616a or the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward when the driven side of the supported member 640 connected to the rotating member 620 is displaced downward. The downward displacement is the same.

The difference is that in the upper half of the curved portion 616b when guided by the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 is in a direction opposite to the displacement direction (leftward) of the driven side of the supported member 640 (rightward). ) Is formed, and in the lower half of the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 is oriented along the displacement direction (leftward) of the driven side of the supported member 640 (). The curved portion 616b is formed so as to be displaced (to the left).

As a result, even before the amount of downward displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side becomes large (tilting start side), the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is swung to the left and right, so that the supported member is supported. It is possible to secure a large displacement speed on the driven side of the 640.

This makes it possible to prevent the displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side from becoming excessive at the end of the tilt displacement of the rotating member 620. That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is vertically displaced from a specific initial position to the terminal position by an arbitrary path, if the time required for the displacement is the same, the results of integrating the vertical speeds are the same. If the displacement is slow at the beginning of the displacement, the displacement speed increases toward the end of the displacement.

When the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the virtual axis OE1 guided on the straight line extending in the vertical direction shown as a comparison with FIG. 47, the displacement speed gradually increases from the tilt displacement start side of the rotating member 620. It becomes the maximum at the displacement end (displacement lower end) of the supported member 640. In other words, the vertical displacement of the virtual axis OE1 during the same period as compared with the vertical displacement amount UX1 of the axis O1 guided by the guide slot 616 while the rotating member 620 rotates 10 degrees to reach the lower end of the displacement. The quantity UE1 becomes large.

Therefore, in the displacement mode of the virtual axis OE1, the driven side of the supported member 640 may bounce back, and when the effect of stopping the supported member 640 at the lower end of the displacement is performed, the first operation unit 600 It adversely affects the production.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting the curved portion 616b for the guide slot 616, the displacement start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620 is within the range where the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 becomes large. The displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 is made uniform.

In this case, the homogenization is used not only to mean that the velocities are brought to be the same over the entire range of displacement, but also to suppress the magnitude of the velocities. In particular, in the present embodiment, in the tilt displacement of the rotating member 620, the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually increases on the approach start side to the curved portion 616b, and enters the lower half portion of the curved portion 616b. After the start, the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 is configured to gradually decrease.

That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided by the curved portion 616b, the displacement of the supported member 640 becomes monotonous by providing a speed difference in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640. Can be avoided.

Further, by reducing the speed required for the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end side of the curved portion 616b, that is, the amount of displacement required for a unit time, the rotating member 620 moves upward (rises up). Since the amount of displacement that lifts the driven side of the supported member 640 in a unit time at the start of driving in the case of (operation) can be reduced, the load on the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram showing a change in the angle θ [degrees] with the rotation of the rotating member 620.

The angle θ can be equated with the relative rotation angle between the rotating member 620 centered on the circular through hole 624 and the supported member 640, and is directly linked to the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660. That is, the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is defined according to the magnitude of the angle θ.

In this embodiment, the rotation transmission ratio between the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear tooth 654a (see FIG. 39) of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the gear of the gear tooth 652a and the axial perpendicular rotation member 657. The rotation transmission ratio with the tooth 657a (see FIG. 38) is set to 1. Therefore, since the angle θ and the rotation angle of the axis perpendicular rotation member 657 are the same, the change in the angle θ can be grasped as the change in the posture of the second decorative rotation member 660.

The change in the angle θ is 45 degrees from the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 41) to the intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 44), and the intermediate effect of the first operation unit 600. The angle from the state to the overhanging state of the first operating unit 600 (see FIG. 46) is 90 degrees.

In the effect standby state, the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture in which the first effect surface 661a is tilted to the left by 45 degrees (the third effect surface 661c is tilted to the right by 45 degrees), so that the angle θ changes. According to this, each time the state is switched between the intermediate effect state and the overhanging state, the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates 45 degrees so that the third effect surface 661c faces the front side (see FIG. 43), and then the second. The production surface 661b faces the front side (see FIG. 45).

The setting of the angle θ is realized by the design of the guide slot 616 for defining the posture of the supported member 640. That is, in the present embodiment, the guide slot 616 is designed so as to satisfy both the arrangement of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 according to the angle θ.

As a result, even when only the sensor for detecting the arrangement of the rotating member 620 is arranged as the detection sensor KS1 as in the present embodiment, the second decorative rotating member 660 is based on the output of the detection sensor KS1. The voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the arrangement and the posture.

That is, if the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, it can be determined that the first operation unit 600 is in the effect standby state (see FIG. 41), and the drive motor 631 from that state can be determined. The rotation angle of the rotation member 620, the arrangement and the posture of the second decorative rotation member 660 can be determined from the rotation angle of.

Here, the amount of change in the angle θ is not proportional to the amount of the rotation angle of the rotating member 620. Therefore, when determining the arrangement and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631, it is not sufficient to obtain a numerical value by proportional calculation from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631. Further, this makes it possible to prevent the rotation speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 from becoming constant even when the rotating member 620 is rotated at a constant speed. This will be described below.

The change in the angle θ is substantially the same as the change in the amount of change in the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640. That is, the angle change from the intermediate effect state to the overhanging state is generally larger than the angle change from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state (about 13 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees). Large (about 20 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees while the driven side of the supported member 640 is placed in the upper half of the curved portion 616b).

On the other hand, the angle change from the intermediate effect state to the overhanging state gradually decreases from the position where the driven side of the supported member 640 enters the lower half of the curved portion 616b, and finally from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect. It falls below the level of angle change to the state (decreases to about 7 degrees).

In this way, by configuring the value of the angle θ with respect to the rotation of the rotating member 620 per unit angle to change depending on the magnitude, the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 also changes. Can be configured in. That is, in the range where the numerical value of the angle θ is small, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is likely to be small, and the posture can be easily maintained, while in the range where the numerical value of the angle θ is large, the second decorative rotation is possible. The rotation angle of the member 660 tends to be large, and the surface facing the player (effect surface 661a to 661c) can be easily changed quickly.

From the above configuration, it is possible to form slow and fast movements of the second decorative rotating member 660. In the displacement operation of the second decorative rotating member 660, as described above, the arrangement is changed and the posture is changed due to the displacement of the supported member 640, and the second decorative rotating member 660 is formed at the center of the tubular portion formed by the semi-cylindrical shaped portions 651d and 655a. Rotational displacement around the axis of rotation is performed at the same time.

The rotational angle (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement centered on the tubular portion formed by the semi-cylindrical shaped portions 651d and 655a is such that the driven side of the supported member 640 changes from the linear portion 616a of the guide slot 616 to the curved portion 616b. It becomes noticeably larger at the timing of approach.

That is, in the tilt displacement, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is suppressed until the intermediate effect state is reached, and the supported member 640 is slightly moved up and down (bounce back) from the arrangement on the driven side in the intermediate effect state. However, the second decorative rotating member 660 can be maintained in a state where the third effect surface 661c is directed to the front side (see FIG. 43).

On the other hand, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward from the intermediate effect state, the rotation speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 when the rotating member 620 rotates at a constant speed increases, and the posture change in the rotation direction changes. It is noticeably visible. That is, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that the second decorative rotating member 660 is instantaneously rotationally displaced.

In the present embodiment, the second effect surface 661b of the second decorative rotating member 660 is directed to the front side at the rotation end (displacement lower end) of the rotating member 620, and is arranged in close proximity to the decorative fixing member 670. It is desirable to be able to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from bouncing upward from the state where the rotating member 620 is arranged at the lower end of the displacement because it is visually recognized integrally (see FIG. 28).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 is made uniform by forming the curved portion 616bb of the guide slot 616 as described above, so that the rotating member 620 is used. It is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side from becoming excessive in the state of being arranged at the lower end of the displacement, and it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

In addition to the uniform displacement speed in this way, the arrangement of the central portions of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 at the descending displacement end of the rotating member 620 (for example, the arrangement of the tubular portion 643). Is configured to be closest to the support fastening portion 615 as the rotation axis of the rotating member 620. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotating tip of the rotating member 620 from being violent due to the weight of the supported member 640 supported on the rotating tip side of the rotating member 620 and the second decorative rotating member 660, and the rotating member 620 The rotational displacement can be stabilized.

In addition, the lower half of the curved portion 616b bounces back (upper left) about the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620 on the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end of the displacement of the rotating member 620. It is configured to suitably interfere with the displacement of the. That is, the lower half of the curved portion 616b is inclined in the upper left direction in the lateral direction, and the displacement of the supported member 640 in this direction on the driven side can be suppressed, so that the supported member is supported. It is possible to prevent the member 640 from bouncing back.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced following the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640, and the case where the driven side of the supported member 640 stops at the displacement end. Is different from the displacement direction on the driven side of the supported member 640.

The former is assumed to be displaced downward to the left along the displacement direction of the supported member 640 on the driven side (rotation direction of the rotating member 620) if there is no guidance, but in the present embodiment, the guide slot is formed. By being guided by the guide hole 616, it is slightly swung in the left-right direction as a direction along the guide slot 616 and is displaced downward.

On the other hand, since the latter is a circular trajectory centered on the main driving side of the supported member 640, the displacement direction is not along the guide slot 616 but along the lateral direction of the guide hole 616. As a result, the displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side can be suppressed, and the bounce of the supported member 640 can be prevented.

The characteristics of the displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction will be described. The rotating member 620 is displaced in the rising direction when the state of the first operating unit 600 changes from the overhanging state to the effect standby state.

The load (that is, the driving force generated by the drive motor 631) required to raise and displace the rotating member 620 is mainly the first decoration arranged on the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, and the supported member 640. It is used for ascending and displacing the rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660 and for rotating the second decorative rotating member 660.

That is, the smaller the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660, the less the load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620.

Here, as shown in FIG. 49, in the present embodiment, at the time when the rotating member 620 starts rotational displacement from the overhanging state of the first operating unit 600, it is proportional to the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660. It is designed so that the value of the angle θ is the lowest. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load required when the rotating member 620 is raised and displaced.

At the end of the ascending displacement of the ascending displacement of the rotating member 620, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 centered on the extended support portion 646 of the supported member 640 is in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620. It is placed in a vertical orientation).

Therefore, when the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is stopped at the end of the ascending displacement of the rotating member 620, the load applied to the rotating member 620 as the inertial force in the rotational direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 is rotated. The moving member 620 can be generated as a load in a manner twisted about the longitudinal direction, and the rotating member 620 can withstand a slight elastic displacement locally by distributing the load in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, as compared with the case where the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 is orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 in the front view, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the rotating member 620 is damaged so as to break. .. In addition, excessive elastic displacement of the rotating member 620 is suppressed by contact with the front lid member 612, and the front lid member 612 is configured to withstand the load that cannot be received by the rotating member 620 by elastically deforming. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rotating member 620 from being damaged.

The displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b will be described. The overhanging decorative portion 652b is a member that is rotationally displaced about the axis O1, and the rotational angle corresponds to the above-mentioned angle θ. Therefore, even when the arrangement change on the driven side of the supported member 640 is small as in the change from the effect standby state to the overhanging state, the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates if the angle θ changes. ..

The change in the angle θ from the effect standby state to the overhanging state is about 135 degrees, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b is rotated at about 45 degrees. Here, when the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates counterclockwise by 45 degrees from the effect standby state, it feels as if it collides with other operating units 800 (left and right fixed decorative members) in the assembled state (see FIG. 28). In the present embodiment, the supported member 640 itself, which is the reference for the rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, changes its posture in a manner of rotating clockwise, so that the other operating unit 800 (left and right fixed decorative members) can be used. It is possible to avoid collision.

In other words, since the overhanging decorative portion 652b is configured to be displaceable with respect to the supported member 640, the space required for the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be reduced.

For example, when the overhanging decorative portion 652b is a portion that is fixedly arranged with respect to the supported member 640 in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600, the supported member 640 is arranged from the overhanging state to the effect standby state. When changed to, the overhanging decorative portion 652b overhangs to the upper left side of the supported member 640, collides with another operating unit 800, or partially hides the overhanging display on the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. There is a possibility that it will have an adverse effect on the production.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is rotationally displaced in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 with respect to the driven side of the supported member 640. When the 640 overhangs to the third symbol display device 81 side, it overhangs in conjunction with it, and when the supported member 640 is displaced from the third symbol display device 81 to the retracting side, it retracts in conjunction with it. Therefore, the arrangement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b in the retracted state can be formed on the side away from the third symbol display device 81.

The rotation angle of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 from the player's point of view can be obtained from the difference between the change in the angle θ and the posture change of the supported member 640. That is, it is 45 degrees as a difference between the change width of the angle θ of about 135 degrees and the posture change angle of the supported member 640 of about 90 degrees.

Here, in the present embodiment, the difference between the change in the angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640 is configured to be equal regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 620. That is, as shown in FIG. 47, when the angle θ is divided into the angles a1 and a2 below the horizon and the angles b1 and b2 above the horizon, the angle θ and the posture of the supported member 640 The difference between the change and the change is determined as ((a1 + b1)-(a2 + b2))-(b1-b2) = (a1-a2), which is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the overhanging decorative portion 652b based on the posture of the supported member 640 is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620. Therefore, when the rotating member 620 is rotationally displaced at a constant angular velocity, it is covered. Although the displacement speed of the support member 640 is not constant, the angular velocity of rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the posture of the supported member 640 is constant.

Therefore, it seems to the player that the overhanging decorative portion 652b arranged on the supported member 640 is driven at a constant angular velocity by a driving means different from the driving motor 631 for driving the rotating member 620. Can be visually recognized.

With this configuration, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 is such that there is a section where there is a slide movement and there is a section where there is a rotational movement from the player's point of view. It can be shown, and the displacement mode of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as a soft displacement mode as if it were not a machine.

This action is realized by designing the displacement of the supported member 640 by separating a section in which the posture change is large with respect to the displacement amount in the slide direction and a section in which the posture change is small with respect to the displacement amount in the slide direction. be able to. That is, the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates with respect to the supported member 640 according to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, and from the player's point of view, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is the displacement of the supported member 640. Affected by the dominant side.

Therefore, the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as being rotationally displaced in the section where the posture change is large with respect to the displacement amount in the slide direction, and is stretched in the section where the posture change is small with respect to the displacement amount in the slide direction. The decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as if it is slide-displaced.

As described above, the case where the rotating member 620 is rotatable and displaceable so as to constitute an effect standby state, an intermediate effect state, and an overhanging state, and is displaced from one displacement end to the other displacement end has been described. However, the drive direction may be switched so as to be displaced in the opposite direction at a position in the middle of the displacement range.

For example, after the rotating member 620 is rotationally displaced from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state, the drive direction of the drive motor 631 may be reversed to control the return to the effect standby state. In this case, since it is necessary to stop the rotating member 620 in the middle of descending, it may be necessary to set the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 to be low in order to make the stop position accurate.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the numerical value of the angle θ (see FIG. 49) changes in an increasing tendency in the vicinity of the intermediate effect state as compared with the effect standby state. As described above, the magnitude of the angle θ corresponds to the magnitude of the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660.

Therefore, in the vicinity of the intermediate effect state in which the rotation amount of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, the amount distributed to the second decorative rotating member 660 in the driving force increases, so that the rotating member 620 is relatively. The amount distributed to the rotational displacement can be reduced, and the rotational displacement of the rotational member 620 can be automatically suppressed.

In other words, as the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, so that the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 is set low in advance. Even if it is not set, the rotating member 620 can be easily stopped in the vicinity of the intermediate effect state.

Next, the second operation unit 700 will be described. The second operating unit 700 is an operating unit that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 below the opening 511a of the rear case 510, and is a field of view of the player looking at the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 28). An effect standby state (see FIG. 28) that retracts below the opening 511a to secure the above position, and an overhanging state (see FIG. 30) that is placed on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 and attracts attention. The state is mainly switched between the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 35) as the state of.

FIG. 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700, and FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700. In FIGS. 50 and 51, the members around the elevating / reversing effect device 770 are mainly shown in a disassembled state, and the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is shown in a non-disassembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the second operation unit 700 is located between the right front plate member 710, which is fastened and fixed to the lower right corner of the rear case 510, and the right front plate member 710 and the rear case 510. A rotating arm member 720 that is arranged and is rotatable around a cylindrical protrusion 511b of the rear case 510, and a drive transmission device 730 that is configured to be able to transmit a driving force to the rotating arm member 720. The elevating plate member 740 is configured so that the tip of the rotating arm member 720 can be guided and displaced up and down, and the left rear side is fastened and fixed to the lower left corner of the rear case 510 on the back side of the elevating plate member 740. A plate member 750, a set of front support members 760 that are fastened and fixed to the front side of the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750, and a set of front support members 760 that are fastened and fixed to the rear case 510 on the front side of the metal rod 702. It is provided with a blindfold decorative member 768 to be displaced, and an elevating / reversing effect device 770 configured to be displaceable by combining an elevating plate member 740 and a front support member 760 with an elevating displacement and a longitudinal displacement.

The right front plate member 710 includes a transmission support portion 711 that supports each configuration of the drive transmission device 730, and a gap forming portion 712 that is recessed from the back side at the left edge portion and forms a gap between the rear case 510. A plurality of detection sensors 713 (three in this embodiment) arranged to detect the arrangement of the detected portion 735 of the drive transmission device 730, and a mode toward the front side toward the upper side on the front side of the left side portion. A front upper inclined portion 714 which is inclined and formed so as to be able to guide the rotary cylinder portion 774e of the elevating and reversing effect device 770, and a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted from the back side of the rear case 510 is screwed are formed. A plurality of fastened portions 718 are provided.

In the detection sensor 713, a plurality of photocoupler type sensors are arranged at intervals so that the detection groove is arranged at a position where the detected portion 735 can enter. Each detection sensor 713 has a position of the detected unit 735 in the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700, a position of the detected unit 735 in the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700, and an extension of the second operation unit 700. It is arranged so as to match the position of the detected portion 735 in the state.

That is, the detection sensor 713 is configured so that the output can be switched depending on whether the second operation unit 700 is in the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, or the overhanging state, and the audio lamp control device 113 (FIG. 4) is configured so that the state of the second operating unit 700 can be grasped.

The rotating arm member 720 is pivotally supported by a cylindrical projecting portion 511b projecting from the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 to the front side in a cylindrical shape, and is formed in the shape of a long plate in the shape of a front view. A support cylinder portion 722 that is formed in a cylindrical shape toward the rear at the bent portion of the main body portion 721 and the main body portion 721 and has an inner peripheral side shape that allows the cylindrical projecting portion 511b to be inserted. And, at the right end of the main body 721, a long hole 723 formed in a long hole shape along the long direction, and at the left end of the main body 721, the front (the projecting direction of the cylindrical protrusion 711a). A cylindrically fastened portion 724 that is projected in a cylindrical shape toward (in a direction parallel to) and has a female screw formed on the inner peripheral side, and is rearward at an intermediate position between the cylindrically fastened portion 724 and the support cylinder portion 722. In the ascending direction (left side) between the cylindrical fastened portion 725, which is projected in a cylindrical shape and a female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side, and the rear case 510, which is wound around the support cylinder portion 722. It is provided with a torsion spring SP2, which gives an urging force in the direction of lifting the cylinder.

The left side portion of the main body portion 721 is formed with a step so that the arrangement is shifted to the front side as compared with the base end side portion of the support cylinder portion 722, and the support plate is formed in the gap portion formed on the back side by the step. 701 is arranged.

The support plate 701 is a plate-shaped portion to be fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510, and includes an arc-shaped elongated hole portion 701a bored so as to be able to guide the cylindrical fastened portion 725. A fastening screw inserted into the elongated hole portion 701a with the ring-shaped collar C3 sandwiched therein is screwed into the cylindrical fastened portion 725, so that the rotating arm member 720 is supported by the cylindrical fastened portion 725 via the cylindrical fastened portion 725. It is supported by 701 so that it cannot be dropped off.

Since the support plate 701 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, the left side portion of the rotating arm member 720 is restricted from being displaced and displaced from the rear case 510 to the front side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the rotary arm member 720 from tilting toward the front side due to the load applied to the left side of the rotary arm member 720, so that the displacement of the rotary arm member 720 is stably supported. be able to.

The right side portion of the main body portion 721 is arranged in the gap between the back case 510 and the gap forming portion 712. That is, the displacement of the right side portion of the main body portion 721 in the front-rear direction is limited by the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712.

The elongated hole portion 723 is formed in a shape in which a straight line extending in the elongated direction through the center of the width passes through the center of the support cylinder portion 722. Therefore, when the load applied to the long hole portion 723 faces the long direction of the long hole portion 723, the rotation direction component of the rotation arm member 720 of the load becomes 0.

The drive transmission device 730 is a device that transmits a driving force via a long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and is a drive motor 731 fastened and fixed to the right front plate member 710 from the front side, and a drive motor 731 thereof. A drive gear 732 fixed to the drive shaft, a transmission gear 733 meshed with the drive gear 732, and a gear cam member 734 meshed with the transmission gear 733 are provided.

The transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are pivotally supported by a plurality of cylindrical projecting portions 711a that are cylindrically projected on the back surface side of the right front plate member 710 at corresponding positions. A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 711a, and a fastening screw inserted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 733 or the gear cam member 734 can be screwed in. By screwing and fixing these fastening screws, the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are pivotally supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 711a so as not to fall off.

The transmission support portion 711 includes the above-mentioned cylindrical projecting portion 711a and an arcuate hole 711b formed in an arc shape centered on the cylindrical projecting portion 711a that pivotally supports the gear cam member 734.

The gear cam member 734 has an arc-shaped portion centered on the rotating shaft portion, which is projected toward the front side and is formed so as to be insertable into the arc-shaped hole 711b. The extension portion 736 is provided with a cylindrical protrusion 736a that is cylindrically projected from the tip end portion of the extension portion 736 to the back surface side.

The detected portion 735 is formed so as to be able to be arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 of the right front plate member 710, and the posture of the gear cam member 734 is determined by the output from the detection sensor 713 as the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4). Is configured as a part to make it detectable.

The cylindrical projecting portion 736a is formed so as to be insertable into the elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and the displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720 via the elongated hole portion 723. Will be done.

A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a, and a fastening screw inserted into the center hole of the ring-shaped collar C3 can be screwed in. By screwing and fixing the fastening screw, the rotating arm member 720 is connected to the cylindrical projecting portion 736a so as not to fall off.

The elevating plate member 740 is a member that is vertically displaced with the rotation of the rotating arm member 720, and is located on the left end side of the guided member 741 that is guided in the vertical direction and on the lower end side of the guided member 741. A long horizontally long member 742 is provided on the left and right sides to be fastened and fixed.

The guided member 741 is formed so that a metal rod 702 fixed to the back case 510 in a posture in which the long directions are aligned in the vertical direction can be inserted, and can be displaced in the vertical direction along the metal rod 702. When the tip of the ridge portion protruding from the left and right sides of the guided member 741 to the back side abuts on the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, the axial rotation of the guided member 741 is restricted. The posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized.

As the posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized, the posture of the horizontally long member 742 fastened and fixed to the guided member 741 is stabilized.

The horizontally long member 742 is a long hole portion 743 formed in a long oval shape on the left and right with a vertical width through which a cylindrical fastened portion 724 of the rotating arm member 720 can be inserted, and an upper side of the long hole portion 743. A cylindrical portion 744 projecting cylindrically on the front side thereof, and a pair of guide portions 745 arranged below the bottom portion at positions equidistant to the left and right with respect to the cylindrical portion 744. Be prepared.

A fastening screw inserted into the elongated hole portion 743 with the ring-shaped collar C3 sandwiched therein is screwed into the cylindrical fastened portion 724, so that the elevating plate member 740 is rotated arm via the cylindrical fastened portion 724. It is supported by the member 720 so as not to fall off.

The cylindrical portion 744 is a portion through which the insertion tubular portion 773 of the elevating / reversing effecting device 770 is inserted and supports the elevating / reversing effecting device 770 in a state of being displaceable in the front-rear direction. That is, the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is not fixed to the elevating plate member 740, but is arranged on the front side of the elevating plate member 740 in such a manner that the elevating plate member 740 can be displaced back and forth with reference to the elevating plate member 740.

The coil spring CS2 is arranged so as to wind around the cylindrical portion 744 and the insertion tubular portion 773. The urging force of the coil spring CS2 acts in the direction of separating the elevating plate member 740 and the elevating / reversing effect device 770.

The guide portion 745 is composed of a pair of left and right, and is a rotary cylinder rotatably supported by a long plate portion 745a in the front-rear direction and a pair of front-rear shaft portions projecting from the plate portion 745a to the left and right outside. A unit 745b and the like are provided.

The rotary cylinder portion 745b rotates when the above-mentioned elevating / reversing effect device 770 is displaced in the front-rear direction and functions as a portion for guiding the displacement in the front-rear direction, which will be described in detail later.

Similar to the front upper inclined portion 714 of the right front plate member 710, the left rear plate member 750 is formed to be inclined in a manner toward the front side toward the upper side on the front side of the right side portion, and the rotary cylinder portion 774e of the elevating and reversing effect device 770. It is provided with a front upper inclined portion 751 formed so as to be able to guide, and a plurality of fastened portions 752 formed with a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted from the back surface side of the rear case 510 is formed.

The blindfold decorative member 768 includes a three-dimensional decorative portion 768a formed into a three-dimensional shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and a substrate on which an LED is fixed to the front side is arranged on the back side of the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a. , The three-dimensional decorative portion 768a can be illuminated by the light emitted from the LED.

The front support member 760 is arranged adjacent to the fixing plate portion 761 having an insertion hole through which the fastening screw is inserted, and the fixing plate portion 761 on the left and right sides thereof, and the back surface of the plate faces upward. It is provided with a receiving inclined portion 762 which is formed so as to be inclined toward the front side.

The fixing plate portion 761 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750 by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole from the front side into the corresponding female screw portion. It is a plate part.

In this fixed position, the receiving inclined portion 762 is arranged in front of the front upper inclined portion 714, 751. That is, a guide path is formed by the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portion 714, 751, and the rotary cylinder portion 774e of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is guided to this guide path, so that the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is moved in the front-rear direction. It is configured to move up and down while being displaced. Hereinafter, this vertical displacement will be described.

52 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 in the LIIa-LIIA line of FIG. 28, and FIG. 52 (b) is a second operating unit 700 in the LIIb-LIIB line of FIG. 28. And is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86. In FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b), the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700 is illustrated.

53 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 in line LIIIa-LIIIa of FIG. 33, and FIG. 53 (b) is a second operating unit 700 in line LIIIb-LIIIb of FIG. 33. And is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86. In FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b), an intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700 is shown.

54 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 in the LIVa-LIVA line of FIG. 30, and FIG. 54 (b) is a second operating unit 700 in the LIVb-LIVA line of FIG. And is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86. In FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the overhanging state of the second operating unit 700 is shown.

The elevating displacement of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 of the second operation unit 700 shown in FIGS. 52 to 54 occurs when the driving force of the drive transmission device 730 is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720. The driving force transmission at the time of the elevating displacement of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 will be described. In this description, FIGS. 28, 30 and 33 will be referred to as appropriate.

At the start of driving force transmission from the effect standby state (see FIG. 28), the displacement direction of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a (see FIG. 51) of the gear cam member 734 is the length of the elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720. Since it is designed to be parallel to the direction, it is possible to suppress the displacement resistance generated at the start of rotation of the gear cam member 734. Further, the same thing holds true even in the overhanging state.

On the other hand, in the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 30), since the displacement direction of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a is orthogonal to the elongated direction of the elongated hole portion 723, the gear cam member 734 receives from the rotating arm member 720 in the rotational direction. By maximizing the displacement resistance, it is possible to easily stop the rotational displacement of the gear cam member 734.

As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the elevating / reversing effect device 770 of the second operation unit 700 is arranged on the back side under the center frame 86, and is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86. Along with this, it is configured to be displaced to the front side in the front-rear direction.

The displacement resistance of this displacement is such that the rotary cylinder portion 774e of the elevating / reversing effecting device 770 is guided to the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portion 714, 751 and the first horizontal plate 774b and the first horizontal plate 774b of the elevating / reversing effecting device 770. 2 The horizontal plate 774c is reduced by the configuration in which the elevating plate member 740 is guided by the rotary cylinder portion 745b.

That is, the pair of rotary cylinder portions 774e are arranged at symmetrical positions of the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portion 714, 751 (the front upper inclined portion 751 is arranged on the left side (not shown in FIG. 52), FIG. 56. (See) is designed to line up parallel to the tilt angle, and the rotating tubular portion 774e rolls to the center of the tubular portion 774d to cause displacement along the receiving tilted portion 762 and the front upper tilted portion 714,751. The displacement resistance of the main body member 771 can be reduced.

Further, by arranging the rotary cylinder portion 745b aligned in the front-rear direction so that the rotary cylinder portion 745b on the front side is slightly arranged on the upper side, it is possible to suppress the tilt displacement of the main body member 771, thereby rotating. It is avoided that the tubular portion 774e applies an excessive load to the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portion 714, 751.

That is, in the present embodiment, the design is such that the position of the center of gravity (rotational axis position) of the effect device 780 is located slightly in front of the front-rear center of the main body member 771, and the main body member 771 always tilts forward due to gravity. Being urged in the direction. Due to the influence of this urging force, the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c are likely to be displaced so that the front side is lowered and the rear side is raised.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotary cylinder portion 745b on the front side, which is arranged in close proximity when the front side of the first horizontal plate 774b is lowered, is arranged slightly upward, and is arranged in close proximity when the rear side of the second horizontal plate 774c is raised. The rotary cylinder portion 745b on the rear side is arranged slightly below. Therefore, the forward tilt displacement of the main body member 771 can be effectively suppressed.

Further, according to this configuration, since the rotary cylinder portion 745b on the front side has a gap between the rotary cylinder portion 745b and the second horizontal plate 774c, rolling with the first horizontal plate 774b is stably generated. Since the rotary cylinder portion 745b on the rear side has a gap between it and the first horizontal plate 774b, it is possible to stably cause rolling between the rotary cylinder portion 745b and the second horizontal plate 774c. As a result, the rotary cylinder portion 745b can be normally rolled, and the displacement resistance when the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

The displacement of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 to the front side is caused by the urging force of the coil spring CS2 in addition to the above-mentioned shape guidance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the displacement resistance of the displacement in the front-rear direction in the case of the ascending displacement in which the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is displaced toward the front side as compared with the case of the descending displacement.

The vertical displacement of the vertical reversal effect device 770 is performed by the driving force of the drive motor 731, and the driving force is divided into a vertical displacement and a front-rear displacement. In the vertical displacement, the load of the ascending displacement becomes relatively large due to the necessity of countering gravity, but the displacement in the longitudinal direction in this case can be assisted by the urging force of the coil spring CS2. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an excessive driving force required when the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is displaced ascending.

The length of the coil spring CS2 is set so as to have a natural length in the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 53) of the second operating unit 700. That is, when the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is arranged below the arrangement in the intermediate effect state, the urging force of the coil spring CS2 causes the displacement of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 in the front-rear direction due to the driving force of the drive motor 731. On the other hand, when the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is arranged above the arrangement in the intermediate effect state, the urging force of the coil spring CS2 does not act on the front-rear displacement of the elevating / reversing effect device 770.

This makes it easier to maintain the arrangement of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 in the intermediate effect state. For example, when the drive motor 731 is driven and controlled from the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700 and the drive motor 731 is stopped and controlled so as to stop the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, the stop timing is slightly less than ideal. Even if it becomes faster, the second operating unit 700 can be displaced so as to be closer to the intermediate effect state side by the urging force of the coil spring CS2.

Further, for example, in the same stop control, even if the stop timing is slightly later than ideal, the second operation unit 700 descends by its own weight, and the descending by its own weight is due to the urging force of the coil spring CS2. By being suppressed, the second operation unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate effect state side to maintain the arrangement.

Further, for example, when the drive motor 731 is driven and controlled from the overhanging state of the second operating unit 700 and the drive motor 731 is stopped and controlled so as to stop the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, the elevating and reversing effect device 770. However, since the urging force of the coil spring CS2 acts as a displacement resistance when the intermediate effect state is passed downward, it is possible to easily prevent the coil spring CS2 from being displaced more downward than the intermediate effect state. Then, even after the drive motor 731 is stopped and controlled, the urging force of the coil spring CS2 is applied, so that the second operation unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate effect state side.

Here, the operation of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 by being displaced in the front-rear direction with the elevating displacement will be described. As a premise, a movable accessory that can be switched between a state in which the center frame 86 displaces inside and outside the frame bordered by the center frame 86 to attract the player's attention and a state in which the player evacuates from the player's field of view is known.

Most of these movable accessories are designed with an emphasis on the appearance when they are placed inside the center frame 86, and when they are retracted to the outside of the center frame 86, the player pays attention to them. In many cases, the appearance was not considered under the assumption that it would not be done.

However, recently, the front-rear distance from the third symbol display device 81 to the center frame 86 is long, and at the edge of the field of view such as passing through the inside of the center frame 86 and seeing the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Since the line of sight reaches the rear outer position of the center frame 86 (the position behind the game area), the player may say that the movable accessory in the state of being retracted to the rear outer position of the center frame 86 does not look good. It may reduce the interest.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, not only the front side (first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 52) of the covering member 787, but also the back side (second main decorative surface 787b1 in FIG. 52) and the upper and lower surfaces (FIG. 52). After forming decorative surfaces on the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2), the displacement direction of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is directed toward the back side with the player side (front side) as the base end. A line that spreads toward the back (inclines downward toward the rear), that is, a displacement direction along the direction of the line of sight at the edge of the player's view so that each decorative surface can be easily fitted in the player's view. It is configured.

As a result, each decorative surface of the lining member 787 can be easily put into the player's field of view. The details of each decorative surface of the lining member 787 will be described later, but the front surface (first main decorative surface 787a1 or second main decorative surface 787b1) that can be visually recognized by the player in the overhanging state (see FIG. 54), FIG. In 54, the first main decorative surface 787a1) and the upper side surface (first sub-decorative surface 787a2 or second sub-decorative surface 787b2) that can be visually recognized by the player in the effect standby state (see FIG. 52), and in FIG. 52, the first sub-decorative surface. The decorative surface 787a2) and the decoration (figure, pattern, character, pattern, etc.) formed on the decorative surface 787a2) are formed as decorations related to each other.

In other words, the first main decorative surface 787a1 and the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 are formed as the first decoration related to each other, and the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 are related to each other. And the first decoration and the second decoration are formed as different decorations from each other.

The decoration formed on the upper side surface is arranged in the front-rear gap between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 26) arranged behind the center frame 86 in the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700. Therefore, the state of paying attention to the ball flowing down the game area formed on the outside of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) and the state of paying attention to the display effect developed by the third symbol display device 81 should be switched. It is easy for the player to get into the field of view when moving his eyes.

Therefore, the contents of the decoration (notification contents, for example, "chance", "big hit", etc.) that can be visually recognized by the player through the lining member 787 in the overhanging state can be displayed on the lining member 787 even in the production standby state. It can be made visible to the player through the side surface.

As a result, the third symbol display device 81 is displaced to the arrangement in the effect standby state so as to be easily visible, and the concealed member 787 arranged inconspicuously can continuously attract the attention of the player.

Further, as will be described later, since the lining member 787 is configured to be rotatable and displaceable so as to switch the decorative surface facing the player side, the content of the decorative surface that can be visually recognized by the player in the overhanging state is different. Cases can arise.

For example, when the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is arranged in the effect standby state before the player confirms the appearance of the overhanging member 787 in the overhanging state (when it is overlooked or the operation speed is excessively high), the front If the content of the decorative surface can be grasped only from the side surface, most of the front side surface thereof is hidden by the game board 13 in the production standby state, so that the player is deployed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. There is no choice but to pay attention to the liquid crystal display, and the attention to the lining member 787 is reduced.

On the other hand, when adopting a configuration in which the contents of the decorative surface can be grasped from the upper side as in the present embodiment, the player can visually recognize the up / down reversal effect device 770 in the effect standby state to cover the decorative surface in the overhanging state. It is possible to grasp the content of the decoration (notification content, for example, "chance", "big hit", etc.) that was visible to the player through the setting member 787.

As a result, to the player who overlooked the appearance of the lining member 787 in the overhanging state, the content notified by the state of the lining member 787 is displayed on the visible decorative surface of the lining member 787 even in the production standby state. It can be continuously notified. As a result, the attention of the lining member 787 can be maintained high regardless of each state such as the effect standby state or the overhanging state.

In the present embodiment, the displacement in the front-rear direction of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 of the second operation unit 700 enters forward from the rear end surface of the game area from the state of being arranged on the back side of the rear end surface of the game area. It will be described that it is configured as such a displacement.

As shown in FIG. 52, in the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700, the front surface of the lining member 787 and the back surface of the plate of the center frame 86 are arranged to face each other, and the center frame 86 is on the lining member 787 side. A flow path forming portion 86a is provided so as to project from the above.

The flow path forming portion 86a is centered after a sphere that has jumped into the warp flow path (rolling path) formed inside the center frame 86 from the left and right inlets of the center frame 86 reaches the lower edge portion of the center frame 86. The rear part of the guide flow path for guiding the ball flowing down the lower rolling surface of the frame 86 toward the first winning opening 64 arranged in the game area by swinging it backward and then flowing it forward again. (See FIG. 9). That is, the flow path forming portion 86a arranges the rear end surface BE1 of the game region on the rear side of the front surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2).

Since the ball flowing down the flow path forming portion 86a has a high probability of entering the first winning opening 64, the attention to the flow path forming portion 86a is high, especially when the ball jumps inside the center frame 86. , The line of sight of the player tends to gather at the flow path forming portion 86a. Since the effect device 780 is arranged directly behind the flow path forming portion 86a in the effect standby state (see FIG. 52), it is easy to configure a state in which the effect device 780 enters the player's field of view in the effect standby state. Can be done.

In the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700, the lining member 787 is arranged on the back side of the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 52 (a)), and in the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700, the lining member 787 The front portion is arranged on the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 53A), and in the overhanging state of the second operating unit 700, the front portion of the covering member 787 is arranged on the front side of the rear end surface BE1.

That is, the lining member 787 is displaced upward and displaced toward the inside of the center frame 86, and at the same time, is displaced toward the front side so as to enter the same front-rear position as the front-rear position of the game area. Therefore, it can be made to appear to the player that the lining member 787 rides on the center frame 86 and moves to the front side (approaching the player side).

In the second operating unit 700, where the effect device 780 is displaced in the front-rear direction due to the vertical displacement, the front-rear position of the front end surface thereof is the second decoration in the overhanged state of the first operating unit 600. It is configured to match (match) the front-rear position of the second effect surface 661b of the rotating member 660.

As a result, the front-back positions of the second effect surface 661b (see FIG. 29) of the first operation unit 600 and the effect device 780 (FIG. 30) of the second operation unit 700, which are arranged close to each other in the overhanging state in the front view. Will match, and it will be easier to make them visible in an integrated manner.

On the other hand, since the arrangement of the effect device 780 in the front-rear direction is lower than the arrangement in the overhang state in the intermediate effect state or the effect standby state, the box-shaped member of the first operation unit 600 is compared with the overhang state. The 661 and the effect device 780 can be separated (independently) for easy visual recognition.

The elevating / reversing effect device 770 includes a main body member 771 that is connected and supported by the elevating plate member 740, and an effect device 780 that is displaceable with respect to the main body member 771. Next, the details of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.

FIG. 55 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating / reversing effect device 770, and FIG. 56 is an disassembled rear perspective view of the elevating / reversing effect device 770. In the description of FIGS. 55 and 56, FIGS. 50 and 51 will be referred to as appropriate.

The main body member 771 includes a lower long portion 772 formed elongated in the left-right direction and an insertion tubular portion 773 projecting cylindrically from the left-right center position of the lower long portion 772 to the back side. , A pair of guide extension portions 774 extending from the left and right ends of the lower long portion 772 to the back side, and a connecting portion extending vertically are integrally formed with the left and right center positions of the lower long portion 772. The upper long portion 775 formed elongated in the left-right direction and the linear motion plate member 784 of the effect device 780 arranged on the back side from the left and right side portions of the upper long portion 775 can be guided in the left-right direction. A plurality of guide portions 776, a transmission device holding plate 777 that is fastened and fixed from the back side to the center of the left and right sides of the upper long portion 775, and a transmission device holding plate 777 that can support the drive transmission device, a lower long portion 772 and an upper long portion 772. A light emitting effect means 778, which is fastened and fixed to the front side of the portion 775, is provided.

The insertion tubular portion 773 is a portion to be inserted into the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 744 of the elevating plate member 740, and is formed in a slidable dimensional relationship on the inner circumference of the cylindrical portion 744. The member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction. That is, by inserting the insertion cylindrical portion 773 into the cylindrical portion 744, it is possible to suppress the tilt displacement of the main body member 771 with respect to the elevating plate member 740 in the front-rear direction.

The guide extension portion 774 is more than a vertical plate 774a whose width faces in the vertical direction, a first horizontal plate 774b which is connected to the upper end of the vertical plate 774a and whose width direction faces the left-right direction, and a first horizontal plate 774b thereof. The second horizontal plate 774c, which is connected to the vertical plate 774a on the lower side and whose width direction faces the left-right direction (parallel to the width of the first horizontal plate 774b), and the vertical plate 774a project from the left-right outer surface toward the left-right outside. It includes a pair of upper and lower tubular portions 774d to be provided, and a rotary tubular portion 774e rotatably supported by the tubular portion 774d.

The width and length of the second horizontal plate 774c are lengthened in such a manner that the second horizontal plate 774c extends inward to the left and right from the widthwise end portion of the first horizontal plate 774b. The expansion portion in the width direction is vertically opposed to the lower bottom portion of the elevating plate member 740 in the assembled state, and abuts on each other to suppress the tilt displacement of the guide extension portion 774 to tilt forward. That is, by ensuring the width and length so that the second horizontal plate 774c is vertically opposed to the lower bottom portion of the elevating plate member 740, the main body member 771 tilts forward with the elevating plate member 740 as a reference. Can be suppressed.

The pair of cylindrical portions 774d is not arranged in the vertical direction, but the upper tubular portion 774d is arranged so as to be offset to the front side as compared with the lower tubular portion 774d. This deviation is set so that the inclination of the front upper inclined portion 714, 751 and the direction of the straight line connecting the centers of the pair of tubular portions 774d are parallel (see FIG. 52 (a)). That is, by arranging the pair of tubular portions 774d in parallel with the inclination of the front upper inclined portion 714, 751, the pair of upper and lower rotating tubular portions 774e are simultaneously applied to the front upper inclined portion 714, 751 or the receiving inclined portion 762. Can be touched. As a result, the pair of upper and lower rotary cylinder portions 774e can be stably rolled, and it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a local load.

The guide portion 776 is fastened and fixed so as to connect a plurality of tubular portions 776a in which a pair of left and right is arranged vertically on both left and right sides and a female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side, and a pair of left and right tubular portions 776a. It is provided with a plurality of dropout prevention plate portions 776b.

The fall-off prevention plate portion 776b is provided with an insertion hole drilled at a position corresponding to a plurality of tubular portions 776a, and a fastening screw inserted from the back surface side into the insertion hole is screwed into the tubular portion 776a. It is a portion to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical portion 776a, and functions as a portion for preventing the linear motion plate member 784 from falling off, and the details will be described later.

The transmission device holding plate 777 includes a motor support plate portion 777a for supporting the drive motor 782, an insertion hole 777b formed in the motor support plate portion 777a at a position where the drive shaft of the drive motor 782 can be inserted, and an insertion hole 777b thereof. Fasten to the back side with a cylindrical protrusion 777c that is cylindrically projected on the front side under the insertion hole 777b, and a pair of insertion holes 777d that are drilled so that fastening screws can be inserted at both upper and lower ends. A wiring fastening member 777e to be fixed is provided.

The cylindrical projecting portion 777c has a female screw formed on the inner peripheral side, and the fastening screw is screwed in while being inserted into the transmission gear 781b to support the upside down member 781 so as not to fall off. It is a part.

A fastening screw screwed into the female screw portion 775a formed in the corresponding portion of the upper long portion 775 can be inserted into the insertion hole 777d, and the transmission device holding plate 777 is inserted into the upper long portion 775 by the fastening screw. It is fastened and fixed to.

The wiring fastening member 777e is a portion for holding and fastening the electric wiring connected to the drive motor 782 in the gap between the transmission device holding plate 777 and the transmission device holding plate 777, and has a shape along the outer frame of the transmission device holding plate 777. By forming the above, it is possible to improve the overall rigidity of the transmission device holding plate 777.

The light emitting effect means 778 is a left-right long plate-shaped upper and lower illuminated substrate 778a in which a light emitting member such as an LED is arranged on the front side, and light transmission arranged on the front side of the illuminated substrate 778a. It includes a light diffusing member 778b, which is a plate member formed of a sex resin material and is formed with a light diffusing process.

The upper illuminated substrate 778a includes a pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d arranged on the back surface side. The detection sensor 778d is a photocoupler type detection device, and is configured to be able to detect the posture of the upside down member 781 of the effect device 780 by arranging the arcuate projecting portion 781d in the detection groove. Will be described later.

The lower light diffusing member 778b has a plurality of fastened portions formed on the back surface side, and is inserted into the fastened portions from the back surface side into an insertion hole formed in the lower long portion 772 at a corresponding position. The fastening screw is screwed in to fasten and fix it so that the fastening screw is inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the upper light diffusing member 778b is formed with insertion holes 778c for inserting the fastening screws on both the left and right sides, and the fastening screw inserted from the front side into the insertion holes 778c is the female screw of the upper long portion 775. By being screwed into the portion 775b, the upper light diffusing member 778b is fastened and fixed.

In this case, the head of the fastening screw faces the front side, which may be conspicuous without countermeasures. However, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the covering member 787 is always on the front side of the insertion hole 778c. Since it is arranged so as to cover the head of the fastening screw fixed to the insertion hole 778c, the head of the fastening screw can be hidden by the covering member 787.

Therefore, even if the design is such that the head of the fastening screw faces the front side, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the head of the fastening screw is conspicuous and adversely affects the effect. In other words, by designing the lining member 787 so as to hide the fastening screw, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the fastening screw in the insertion direction.

The effect device 780 is a device in which an outer shape portion is arranged around the upper long portion 775 so as to be displaceable, and the upside-down member 781 is pivotally supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777. And the drive motor 782 in which the drive gear 782a that transmits the driving force to the transmission gear 781b of the upside down member 781 is fixed to the drive shaft, and the end portions on one side of each of the both ends in the long direction of the upside down member 781. A pair of intermediate arm members 783 that are pivotally supported, and a pair of linear motion plate members 784 whose other end portions of the intermediate arm member 783 are pivotally supported and guided to a guide portion 776 in the left-right direction. A pair of shaft rotating members 785 arranged between the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 and configured to be rotatable (reversed) by a rotating shaft extending in the left-right direction, and the shaft rotating member 785 are mounted on the linear motion plate. A pair of shaft support members 786 that are pivotally supported jointly with the member 784, and a pair of end plate members 785d that are fitted and fixed so as not to fall off with the phase fixed to the left and right outer tip portions of the shaft rotating member 785. It is provided with a covering member 787 which is arranged in front of and behind the end plate member 785d and is formed in a left-right length so as to cover the left and right side portions of the upper long portion 775.

The upside-down member 781 includes a main body plate portion 781a formed in the shape of a long plate, a transmission gear 781b projecting in a gear shape on the back side of the central portion of the main body plate portion 781a, and the length of the main body plate portion 781a. A pair of cylindrical projecting portions 781c projecting cylindrically from both ends in the scale direction to the back surface side and an arc-shaped projecting portion 781a centered on the central axis of the transmission gear 781b are projected on the front side of the main body plate portion 781a. It is provided with an arc-shaped projecting portion 781d.

The transmission gear 781b has a circular hole extending in the front-rear direction at the center, and a cylindrical projecting portion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777 is inserted into this circular hole, and a fastening screw is screwed in from the tip side. The upside-down member 781 is pivotally supported on the transmission device holding plate 777 via the transmission gear 781b so as not to fall off.

The transmission gear 781b meshes with the drive gear 782a, and when the drive motor 782 is energized and the drive gear 782a rotates, the transmission gear 781b also rotates in conjunction with the transmission gear 781b, so that the upside-down member 781 rotates. That is, the upside-down member 781 can be rotationally driven by energizing the drive motor 782.

The cylindrical projecting portion 781c pivotally supports the intermediate arm member 783. That is, the end portion where the one-side support hole 783a of the intermediate arm member 783 is formed is displaced following the cylindrical projecting portion 781c that is displaced as the vertically inverted member 781 is rotationally displaced.

The arc-shaped projecting portion 781d is formed so as to be displaceable in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d of the light emitting effect means 778. That is, the arc-shaped projecting portion 781d can be arranged on either of the upper and lower pair of detection sensors 778d.

Therefore, by reading the output of the detection sensor 778d, the posture of the upside-down member 781 can be changed into two postures in which the arcuate projecting portion 781d is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d and a posture between them (a pair of detection sensors 778d). It is possible to determine by (a posture in which the arcuate projecting portion 781d is not arranged on both sides of the detection groove).

The intermediate arm member 783 is formed in a long rod shape (narrow plate shape), and has a one-side support hole 783a that is bored at one end and pivotally supported by a cylindrical protrusion 781c, and one side. A cylindrical other-side cylindrical portion 783b in which the inner peripheral side is formed through the other end on the opposite side of the support hole 783a, and a bevel-shaped gear tooth (bevel gear) centered on the other-side cylindrical portion 783b. ), The bevel tooth portion 783c, and the like.

A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c, and a fastening screw to be inserted from the back side into the one-side support hole 783a is screwed into the female screw. As a result, the intermediate arm member 783 is pivotally supported by the upside down member 781 so as not to fall off.

The linear motion plate member 784 is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is long in the left-right direction, and has a cylindrical projecting portion 784a that is formed in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783. An arcuate plate portion 784b projecting in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the cylindrical projecting portion 784a and an oval shape extending in parallel in the left-right direction on both upper and lower sides of the cylindrical projecting portion 784a are formed. In the intermediate portion between the pair of long hole portions 784c to be formed, the pair of support plate portions 784d which are arranged in parallel in the upper and lower pairs at the position between the elongated hole portions 784c and are projected to the back side, and the support plate portions 784d. A pair of ridges 784e that are projected on the sides facing each other and are formed as ridges that extend in the front-rear direction, and a cylindrical shape that is opened to the back side at the end of the support plate 784d and is arranged on the inner peripheral side. A ring-shaped arrangement hole 784g formed through a pair of fastened portions 784f on which a female screw is formed, a cylindrical projecting portion 784a and a support plate portion 784d, and a shaft support member 786. A ring holding half portion 784h having a semi-circular surface capable of holding the metal member 785e, and a magnet holding half portion 784i formed in a rectangular box shape so as to be able to hold the magnet Mg between the shaft support member 786. , Equipped with.

The cylindrical protrusion 784a is formed with an outer peripheral diameter slightly shorter than the inner peripheral diameter of the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, and has a protrusion length slightly longer than the axial length of the other side cylindrical portion 783b. It is said that a female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side. That is, the fastening screw inserted from the back surface side into the other side cylindrical portion 783b is screwed into the female screw of the cylindrical projecting portion 784a, so that the intermediate arm member 783 cannot fall off to the cylindrical projecting portion 784a. Is supported by.

The arcuate plate portion 784b is formed in an arc shape having an inner peripheral diameter slightly longer than the outer peripheral diameter of the other side cylindrical portion 783b. As a result, the arcuate plate portion 784b is arranged in close proximity to the other side cylindrical portion 783b so as to face each other in the radial direction in the assembled state, and the inclined displacement of the other side cylindrical portion 783b with respect to the rotation axis is limited. As a result, the rotational displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 centered on the other side cylindrical portion 783b can be stabilized.

The elongated hole portion 784c is an opening through which the tubular portion 776a of the main body member 771 is inserted, and is fastened to the female screw formed in the tubular portion 776a so as to be inserted into the insertion hole of the dropout prevention plate portion 776b from the back surface side. By screwing in the screw, the linear motion plate member 784 is supported by the main body member 771 so as not to fall off.

In the supported state (assembled state), the linear motion plate member 784 can be slidably displaced along the forming direction of the elongated hole portion 784c. That is, the linear motion plate member 784 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction.

The support plate portion 784d is a plate-shaped portion for holding the metal rod 785a of the shaft rotating member 785 so as to suppress the vertical displacement, and the ridge portion 784e defines the arrangement of the metal rod 785a in the left-right direction. It functions as a ridge, but the details will be described later.

The arrangement hole 784g is an opening for avoiding interference of the shaft rotating member 785 with the umbrella tooth member 785c, and the details will be described later.

The shaft rotating member 785 is a member arranged in a pair on the left and right and pivotally supported by the linear motion plate member 784, and is a metal rod 785a formed in a substantially columnar shape from a metal material and the length of the metal rod 785a. A concave groove portion 785b formed in the circumferential direction at the center position in the direction, and a member arranged at the left and right inner end portions of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a, and a captive tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783. An umbrella tooth member 785c on which a toothed umbrella tooth (an umbrella gear) is formed, an end plate member 785d arranged at the left and right outer ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a, and an end plate member 785d thereof. A ring-shaped metal member 785e arranged around the metal rod 785a so as to be raised from the end plate member 785d, and a female screw formed inside a portion protruding from the left and right inner portions of the end plate member 785d. A rotation position stabilizing portion 785f, into which a metal screw is screwed and fixed, is provided.

The metal rod 785a is arranged between the pair of support plate portions 784d of the linear motion plate member 784, and the ridge portion 784e is inserted and arranged in the recessed groove portion 785b. Here, the recessed groove portion 785b is configured to have a dimensional relationship that allows it to slide with the ridge portion 784e, and is also configured to have a dimensional relationship that restricts displacement in the left-right direction with respect to the ridge portion 784e.

That is, the groove width of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be slightly longer than the left and right width of the ridge portion 784e, and the diameter of the groove deep portion of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be shorter than the gap length between the ridge portions 784e. The diameter of the portion where the groove portion 785b is not formed is set to be longer than the gap length between the ridge portions 784e.

Thereby, the metal rod 785a can be supported on the back surface side of the linear motion plate member 784 in such a manner that the axial rotation is possible and the displacement in the left-right direction is suppressed.

The bevel tooth member 785c is arranged so as to enter the arrangement hole 784g of the linear motion plate member 784. In a state where the bevel tooth member 785c partially enters the placement hole 784g, the intermediate arm member 783 engages the bevel tooth portion 783c with the bevel tooth member 785c from the opposite side (rear side) of the linear motion plate member 784. It is assembled to.

In the assembled state, the umbrella tooth member 785c is inserted into the placement hole 784g, but the metal rod 785a is supported by the linear motion plate member 784, so that the bevel tooth member 785c cannot fall off to the front side. The displacement to the back side is regulated by the intermediate arm member 783. Therefore, the bevel tooth member 785c is supported by the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 so as not to fall off.

The cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d is formed with an inner peripheral side shape corresponding to a non-circular shape (for example, a D-shaped cross-sectional shape) as the tip portion of the metal rod 785a, and the inner peripheral side shape and the metal rod 785a are formed. It is fitted and fixed by being formed in a dimensional relationship with the tip of the fitting.

The method of fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a is not limited to this. For example, a method of fixing using an adhesive or the like may be used, or a female screw is formed at the tip of the metal rod 785a, and a fastening screw to be inserted into the end plate member 785d is screwed into the female screw. The method of fastening and fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a may be used, or another method may be used.

The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held so as to be fitted in the ring holding half portion 784h of the linear motion plate member 784. The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held, and the cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d that supports the metal rod 785a is slidably contacted on the inner peripheral side of the ring-shaped metal member 785e, whereby the rotation center of the end plate member 785d is formed. Can be easily aligned with the axis passing through the center of rotation of the umbrella tooth member 785c, and the load generated in the axial direction of the metal rod 785a can be reduced.

The rotation position stabilizing portion 785f functions as a portion where the arranged metal screw is attracted to the magnet Mg.

The shaft support member 786 is a member formed in the shape of a square plate, and has an insertion hole 786a in which a fastening screw screwed into a fastened portion 784f can be inserted, and a ring holding of the linear motion plate member 784. The magnet Mg can be held between the ring holding half portion 786b having a semicircular surface capable of holding the ring-shaped metal member 785e between the half portion 784h and the magnet holding half portion 784i of the linear motion plate member 784. A magnet holding semicircle 786c formed in a square box shape is provided.

When the fastening screw inserted from the back side into the insertion hole 786a is screwed into the fastened portion 784f and the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft support member 786 are assembled, the back side of the metal rod 785a is attached to the plate portion of the shaft support member 786. The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held by the ring holding halves 784h and 786b, and the magnet Mg is held by the magnet holding halves 784i and 786c.

The lining member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed in a box shape in which the left and right insides are opened in a pair of front and rear, and is fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d of the shaft rotation member 785, and is different on the opposite surface. A decoration consisting of meaningfully readable figures, patterns, letters or patterns is formed.

That is, the covering member 787 includes a first main decorative surface 787a1 formed as a decorative surface to be visually recognized by the player in the overhanging state (see FIG. 54), and a second main decorative surface 787b1 formed on the back surface thereof. On the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 formed on the side visible to the player when the first main decorative surface 787a1 is arranged on the front side and the effect standby state (see FIG. 52) is set, and on the back surface thereof. A second sub-decorative surface 787b2 to be formed is provided. The second sub-decorative surface 787b2 is formed on the side that can be visually recognized by the player when the second main decorative surface 787b1 is arranged on the front side and is in the effect standby state (see FIG. 52).

The lining member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed of two front and rear members fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d and formed in a substantially box shape with the left and right inside open in the assembled state (see FIG. 26). A plurality of extending portions 787c extending toward each of the left and right members, and a recessed portion 787d recessed so as to retract to the left and right outside in a portion between the extending portions 787c are provided. ..

The extension portion 787c is formed so that the ends thereof are in contact with each other or are arranged in close proximity to each other in the close arrangement state (see FIG. 26) of the covering member 787. As a result, the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be visually recognized integrally.

The recessed portion 787d is a circular portion arranged in the center of the light diffusing member 778b of the light emitting effect means 778 and the upper left and right center upper side of the upper long portion 775 in the close arrangement state of the covering member 787 (see FIG. 26). It is a portion for visually opening the arc plate portion and the like, and is formed as a recess in a shape that at least avoids interference with these portions.

In the lining member 787, the first main decorative surface 787a1 faces the front side and the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 faces the upper side (see FIGS. 29 and 52) and the second main decorative surface 787 is directed toward the front side in accordance with the operation of the effect device 780. The state can be switched between a state in which the decorative surface 787b1 faces the front side and a state in which the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 faces upward (see FIG. 30). First, a mechanism constituting a displacement for switching the state of the lining member 787 will be described.

57 (a) and 57 (b) are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotation member 785. FIG. 57 (a) illustrates a vertically arranged state (also referred to as an upright vertical arrangement state) of the vertically inverted member 781 in which a pair of cylindrical projecting portions 781c are arranged on the same vertical line, and FIG. 57 (b). ) Shows a state in which the upside-down member 781 is rotated about 24 degrees counterclockwise in the front view with respect to the cylindrical projecting portion 777c from the state shown in FIG. 57 (a). In addition, in FIGS. 57 (a) and 57 (b), the end plate member 785d of the shaft rotation member 785 on the left side and the shaft rotation member 785 on the right side are omitted for ease of understanding.

In the upright vertical arrangement state, the arcuate projecting portion 781d is arranged in a state of entering the detection groove of the upper detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56). Further, in the inverted vertical arrangement state in which the upside down member 781 is rotated 180 degrees from the upright vertical arrangement state, the arcuate projecting portion 781d is arranged in a state of entering the detection groove of the lower detection sensor 778d. NS.

That is, the output of the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56) is configured so that the vertically inverted member 781 is switched between the upright vertical arrangement state and the inverted vertical arrangement state, and the voice lamp control is performed from the output of the detection sensor 778d. The device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the state of the effect device 780.

As shown in FIGS. 57 (a) and 57 (b), when the upside down member 781 is rotationally displaced, the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced in the left-right direction while changing its posture. The angle of this attitude change corresponds to (proportional to) the rotation angle of the shaft rotation member 785, and the left-right displacement amount of the other side cylindrical portion 783b is the left-right displacement amount of the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft rotation member 785. Corresponds to.

Here, the order in which the rotational displacement and the lateral displacement (linear displacement) occur will be described. These displacements do not occur at the same degree at the same time, and there are arrangements in which the degree of rotational displacement is larger and arrangements in which the degree of linear motion displacement is larger.

First, to give an overview, the configuration of the upside down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, and the linear motion plate member 784 is a well-known slider crank mechanism. That is, when the upside down member 781 rotates around the cylindrical projecting portion 777c, the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 pivotally supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 781c of the upside down member 781 becomes front. The displacement direction of the linear motion plate member 784 connected to the other side cylindrical portion 783b is regulated so as to translate along the moving axis HL1 passing through the central portion of the cylindrical projecting portion 777c. The pair of left and right linear motion plate members 784 are simultaneously displaced in the opposite directions along the moving axis HL1.

As shown in FIG. 57 (b), the other-side cylindrical portion 783b is displaced by a length L1 in the left-right direction from the vertical arrangement state shown in FIG. 57 (a) to the rotation of about 24 degrees. The length L1 is half the width of the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the lower elongated portion 772 and the upper elongated portion 775 (the length between the left-right center and the left-right width end portion). It is illustrated as.

Further, due to the state change from FIG. 57 (a) to FIG. 57 (b), the posture change centered on the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 is 5 degrees clockwise in the front view. The angle is suppressed to less than half of 15 degrees, which is the angle as the arrangement interval of the adjacent teeth of the umbrella tooth portion 783c.

Since the umbrella tooth member 785c is arranged on the front side of the intermediate arm member 783, the load transmission (tooth transmission) between the umbrella tooth portion 783c and the umbrella tooth member 785c is at a position facing each other in the front-rear direction, that is, , Occurs on the moving axis HL1 in frontal view.

58 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotation member 785 in the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa of FIG. 57 (a). FIG. 58 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the vertical inversion member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotation member 785 in the LVIIIb-LVIIIb line of FIG. 57 (b).

As shown in FIG. 58 (b), the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced so as to press the gear tooth of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 (upper in FIG. 58 (b)). Displace to). In addition, in FIG. 58 (b), for easy understanding, the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear tooth of the bevel tooth member 785c are shown so as to overlap each other, and the overlapping width is the bevel tooth portion 783c. It is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the bevel tooth member 785c and the gear tooth.

The bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c, and the driving force is transmitted, so that the shaft rotating member 785 is rotationally displaced. While the upside down member 781 is rotationally displaced 180 degrees counterclockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 57 (a), the right shaft rotating member 785 rotates in the backward rotation direction, and the left shaft rotating member 785 is forward. Rotate in the direction of rotation.

While the upside-down member 781 is rotated 180 degrees, the toothed portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 is rotated 90 degrees around the other side cylindrical portion 783b, and the capped tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 is rotated accordingly. Rotate 180 degrees. That is, the angle at which the tooth member 785c rotates about the metal rod 785a is configured to be twice the angle of rotation about the cylindrical portion 783b on the other side of the tooth portion 783c.

Here, the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth member 785c that can occur due to the pressure due to the displacement from the state of FIG. 58 (a) to the state of FIG. 58 (b) is less than the thickness of the gear tooth in the circumferential direction, and the bevel tooth member. It is less than the amount that reliably rotates the gear teeth of 785c. That is, the amount of displacement until the representative tooth in contact rotates to the arrangement of the adjacent tooth (the displacement required for rotation at an angle of 30 degrees according to the fact that the gear teeth of the umbrella tooth member 785c are arranged in 12 equal parts). Amount) is smaller than.

The gear tooth of the bevel tooth portion 783c is displaced so as to press the gear tooth of the bevel tooth member 785c, but in the present embodiment, since the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c are formed of a resin material, pressing is performed. Since the accompanying displacement is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, the posture of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 in the rotational direction is changed from the state of FIG. 57 (a) to FIG. 57 (b). ) Is maintained.

The elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the umbrella tooth member 785c is caused by the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f of the shaft rotating member 785 from the magnet Mg with respect to the driving force transmitted to the intermediate arm member 783 via the upside down member 781. It is generated by countering the adsorption force generated in (see FIG. 54).

That is, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the lower rotation position stabilizing portion 785f so as to limit the rotational displacement of the right shaft rotating member 785 in the backward rotation direction. The shaft rotating member 785 on the right side receives an urging force in the forward rotation direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attractive force of the magnet Mg acts in the direction of increasing the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 on the right side.

Further, with respect to the shaft rotating member 785 on the left side, the arrangement of the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f is on the front side of the end plate member 785d as in the case of the right side, while the arrangement of the magnet Mg is on the upper side opposite to the right side. (See FIG. 55). Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the upper rotation position stabilizing portion 785f, so that the left shaft rotating member 785 receives an urging force in the backflip direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attractive force of the magnet Mg acts in the direction of increasing the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the left shaft rotating member 785.

In the present embodiment, the attractive force of the magnet Mg is the driving force applied to the umbrella tooth member 785c from the state shown in FIG. 57 (a) until the other side cylindrical portion 783b is displaced by the length L1 in the left-right direction. It is designed to be able to generate loads exceeding.

As a result, the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c are elastically deformed so as to absorb the displacement amount of the bevel tooth portion 783c shown in FIG. 58 (b). When the displacement is continued beyond the state shown in FIG. 57B, the magnet tooth member 785c rotates beyond the attractive force of the magnet Mg, and the magnet Mg and the metal screw of the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f are brought into contact with each other. When the arrangement is separated, the magnetic force is extremely reduced, and the intermediate arm member 783 and the umbrella tooth member 785c released from the attractive force of the magnet Mg are rotationally displaced while elastically recovering.

Therefore, at the start of rotation, the elastic recovery portion increases the momentum in the rotation direction of the shaft rotating member 785, so that the rotation speed at the start of rotation can be instantaneously improved. This improvement in rotation speed occurs not only in the shaft rotating member 785 but also in the covering member 787 (see FIG. 55) that is fastened and fixed to the shaft rotating member 785.

As a result, the operation of the lining member 787 can be slowed or slowed without changing the driving speed of the drive motor 782. Therefore, the effect of the lining member 787 is produced while reducing the burden on the control design of the drive motor 782. The effect can be improved.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 occurs due to the attractive force of the magnet Mg can be delayed from the timing at which the toothed portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 starts rotating. ..

The rotation position stabilizing portion 785f that receives the attraction force of the magnet Mg is composed of a pair of upper and lower portions, and when the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, one of the rotation position stabilizing portions 785f is formed. Is placed close to the magnet Mg and receives an attractive force (see FIG. 52 (b)), and when the orientation is reversed and the second main decorative surface 787b1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, the other (FIG. 52 (b)). ), The upper) rotation position stabilizing portion 785f is arranged close to the magnet Mg and receives an attractive force.

That is, regardless of whether the surface facing the front side is the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg is the axial rotating member at least in the close arrangement state (see FIGS. 29 and 30). It works effectively for the purpose of limiting the rotational displacement of the 785. Therefore, in the displacement from the close arrangement state, the action that the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is delayed by the magnetic force can be generated regardless of the direction of the rotational displacement (in both directions).

That is, between the state shown in FIG. 58 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 58 (b), the degree of linear displacement in the left-right direction is larger than the degree of rotational displacement. Then, when the upside-down member 781 continues to rotate counterclockwise in the front view beyond FIG. 57 (b), the degree of linear displacement in the left-right direction settles down, and rotational displacement occurs.

According to the present embodiment, since the slider crank mechanism is adopted as described above, the same operation occurs. That is, in the vicinity of the vertical arrangement state, the displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c is large in the left-right direction and small in the vertical direction, so that the lateral displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 is large and the amount of rotation is small. Therefore, the lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 is large, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is small.

On the other hand, the displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c becomes smaller in the left-right direction and larger in the up-down direction as the upside-down member 781 tilts so as to approach the left-right direction. The amount of rotation is small and large. Therefore, the lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 is small, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is large.

Therefore, in the rotational operation of the upside-down member 781 that starts from the vertical arrangement state and ends in the vertical arrangement state, the degree of left-right displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 first increases, and then the degree of rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 increases. The size increases, and the degree of lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 increases again.

Due to the linear displacement and the rotational displacement occurring in this order, the extending portion 787c of the covering member 787 is formed at the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772. It is possible to avoid collision. Next, the change in the appearance of the lining member 787 will be described.

59 (a) to 59 (c) are front views of the effect device 780. In FIGS. 59 (a) to 59 (c), the reversal operation of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is illustrated in chronological order. FIG. 59 (a) illustrates the effect device 780 in the upright vertical arrangement state of the upside down member 781, and FIG. 59 (b) shows the effect device when the upside down member 781 is rotated 90 degrees from the vertical arrangement state. 780 is shown, and in FIG. 59 (c), the effect device 780 in the inverted vertical arrangement state of the upside-down member 781 is shown.

The upside-down member 781 is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise from the front view from the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57A), so that the state changes to the inverted vertical arrangement state. In the inverted vertical arrangement state, the posture of the lining member 787 is inverted 180 degrees with respect to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59A). As a result, the decorative surface that can be visually recognized by the player can be switched (see FIG. 59 (c)).

The upside-down inverted member 781 is rotationally displaced 180 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise) from the inverted vertical arrangement state to return to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57A). Therefore, in the reversing operation, each time the drive motor 782 (see FIG. 56) is driven by reversing the direction so as to rotate and displace the vertically reversing member 781 by 180 degrees, the state shown in FIG. 59 (a) and FIG. 59 (c). ) Can be repeatedly switched between the states shown in).

As described above, while the upside-down inverted member 781 is rotationally displaced 180 degrees counterclockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. do. Here, from the rotation direction of the tooth portion 783c, the shaft rotation member 785 on the right side rotates in the backward rotation direction, and the shaft rotation member 785 on the left side rotates in the forward rotation direction. That is, the pair of shaft rotating members 785 arranged on the left and right and the covering member 787 fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d rotate in the opposite direction.

Therefore, in the middle position, the right side covering member 787 faces the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 toward the front side, and the left side covering member 787 faces the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 toward the front side (see FIG. 59 (b)). ).

As a result, during the rotational displacement of the lining member 787, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) of the lining member 787 on the left side and the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) of the lining member 787 on the right side. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) from being visually recognized together.

Therefore, the decorative surface of the covering member 787 during the rotational displacement can be intentionally deviated from the left and right, and the content of the decorative surface can be configured so as not to be easily recognized by the player. The amount of information given to the player by the lining member 787 can be reduced.

This makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the covering member 787 during rotational displacement. Further, since the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned on the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787b1) when the rotational displacement is stopped, the game is played until the rotation of the covering member 787 is stopped. It can also have the effect that it is easy to maintain the line of sight of the person on the lining member 787.

The rotational displacement is performed in the overhanging state of the second operating unit 700 (see FIG. 54), but the rotational displacement is stopped and the decorative surface of the pair of left and right covering members 787 becomes the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the first). In the state where the two main decorative surfaces 787b1) are aligned, the effect device 780 has risen to the vicinity of the upper and lower centers of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 30), and in this state, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 It is unlikely that attention will be focused on (or the second sub-decorative surface 787b2).

In particular, when the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be displaced close to the second operation unit 700, the field of view to the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) is the third operation. It will be blocked by the unit 800.

On the other hand, when the second operation unit 700 is in the effect standby state (see FIG. 52) and the effect device 780 is arranged below the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or The second sub-decorative surface 787b2) is easily in the player's field of view.

As described above, in the second operation unit 700, it is possible to prevent the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) from being visually recognized in the overhanging state during the rotational displacement, or on the player side. It is formed as an aspect that can be noticed by the player in the production standby state without paying attention by preventing the surface from facing.

As a result, the appearance of the second operating unit 700 can be changed according to the arrangement, so that the production performance for the cost of arranging the second operating unit 700 (occupancy of space, burden of hiding well) becomes excessively low. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a state.

After the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the lining member 787, the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f is attracted to the magnet Mg (see FIG. 54 (b)) to stabilize the posture of the shaft rotating member 785 and the lining member 787. Can be achieved.

In the present embodiment, since the metal member attracted to the magnet Mg is composed of a metal screw, it is possible to reduce the member cost and improve the maintainability as compared with the case of designing a dedicated metal member. ..

As described above, since the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 is accompanied by a linear displacement in the left-right direction, the arrangement of the effect device 780 capable of executing the rotational displacement is limited. That is, in the effect standby state (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33) of the second operation unit 700, the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member arranged on the left and right are arranged by executing the rotational displacement. 750, the front support member 760, and decorative members such as the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a fixedly arranged on the front side thereof collide with the covering member 787.

On the other hand, in the overhanging state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 30), the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 can be executed by securing the space in the left-right direction.

Therefore, in the drive control of the drive motor 731 that causes the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787, it is determined from the output of the detection sensor 713 that the second operating unit 700 is in the overhanging state. It is controlled to be feasible on the premise of. As a result, the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 can be normally generated.

The extending portions 787c are arranged close to each other in the vertically arranged state of the upside down member 781, and in this state, they are arranged facing each other in front of and behind the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772. Therefore, when the covering member 787 is rotationally displaced by a rotation axis extending in the left-right direction from this arrangement, the extending portion 787c collides with the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772. Problems occur.

On the other hand, the configuration in which the extending portions 787c are arranged close to each other produces the effect that the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be visually recognized integrally, and is a configuration necessary for the production. It is preferable that it can be maintained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lining member 787 is configured to be linearly displaced by the length L1 in the left-right direction in advance before the rotational displacement (see FIG. 57). Due to the linear displacement of the length L1, the extension portion 787c can be retracted from the front-rear position of the connecting portion between the upper length portion 775 and the lower length portion 772, and the extension portion 787c and the upper length portion 775 can be retracted. It is possible to avoid a problem that the connecting portion between the lower long portion 772 and the lower long portion 772 collides with each other.

Further, by configuring the rotational displacement in this way, the rotational displacement does not occur (or is limited) at the length L1 while the lining member 787 is displaced in the left-right direction, and the rotational displacement occurs at the remaining length L2. Therefore, the amount of displacement in the left-right direction during rotation of the lining member 787 can be suppressed to a small size.

As a result, the attention of the lining member 787 can be suppressed to a low level and the rotational displacement can be made inconspicuous as compared with the case where the arrangement of the lining member 787 changes significantly during rotation. As the design of the surfaces 787a1 to 787b2, it is possible to perform the design ignoring the appearance during the rotational displacement, so that the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

The timing at which the covering member 787 starts rotating can be arbitrarily set by designing the attractive force of the magnet Mg. Therefore, for example, even if a design change is made to increase the left-right width of the connecting portion between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 of the main body member 771, the magnet Mg is maintained while the configuration of the effect device 780 is the same. By changing the magnet to a magnet having a large attractive force, it is possible to avoid a collision between the above-mentioned connecting portion and the extending portion 787c as in the present embodiment.

As illustrated by the imaginary line in FIG. 59, the insertion hole 778c is always arranged so as to be hidden by the lining member 787. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 778c from being visually recognized by the player, and it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being lowered by the fastening screw.

In the present embodiment, the decorations (figures, patterns, patterns, etc.) of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 formed on the pair of left and right covering members 787 are not the same on the left and right covering members 787. The arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is asymmetrical according to the left and right decorations.

That is, since the insertion hole 778c is a portion through which the fastening screw is inserted, the LED cannot be arranged on the illuminated substrate 787a at that position (see FIG. 55). In addition, since the fastening screw is made of metal and does not transmit light, it is easily visible in the dark when producing light emission.

Therefore, in the left and right decorations, it is desirable to arrange the insertion holes 778c so as to avoid a brightly shining and conspicuous place, and as a result of doing so, the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is asymmetrical.

Of course, it is permissible to make the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c symmetrical. In particular, when the decorations of the decorative surfaces 787a1,787a2, 787b1,787b2 are the same on the left and right covering members 787, there is no disadvantage due to the symmetrical arrangement of the insertion holes 778c, and the illuminated substrate The design of the 778a can be facilitated.

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), in the present embodiment, the covering member 787 is displaced linearly to the left and right during the reversing operation of the elevating / reversing effect device 770, and the extension portion 787c is located near the center of the light diffusing member 778b. Even in a state where it is not surrounded by, the mechanical parts such as the upside down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, and the linear motion plate member 784 are hidden so as not to be visually recognized.

That is, when viewed from the front, the outer shape of the upper long portion 775 of the main body member 771 is designed to fit in the outer shape of the light diffusing member 778b arranged on the front side, and the vertical width of the linear motion plate member 784 is on the front side. It is designed to fit in the vertical width of the left and right long portions of the upper long portion 775 arranged in. Further, the upside-down member 781 is designed to fit in the outer shape of the disk portion of the upper long portion 775 arranged on the front side, and the intermediate arm member 783 is designed so that the displacement locus fits in the outer shape of the light diffusion member 778b. Designed.

As a result, the mechanism for realizing the displacement of the effect device 780 can be hidden behind the light diffusing member 778b to make it invisible, so that the effect of the appearance of the effect device 780 during the reversing operation is reduced. Can be avoided.

It will be described back to FIG. The third operation unit 800 is arranged above the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the effect standby state, and is supported by the tip of a pair of left and right elevating arm members 801 (see FIG. 31) supported by the rear case 510. It is a unit configured so that it can be displaced up and down as the elevating arm member 801 is driven in the vertical direction.

FIG. 60 is an exploded front perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800, and FIG. 61 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800. In addition, in FIGS. 60 and 61, the portion constituting the displacement of the third operation unit 800 is shown, and the decorative members 870 and 880 as the decorative portion arranged on the outside are omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the third operation unit 800 is a fixed cylinder in which a held member 810 held by the elevating arm member 801 and a cylindrical portion 821 are fastened and fixed to the central portion of the held member 810. The member 820, the inner rotating member 830 pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 821 with the cylindrical portion 821 inserted on the inner peripheral side, and the inner rotating member 830 inserted into the main body portion 831 with the inner rotating member 830 inserted on the inner peripheral side. It is housed in an outer rotating member 840 that is pivotally supported, a plurality of intermediate arm members 850 that are rotatably connected to a cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840 (five in this embodiment), and a held member 810. It has a plurality of gear members to be provided, and includes a drive transmission device 860 for transmitting a driving force that displaces an inner rotating member 830, an outer rotating member 840, and an intermediate arm member 850.

The held member 810 includes a disk-shaped main body member 811 and a perforated lid member 817 that covers the main body member 811 from the front side.

The main body member 811 is recessed in the central portion to hold the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, and is formed with an insertion hole for inserting a fixing screw for fixing and a through hole for inserting an electric wiring. A detection sensor 813, which is a photocoupler type sensor and is fixed with the detection groove directed to the side where the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 can be accepted, and a motor holding portion 814 that holds the drive motor 861. A plurality of cylindrical projecting portions 815 projecting on the front side as cylindrical portions that support the transmission gear 863 so as not to fall off, and a double cylindrical portion that supports the load response gear 865 on the front side as a double cylindrical portion that supports the load response gear 865 on the front side. A plurality of double-cylindrical projecting portions 816, which are projecting, are provided.

The perforated lid member 817 includes a circular hole 818 formed in the central portion in the front-rear direction. The circular hole 818 is designed so that the transmission gear 863 and the load response gear 865 project inward from the inner peripheral edge portion thereof when viewed in the opening direction.

The fixed cylindrical member 820 is fastened and fixed to the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate portion 822 formed at the front end portion of the cylindrical portion 821, and the circular plate portion 822, and a light emitting means such as an LED is provided on the front side. A disk-shaped illuminated substrate 823 to be arranged and a translucent resin material formed of an umbrella-shaped (or bowl-shaped) and light-transmitting resin material that can cover the illuminated substrate 823 from the front side. A decorative member 824 and a sliding member 825 formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter on the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and slidable with the cylindrical portion 821 are provided.

The cylindrical portion 821 has a female screw formed at the tip end on the back side, and the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole of the cylinder fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is screwed into the female screw to fix the cylinder. The member 820 is fastened and fixed to the held member 810 so as not to rotate.

The cylindrical portion 821 is formed to penetrate in the axial direction on the inner peripheral side, and the electrical wiring inserted into the through hole of the cylinder fixing portion 812 is laid to the front side through this penetrating portion and is arranged behind the illuminated substrate 823. It is connected to the connector to be connected.

As LEDs, the illuminated substrate 823 includes inner light emitting portions 823a arranged at the vertices of the pentagon and central positions equidistant from those vertices, and outer light emitting portions 823b arranged at 15 locations equidistant on the circumference. And. The inner light emitting unit 823a is composed of an LED whose optical axis faces the front side (front), and the outer light emitting unit 823b is composed of an LED whose optical axis points radially outward (diameter direction).

The outer light emitting unit 823b is composed of 15 LEDs arranged at equal intervals on the circumference. As will be described later, the light emitted from the outer light emitting portion 823b irradiates the plated portion 871a of the first decorative member 870 which is arranged in close contact with each other on the circumference at equal intervals. The member 870 will be irradiated with light from the three LEDs.

The outer light emitting portion 823b is fixedly arranged on the illuminated substrate 823, and the first decorative member 870 is configured to be rotationally displaced about the center of the circle, but the outer light emitting portion 823b and the first decorative member 870 are coaxial. Since the first decorative member 870 is arranged at equal intervals on the circle, the light from the same number of LEDs (three in this embodiment) is always emitted from each first decorative member 870 regardless of the orientation of the first decorative member 870 in the rotation direction. Can be irradiated to.

As a result, it is possible to suppress a change in the amount of light of the light LD1 irradiated to the first decorative member 870 during the rotation operation.

The sliding member 825 is configured such that the inner diameter side portion is slidable to the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, while the outer diameter side portion is slidable to the circular flange-shaped portion 831a of the inner rotating member 830. Is formed in.

The sliding member 825 has a flange-shaped portion formed on the front side thereof, and has a tubular portion that protrudes rearward from the inner diameter side end portion of the flange-shaped portion in a cylindrical shape. Since the diameter is formed to be slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the circular flange-shaped portion 831a, it is slidably fitted in the inner rotating member 830.

By interposing the sliding member 825 in between, the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 configured to be rotatable around the fixed cylindrical member 820 are prevented from coming into direct contact with each other. Further, the sliding member 825 is arranged on the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and similarly on the strength-advantageous side of the circular flange-shaped portion 831a side of the main body portion 831 during sliding. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 are damaged or deformed by the load generated at the time of sliding failure (when the displacement resistance is unintentionally excessive).

The inner rotating member 830 has a cylindrical main body portion 831 having a circular flange-shaped portion 831a at the front end portion, and a position in which the circumference of the main body portion 831 is divided into five equal parts in the circumferential direction in the longitudinal direction. A plurality of metal rods 832. The linear motion member 833 and a plurality of rotary members 834 rotatably supported on the radial outer side of the linear motion member 833 are provided.

The main body portion 831 has a plurality of sliding protrusions extending rearward in a ridge shape with the circular flange-shaped portion 831a as a base end at an angle position (5 points) between the above-mentioned circular flange-shaped portion 831a and the adjacent metal rod 832. It includes a strip portion 831b and a plurality of recessed portions 831c formed in recessed portions at the opposite end of the circular flange-shaped portion 831a at intervals in the circumferential direction.

The sliding ridge portion 831b is a portion that is slidably configured with the inner peripheral side curved surface of the main body portion 841 of the outer rotating member 840, in order to reduce the contact area with the outer rotating member 840 and reduce the contact friction. The tip of the protrusion is formed in a semicircular cross section.

The arrangement of the sliding ridge portion 831b is set at an angle position in the middle of the adjacent metal rods 832 as described above, but in other words, on the opposite side of the metal rod 832 with respect to the central axis of the outer rotating member 840. It is considered to be a position (a position shifted by 180 degrees).

As a result, in the switching rotation operation described later, the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced in the out-of-diameter direction along the metal rod 832, and the outer rotating member 840 to which the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported is displaced in the out-of-diameter direction. Even if it receives, the displacement of the outer rotating member 840 can be received by the sliding ridge portion 831b, so that the contact area between the inner peripheral surface of the outer rotating member 840 and the outer peripheral surface of the inner rotating member 830 is received. Can be kept low.

The recessed portion 831c is a portion in which the transmission protrusion 864a of the central annular gear 864 is approached and arranged, and the transmission protrusion 864a is arranged in the recessed portion 831c to prevent mutual rotation. The rotation angle of the central annular gear 864 and the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 can be matched.

The linear motion member 833 has a pair of cylindrical projecting portions 833a and 833b, which are arranged at intervals so as to line up in the linear motion displacement direction and are projected in a cylindrical shape toward the rear, and the cylindrical projecting portions 833a thereof. , 833b, a cylindrical cylindrical shaft portion 833c formed on the side away from the central axis of the main body portion 831 and inserted into the rotating member 834, and the tip portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 833c along the circumferential direction. It is provided with a recessed groove 833d to be recessed.

The recessed groove 833d is arranged on the side protruding from the rotating member 834 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), and the overhanging portions 873, 883 of the decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 slide. When the rotating member 834 is fitted to the outside, it functions as a groove for displacement regulation to prevent the rotating member 834 from falling off in the out-of-diameter direction, which will be described in detail later.

The rotating member 834 includes a bevel tooth portion 834a formed in the shape of a bevel gear, and a plurality of cylindrical projecting portions 834b projecting in a cylindrical shape parallel to the linear motion direction. The bevel tooth portion 834a is not formed over the entire circumference, but is formed over the 3/4 circumference (about 270 degrees) required for operation.

A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 834b, and the decorative members 870 and 880 are screwed into the fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 874 and 884 of the decorative members 870 and 880. It functions to be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, but the details will be described later.

The outer rotating member 840 is a plurality of cylindrical main body portions 841 and a plurality of outer rotating members 840 extending outward in the radial direction at positions obtained by dividing the circumference of the main body portion 841 into five equal parts in the circumferential direction (five in the present embodiment). 842, gear teeth 843 formed on the outer peripheral side along the circumference of the rear end of the main body 841, and the diameter of the main body 841 in an arrangement that allows entry into the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. A detection unit 844 extending outward is provided.

The extended arm portion 842 includes a cylindrical portion 842a extending parallel to the central axis of the main body portion 841, and a female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 842a, and the base end of the intermediate arm member 850. By screwing the fastening screw into the female screw with the cylindrical portion 842a inserted through the side rod portion 851, the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported by the extended arm portion 842 so as not to fall off.

The gear teeth 843 are arranged so as to be meshed with the load response gear 865 of the drive transmission device 860, and thus function as a portion for switching the presence or absence of rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840, which will be described in detail later.

The intermediate arm member 850 is a member formed in a long length, and has a base end side rod portion 851 whose one end side is pivotally supported by a cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and a base end side rod portion 851 thereof. A thickening portion 852 that is thickened to the front side on the end side, and a tip side rod portion 853 that extends parallel to the long direction of the base end side rod portion 851 from the front side end portion of the thickening portion 852. , A rotation transmission portion 854 formed by having gear teeth at the end portion of the tip end side rod portion 853.

The rotation transmission portion 854 is a portion interlocking with the linear motion member 833 and the rotation member 834, and has a supported hole 854a formed in a dimensional relationship so as to be rotatable with each other with the cylindrical projecting portion 833a inserted. A guide hole 854b, which is a long hole drilled in an arc shape centered on the supported hole 854a and guides with a cylindrical projecting portion 833b inserted, and a bevel gear centered on the supported hole 854a. The bevel tooth portion 854c, which is formed in a shape and forms a bevel gear by meshing with the bevel tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834, is provided.

The drive transmission device 860 is driven by being pivotally supported and fixed to a drive motor 861 fastened and fixed to the motor holding portion 814, a drive gear 862 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 861, and a cylindrical projecting portion 815. A plurality of transmission gears 863 meshed with each other so that the driving force can be transmitted via the gear 862, a central annular gear 864 meshed with the transmission gear 863, and the central annular gear 864 in front of the arrangement. A pair of load response gears 865 that are staggered and are pivotally supported by the double cylinder protrusion 816, and are supported by the double cylinder of the double cylinder protrusion 816 on the back side of the load response gear 865. It includes a torque limiter 866 whose resistance is variable according to the load in the rotational direction applied to the load response gear 865.

The central annular gear 864 is formed in an annular shape, is designed so that the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 can be inserted into the inner peripheral side thereof, and is recessed so as to be able to enter and arrange in the recessed portion 831c of the inner rotating member 830. A transmission protrusion 864a projecting from the bottom plate portion to the front side in an arrangement and shape corresponding to the installation portion 831c, and a coaxial double ring-shaped bottom plate arranged on the inner diameter side and the outer diameter side of the transmission protrusion 864a. A support annular portion 864b projecting from the portion to the front side is provided.

In the assembled state, when the transmission protrusion 864a is inserted into the recessed portion 831c, the rear end portion of the main body portion 831 of the inner rotating member 830 is dimensionally related to the intermediate fit in the gap between the support annular portions 864b. Or it is fitted due to the dimensional relationship of the tightening fit. As a result, the central annular gear 864 and the inner rotating member 830 can be integrally rotated.

The arrangement of the recessed portion 831c and the transmission protrusion 864a is not limited at all. For example, they may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, or may be arranged at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction.

If the intervals are equal, it can be assembled by matching the arrangement of the transmission protrusion 864a and the recessed portion 831c without considering the posture of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864, so that the assembly can be performed quickly. It will be possible to do. When the shapes of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annulus gear 864 are symmetrical in the rotational direction (same at intervals of 72 degrees) as in the present embodiment, the postures of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annulus gear 864 are arranged. It is considered that there is little effect of the gears shifting during assembly, so it is effective to set them at equal intervals.

If the intervals are unequal, the number of man-hours for assembling after aligning the posture of the central annular gear 864 with the inner rotating member 830 increases by one, but the transmission protrusion 864a to the recessed portion 831c increases. The arrangement can be used to align the inner rotating member 830 with the central annular gear 864.

The load response gear 865 is disposed so as to be meshable with the gear teeth 843 of the outer rotating member 840. Due to the engagement of the torque limiter 866 with the load response gear 865, the load response gear is due to the magnitude of the rotational resistance between the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 and the outer rotating member 840. It is configured to switch between a state in which rotation of 865 is allowed and a state in which rotation is restricted (restricted).

That is, the torque limiter 866 functions as a so-called safety clutch, and is configured to disconnect the connection and cancel the transmission of the driving force when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied. In the present embodiment, a device (one-way torque limiter) that transmits a driving force in one direction is configured as a set in which the transmission direction is reversed, and the driving transmission can be switched by the torque limiter 866 with good responsiveness in both directions. It is configured as follows.

FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800. It should be noted that in FIGS. 62 and 63, the decorative portion of the third operation unit 800 is shown, and the portion for constituting the displacement is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the third operation unit 800 is fastened and fixed to the above-mentioned inner rotating member 830 and the cylindrical projecting portion 834b of the inner rotating member 830, and is one of the cylindrical projecting portions 834b. It includes a first decorative member 870 that covers the side surface, and a second decorative member 880 that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b and covers the cylindrical projecting portion 834b from the opposite side surface of the first decorative member 870. ..

The first decorative member 870 includes a first skeleton portion 871 that can be fastened and fixed to a cylindrical projecting portion 834b, and a first skeleton portion 875 that is formed so as to cover one side of the first skeleton portion 871. , Equipped with.

The first skeleton portion 871 is entirely plated to easily reflect light.

The inside of the frame of the first covering portion 875 is made of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, and figures and patterns and character patterns (hereinafter, also referred to as "pictures") are drawn on the surface thereof. When the surface faces the front side, the player is made to visually recognize the pattern or the like.

In the present embodiment, independent patterns or the like are drawn on a plurality of (five) first lining portions 875. Therefore, by changing the first lining section 875 that emits strong light by controlling the light emission by the illuminated substrate 823, or by changing the arrangement of the first lining section 875, the pattern that attracts the attention of the player may be different. Can be made.

For example, from the player's point of view, the third symbol display device 81 performs a display effect that makes the third symbol display device 81 pay attention to which first lining portion 875 stops, and at the same time, the inner rotating member 830. If the rotation is controlled, the first lining portion 875 on the third symbol display device 81 side can be continuously changed according to the rotation, so that the player can stop the rotation for a period of time. The line of sight can be focused on the first lining unit 875.

The second decorative member 880 includes a second skeleton portion 881 that can be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b, and a second skeleton portion 885 that is formed so as to cover the other side of the second skeleton portion 881. , Equipped with.

The second skeleton portion 881 includes a holding piece 881a for holding the magnet Mg2 housed in the second lining portion 885 so as not to fall off.

The second lining portion 885 is made of metal in which a metal screw is screwed and fixed at a position (proximity position) where the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 housed in the adjacent second lining portion 885 acts. By attracting the magnet Mg2 to the screw, the unity of the second lining portion 885 in the united state (particularly, the one-unit state, see FIG. 32) can be ensured.

The second embossed portion 885 has a figure or pattern or a character pattern (hereinafter, also referred to as a "pattern") drawn on the surface, and when the surface faces the front side, the pattern or the like is played. Make people visually recognize.

In the present embodiment, the patterns and the like drawn on the plurality of (five in the present embodiment) second embossed portions 885 are a set of a plurality of (at least two, maximum five) second embossed portions 885. Each of the second lining parts 885 is made into a circle so that when the five second lining parts 885 form a combined state, they are visually recognized as a "circular body" in a front view. It is decorated to form a part of the shape.

The pattern or the like drawn on the second lining portion 885 is not particularly limited, but in the present embodiment, the content grasped from the second lining portion 885 in the unified state is the rotation direction of the second decorative member 880. It is designed as a pattern that does not make a big difference even if the arrangement of is different. That is, the design does not have clear top, bottom, left, and right as a pattern, and the change in the outer shape is not noticeable even when rotated (in the present embodiment, it is a circular shape).

Therefore, if the plurality of second lining portions 885 can be firmly integrated with each other, it is possible to improve the effect performance when the second lining portion 885 is visually recognized by the player. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the second lining portion 885 side is firmly integrated by the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 in the combined state, so that the second lining portion 885 is combined when it is arranged on the front side. It is possible to improve the production performance in the state.

In each second covering portion 885, a magnet Mg2 is arranged on one side in the width direction, and a metal screw is screwed and fixed on the other side. When the direction of the second covering portion 885 is reversed in the front-rear direction due to the switching rotation operation described later, the arrangement of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw in the front view is also reversed accordingly.

Even in this case, the metal screw attracted by each magnet Mg2 is simply replaced with the metal screw screwed and fixed to the second lining portion 885 adjacent to the opposite side, and the five second linings are used. Since the portions 885 are arranged in an annular shape, there is no change in the degree of adsorption when integrated.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the magnet is not housed in the first lining portion 875. As a result, the strength of the integration on the first lining portion 875 side is slightly weakened, but it is avoided that the effect performance is deteriorated due to this.

That is, since independent patterns and the like are drawn on the first lining portion 875, the degree of integration in the combined state is weak, and even if the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 is slightly deviated, the game is played. There is no possibility that the pattern or the like to be visually recognized by a person cannot be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the production performance of the production using the pattern or the like drawn on the first lining portion 875 from deteriorating.

Further, since the strength of the integration on the first lining portion 875 side is weakened, the vibration caused by the elevating displacement (stopping from) and the rotational displacement (stopping from) as the integrated rotation operation or the switching rotation operation. ), The arrangement of the combined first lining portions 875 can be shifted. As a result, the first lining portion 875 can be displaced in a displacement mode that cannot be realized by the conventional machine composed of a single circular member instead of the divided body. Therefore, the first lining portion 875 can be displaced. It is possible to improve the effect of the effect of the lining portion 875.

Due to the above circumstances, in the combined state in which a plurality of decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged close to each other, the state in which the first decorative member 870 faces the front side is also referred to as an individual combined state (see FIG. 31), and the second decorative member 880 is on the front side. The state of facing is also referred to as a one-association state (see FIG. 32). Next, the operation for switching between the individual united state and the united state will be described.

64 (a), 64 (b), 65 (a) and 65 (b) are rear views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b). ), FIG. 67 (a) and FIG. 67 (b) are front views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850.

In FIGS. 64 to 67, the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced by transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60) and rotating the inner rotating member 830 relative to the outer rotating member 840. Is illustrated in chronological order.

That is, it is shown in chronological order in the rear view and the front view, and shows how the inner rotating member 830 rotates by 45 degrees from the individual united state (FIGS. 64 (a) and 66 (a)). ..

In FIGS. 64 to 67, the axis of the metal rod 832 is described as the virtual position line 832F, and the change in the angle of the arrangement of the virtual position line 832F corresponds to the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830. The rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 from the individual united state (FIGS. 64 (a) and 66 (a)) is shown at an angle θ31.

As shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, when the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise from the front view (see FIG. 66) from the individually united state (this rotation operation is also referred to as “switching rotation operation” below), it is intermediate. Since the rotation of the arm member 850 is allowed, the relative rotation of the inner rotating member 830 with respect to the outer rotating member 840 is allowed. In the present embodiment, the outer rotating member 840 is maintained in arrangement by the resistance of the torque limiter 866 (see FIG. 60), and only the inner rotating member 830 rotates.

Therefore, in FIGS. 64 to 67, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 842a is maintained, and the intermediate arm member 850 is rotationally displaced about the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840.

From the above-mentioned configuration between the members, the virtual position line 832F is a straight line passing through the center of the supported hole 854a, and the cylindrical projecting portion 833a of the linear motion member 833 is fastened and fixed to the supported hole 854a. The arrangement change of the supported hole 854a corresponds to the arrangement change of the linear motion member 833.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the rotation transmission unit 854 is displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotation member 830, and at the same time, is displaced in the circumferential direction, so that the rotation is supported by the rotation transmission unit 854. Similarly, the member 834 is displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830, and at the same time, is displaced in the circumferential direction. That is, in the switching rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is displaced 180 degrees in the circumferential direction with a displacement in the radial direction.

Since the switching rotation operation includes the displacement in the circumferential direction, the arrangement of the linear motion member 833, the rotary member 834, and the decorative members 870 and 880 to be fastened and fixed to the linear motion member 833 and the decorative members 870 and 880 to be fastened and fixed to the linear motion member 833 is not fixed even at the radial end position. Since the displacement can be maintained, the effect during the switching rotation operation can be compared with the case where the displacement is completed only by the radial direct motion displacement (for example, the reversal operation described above in the second operation unit 700). Can be kept high.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned reversing operation of the second operation unit 700, a high acceleration rotational operation is generated by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the umbrella tooth portion 783c and the umbrella tooth member 785c (see FIG. 58). , The arrangement of the covering member 787 at the end of the lateral displacement in the linear motion direction (see FIG. 59 (b)) is designed to weaken the impression of being fixed.

That is, by delaying the start of rotation of the lining member 787 and not delaying the end of rotation, the rotation speed of the lining member 787 is improved, and the change width of the left-right position is small at the end of lateral displacement in the left-right direction (a period in which the change width of the left-right position is small. Even in a situation where (a period near the dead point of the slider crank) continues, the effect of the operation of the lining member 787 is maintained high by increasing the rotation speed of the lining member 787.

Since the switching rotation operation includes radial displacement, it is conceivable that a radial load is likely to occur from the intermediate arm member 850 to the outer rotating member 840, and the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840 may be displaced. In the embodiment, the radial loads of the intermediate arm member 850 are similarly generated at equal intervals (72 degree intervals) about the rotation axis, so that the loads cancel each other out. As a result, the deviation of the rotation axis of the outer rotation member 840 can be suppressed, so that the switching rotation operation can be easily executed normally.

As described above, the radial displacement (enlargement / reduction displacement) in the rotational operation of the third operation unit 800 occurs with the rotation in the circumferential direction. Therefore, in order to avoid a collision with the surrounding decorative member, the switching rotation operation of the third operation unit 800 detects that the third operation unit 800 is in the overhanging state to determine the posture of the elevating arm member 801. It is controlled so that it can be executed in the state determined by the output of the sensor.

Further, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880, which are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 due to the above-mentioned displacement of the rotation transmitting portion 854, are similarly radially around the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830. It is displaced, and at the same time, it is displaced in the circumferential direction.

Due to the rotational displacement of the intermediate arm member 850, the umbrella tooth portion 854c (see FIGS. 66 and 67) and the umbrella tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834 (see FIG. 60) mesh with each other, and the rotating member 834 and the rotating member rotate. The decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the member 834 are rotationally displaced about the metal rod 832.

The angle of this rotational displacement is proportional to the angle θ32 as the rotational angle of the intermediate arm member 850 with respect to the virtual position line 832F. Further, the rotation direction is increased so that the angle θ32 is separated from the virtual position line 832F in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, and the rotation member 834 is arranged on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850 (see FIG. 60). ), It is set in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the outside diameter side of the virtual position line 832F.

Since the rotating member 834 is in a posture in which either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 faces the front side in the integrally rotated state, the maximum angle θ31E as the maximum value of the angle θ31 (180 in the present embodiment). When the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 becomes the maximum angle θ32E (90 degrees in this embodiment) due to the rotation of the rotation member 834, the toothed portion 834a of the rotation member 834 rotates half a circumference (180 degrees rotation). ).

That is, the angle at which the rotating member 834 rotates about the metal rod 832 is configured to be twice the rotation angle about the supported hole 854a of the toothed portion 854c.

Here, unlike what was described as the action of the magnet Mg of the second operation unit 700 described above, the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 (see FIG. 62) is the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 centered on the metal rod 832. It does not cause an action that delays the rotation.

That is, the magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force with the adjacent second decorative member 880, and the decorative member 880 is displaced in the outer diameter direction along the metal rod 832 with the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850. As a result, the suction force may be lost due to the formation of a gap between the second decorative members 880 provided adjacent to the second decorative member 880.

Therefore, before the rotational displacement centered on the metal rod 832 is started, the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 is lost, and the rotation is performed with respect to the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 centered on the metal rod 832. There is no delaying effect.

Therefore, the driving force required for rotationally displacing the decorative members 870 and 880 can be reduced. That is, since the driving force required for the drive motor 861 can be reduced, the drive motor 861 can be miniaturized.

Further, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 can be started quickly and ended at an early stage, the degree of attention of the player to the rotational displacement centered on the metal rod 832 can be reduced.

The quickness at the start of the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 is also maintained by configuring the decorative members 870, 880 so that the rotational angle of the decorative members 870, 880 with respect to the rotational angle of the inner rotating member 830 is not constant.

For example, in the process of rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, the rotation angle of the virtual position line 832F (rotation angle of the inner rotation member 830) from the state where the intermediate arm member 850 is arranged in a reduced diameter and the integral rotation operation is possible is 45 degrees. In the case of, the angle θ32 is 18 degrees (see FIG. 66 (b)), and the angle θ32 when the virtual position line 832F is rotated at an angle of 45 degrees is 27 degrees (FIG. 67 (a)). reference).

That is, the angle θ32 is designed so that the rotation start side of the inner rotating member 830 from the state where the integral rotation operation is possible is smaller than that during the rotation. Thereby, the degree of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 can be suppressed at the start of rotation of the inner rotating member 830.

The driving force of the drive motor 861 will be used for the rotation of the inner rotating member 830, the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, and the rotation of the decorative members 870 and 880. Since the driving force required for the rotation of the decorative members 870 and 880 at the start of rotation of the inner rotating member 830 from the possible state can be reduced, the load applied to the drive motor 861 at the start of rotation of the inner rotating member 830 is excessive. It is possible to avoid becoming large.

Further, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 centered on the metal rod 832 occurs while being displaced in the circumferential direction in the front view, the visibility of the decorative members 870 and 880 during the rotational displacement can be suppressed low. can. As a result, the possibility that the side surface portion of the decorative member 870, 880 (for example, the connecting surface between the first lining portion 875 and the second lining portion 885) is visible can be reduced, and the decorative member 870, 880 can be reduced. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the side surface of the.

At the time of the switching rotation operation, the intermediate arm member 850 overlaps with the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 in the front view. Further, the arrangement also overlaps with the extension arm portion 842 provided adjacent to the extension arm portion 842 in which the cylindrical portion 842a on which the shaft is supported is arranged. Therefore, without countermeasures, the intermediate arm member 850 may collide with the peripheral portion.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the structure of the intermediate arm member 850 is shifted back and forth for each part to avoid a collision. That is, the distal end side rod portion 851 and the distal end side are arranged so that the distal end side rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 are arranged on the rear side of the proximal end side rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850. The rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 can be overlapped with each other in the front-rear direction, and it is possible to avoid collision during the switching rotation operation.

Further, by arranging the base end side rod portion 851 on the front side of the extended arm portion 842 and the tip end side rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 on the rear side of the extended arm portion 842, the switching rotation operation can be performed. At that time, the intermediate arm member 850 can be arranged in front of and behind the extended arm portion 842, and the collision between the intermediate arm member 850 and the extended arm portion 842 can be avoided.

In FIGS. 64 to 67, the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 with respect to the outer rotating member 840 is a direction in which the intermediate arm member 850 is allowed to rotate (front view counterclockwise direction in the individually united state, see FIG. 66). ) Was explained. In this case, the gear teeth 843 are meshed with the load response gear 865 that generates resistance via the torque limiter 866 to receive resistance, and the rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840 is limited.

On the other hand, when the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 is the reverse direction described above (front view clockwise direction in the individually united state), or in a direction allowing rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (front view counterclockwise in the individually united state). If the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state in which rotation is restricted by rotation in the (rotational direction) (for example, reaches a united state from an individual united state) and then continues to rotate in the same direction, the outside A load exceeding the allowable value of the torque limiter 866 that regulates the rotation of the rotating member 840 is applied to the load response gear 865, the posture maintenance of the load response gear 865 by the torque limiter 866 is released, and the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 are released. And rotate synchronously.

In other words, when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted regardless of the rotation direction, the inner rotating member 830 is driven to rotate in the direction in which the rotation regulation of the intermediate arm member 850 is continued. The inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously, and the intermediate arm member 850, the first decorative member 870, and the second decorative member 880 rotate integrally while maintaining the united state. Also called "integral rotation operation").

The integral rotation operation occurs in a state where the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted, and in the present embodiment, it occurs in a combined state in which the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are arranged close to each other.

Therefore, unlike the switching rotation operation in which the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced in the diameter expansion direction, it is not necessary to consider the collision with the surrounding decorative members. It is possible to perform an integral rotation operation in the state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the integral rotation operation is executably controlled regardless of the arrangement of the third operation unit 800.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the driving force of the single drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60) causes the switching rotation operation and the expansion of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 accompanied by the displacement in the diameter-expanding direction. It is possible to perform an integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 without radial displacement, and any operation can be executed in both drive directions, but the priority is given to the operation. Yes, it is not possible to perform any action immediately in any direction of rotation.

For example, from the states shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 66 (a), the switching rotation operation can be executed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and if the rotation is continued as it is, it is integrated. The rotational operation can be executed, and the integrated rotation operation can be executed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 clockwise in the front view. Immediately, the integrated rotation operation can be executed by the counterclockwise rotation in the front view. Cannot be executed.

Further, for example, after the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 66 (a), the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state where rotation is restricted. Then, when the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise (counterclockwise) in the front view, the switching rotation operation is executed again, and immediately, the integrated rotation operation is executed in the clockwise direction in the front view. Can not.

As described above, the operation mode of the third operation unit 800 of the present embodiment depends on whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or allowed with respect to the rotation direction of the drive motor 861. The relative displacements of the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 change.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) determines whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or allowed for each rotation direction of the drive motor 861. It is possible to control the drive motor 861 in an appropriate drive direction based on the determination result. Hereinafter, an example of drive control of the drive motor 861 will be described.

FIG. 68 is a timing chart showing an arrangement of the elevating arm member 801, a drive mode of the drive motor 861, and an example of the output of the detection sensor 813 in chronological order. As shown in FIG. 68, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is controlled so as to alternately repeat the normal effect and the reverse effect as the effect control of the third operation unit 800.

At the time of the inversion effect, an operation including the switching rotation operation is executed, and at the time of the normal effect, an operation not including the switching rotation operation is executed. This is to prevent the decorative members 870 and 880 from colliding with the surrounding decorative members in the switching rotation operation.

For the same purpose, when the power is turned on again in the event of a sudden power failure, or when the power is turned on in the morning, the rotation control of the drive motor 861 is executed after the third operation unit 800 is in the overhanging state. After grasping the state of the movable portion from the output of the detection sensor 813, it is controlled to execute the control at the time of normal production. As a result, even if the state of the moving part cannot be grasped from the output result of the detection sensor 813 when the power is turned on, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the decorative members 870 and 880 accidentally collide with the surrounding decorative members. ..

As the drive direction of the drive motor 861, forward rotation and reverse rotation are described. The forward rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise in the front view (a drive mode in which the integrated rotation operation is immediately executed in the individual united state (see FIG. 66 (a))). The reverse rotation in 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view (a drive mode in which a switching rotation operation is immediately executed in an individual united state).

First, the drive control at the time of the normal effect before the time of the reversal effect will be described. At the time of this normal effect, the third operation unit 800 is in an individual united state, and the drive motor 861 is stopped or only the drive control of forward rotation is executed. Therefore, the rotational operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is always an integral rotation operation.

Since the switching rotation operation does not occur, a collision with the surrounding decorative member cannot occur, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to the effect standby state or the overhanging state at any timing. For example, by driving the drive motor 861 while the held member 810 is vertically displaced by the vertical movement of the elevating arm member 801, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are integrally rotated at the same time as the elevating displacement. It is also controlled so that it can cause movement.

As a matter of course, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may be integrally rotated in a state where the arrangement of the elevating arm member 801 is fixed, or the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may be rotated. The elevating arm member 801 may be elevated while the integral rotation operation is stopped.

Since the drive direction of the drive motor 861 is only forward rotation, the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched each time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the switching of this output is determined. The voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the posture of the outer rotating member 840 as an initial position, and by setting a plurality of types of drive times from this initial position, the outer rotating member 840 can be arbitrarily selected. It can be controlled to stop in the posture of.

Next, the drive control at the time of the reversal effect will be described. First, at the time of the reversal effect, the elevating arm member 801 is displaced downward, and the third operation unit 800 is brought into an overhanging state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue normal rotation until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When it is determined that the detected unit 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in the reverse rotation. By driving the reverse rotation, the third operation unit 800 executes the switching rotation operation, but during this period, the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is regulated by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so that the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. NS.

When the drive motor 861 is continuously driven in the same rotation direction, the united state is reached, and the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is executed. After the start of the integrated rotation operation, the outer rotating member 840 also starts rotating in conjunction with the inner rotating member 830, so that the detected unit 844 retracts from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integrated rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 has started due to the switching of the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation operation is started, the drive motor 861 is stopped or only the reverse rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotational operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is always an integral rotation operation. Since the switching rotation operation does not occur, a collision with the surrounding decorative member cannot occur, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to the effect standby state or the overhanging state at any timing.

Since the drive direction of the drive motor 861 is only reverse rotation, the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched every time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the voice lamp control device 113 (FIG. 4) can determine the posture of the outer rotating member 840.

When switching from the inversion effect to the normal effect, the elevating arm member 801 is displaced downward in advance, and the third operation unit 800 is brought into an overhanging state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue the reverse rotation until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When it is determined that the detected unit 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in the forward rotation. By driving the forward rotation, the third operation unit 800 executes the switching rotation operation, but during this period, the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is regulated by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so that the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. NS.

Next, the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is executed. After the start of the integrated rotation operation, the outer rotating member 840 starts rotating, so that the detected unit 844 retracts from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integrated rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 has started due to the switching of the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation operation is started, the transition to the normal production is performed again. The limitation on the drive control at the time of the normal effect is the same as the limitation on the drive control described at the time of the normal effect arranged before the above-mentioned inversion effect.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the single detection sensor 813 determines the switching of the rotation mode of the third operation unit 800 (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation) and the rotation angle of the outer rotation member 840. It can also be used for determining the standard. Therefore, the required number of detection sensors 813 can be reduced as compared with the case where individual detection sensors are used for each determination.

As described above, the switching rotation operation can be executed by switching the drive direction of the drive motor 861 in the opposite direction from the state where the integrated rotation operation is continued or the rotation is stopped. That is, regardless of the posture of the first decorative member 870 in the individual united state, the switching rotation operation can be executed to switch to the united state.

Therefore, in the operation effect, when controlling to switch to the unified state at the timing of the jackpot notification, it is possible to avoid the player from predicting the presence or absence of the jackpot notification from the posture of the first decorative member 870.

Further, the decoration in the one-association state is designed so that the content grasped by the player does not differ greatly depending on the arrangement in the rotation direction of the second decorative member 880, as described above. That is, even if the arrangements of the decorative members 870 and 880 in the rotation direction at the start of the switching rotation operation are different, the contents grasped by the player as a united state at the end of the switching rotation operation are the same. can do.

Therefore, unlike the case where the patterns in the one-union state are different depending on the arrangement in the rotation direction, the one-piece rotation operation for adjusting the posture after reaching the one-union state can be omitted, so that the first decorative member in the individual united state can be omitted. Regardless of the posture of 870, the drive control up to the jackpot notification can be the same.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to realize both the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation in both the forward rotation and the reverse rotation as the drive direction of the drive motor 861. Therefore, it is possible to realize a wide variety of production modes with a single drive motor 861 as compared with the case where the operation modes are fixed for forward rotation and reverse rotation.

FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 on the LXIX-LXIX line of FIG. 28. As shown in FIG. 69, the opening of the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 penetrates from the rear end portion where the cylinder fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is arranged to the front end portion where the illuminated substrate 823 is arranged. The electrical wiring is guided through this opening from the rear end portion to the front end portion, and the terminal is connected to the connector arranged on the illuminated board 823. Electricity is conducted through the electrical wiring, and the LED arranged on the illuminated substrate 823 is configured to be able to control light emission.

The light LH1 emitted from the inner light emitting portion 823a of the illuminated substrate 823 acts to illuminate the bulging portion 824a that bulges toward the front side on the central portion side of the translucent decorative member 824. The bulging portion 824a functions as a portion that is visible to the player in the central portion of the circle in which the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 is arranged on the circumference in the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880. do.

The light LD1 emitted from the outer light emitting portion 823b of the illuminated substrate 823 is irradiated inside the decorative members 870 and 880 (first decorative member 870 in FIG. 69) arranged on the front side, and the decorative members 870 and 880 are irradiated. It acts to illuminate from the inside.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to switch between an individual united state in which the decorative member 870 is arranged on the front side (see FIG. 69) and a united state in which the decorative member 880 is arranged on the front side (see FIG. 32). Therefore, the optical LD1 can switch between the case of illuminating the decorative member 870 and the case of illuminating the decorative member 880.

In the individual united state (see FIG. 69), the direction of the optical LD1 is switched to the front side by being reflected to the front side by the plated portion 871a of the first skeleton portion 871 that has been plated. As a result, most of the light LD1 can be irradiated toward the first lining portion 875, and the brightness of the first lining portion 875 at the time of irradiation of the light LD1 can be satisfactorily increased.

Here, in the present embodiment, the illuminated substrate 823 is fixedly arranged, and the decorative members 870 and 880 are configured to rotate around the illuminated substrate 823. Therefore, the irradiation direction of the optical LD1 and the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged. The relationship with the arrangement can be changed by the rotation of the decorative members 870, 880. For example, during rotation, the light LD1 may be irradiated to the central portion of the plating portion 871a, or the light LD1 emitted from the same LED may be irradiated to a position deviated from the central portion of the plating portion 871a. obtain. Therefore, without countermeasures, the degree of brightness of the first lining portion 875 by the optical LD1 is likely to change due to the rotation of the decorative members 870 and 880, and the decorative members 870 and 880 are integrally rotated while emitting light at a constant brightness. It may be difficult to perform the effect of making it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shape of the plating portion 871a configured to reflect the light LD1 is a concave shape, and the radius of curvature of this concave shape is formed to be smaller than the radius of the illuminated substrate 823. And it is designed so that its center is arranged in the vicinity of the center of the first lining portion 875 in front view.

Since the optical LD1 is arranged so that the optical axis is directed in the outer diameter direction of the circle in which the outer light emitting portion 823b is arranged, the optical LD1 is reflected by the concave shape of the plated portion 871a and is the center of the radius of curvature thereof. It will proceed toward the side and illuminate the vicinity of the center of each first lining portion 875 of the first decorative member 870.

Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of the plated portion 871a with respect to the outer light emitting portion 823b, the plurality of light LD1s can be reflected so as to illuminate the vicinity of the center of the first lining portion 875. As a result, it is possible to stably irradiate the vicinity of the center of the front plate portion of the first lining portion 875 with light, so that the first lining portion 875 can be visually recognized with uniform brightness even during the integrated rotation operation. be able to.

Further, the first skeleton portion 871 is a portion where the plating treatment is performed in the same manner as the plating treatment on the plating portion 871a, and the outer plating portion 871b arranged outside the first lining portion 875 in a front view is provided. Be prepared. The optical LD1 is reflected by the outer plating portion 871b as well as the plating portion 871a, but since the outer plating portion 871b is arranged rearward as compared with the arrangement of the plating portion 871a, the outer plating portion 871b The degree of light can be weakened.

As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the intensity of the light visually recognized outside the first concealed portion 875 is too strong, the player feels dazzling, and the visibility inside the frame of the first concealed portion 875 is lowered. be able to.

The illuminated substrate 823 is sandwiched between the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the front and back, but is not completely closed at the joint, so that all the light from the outer light emitting portion 823b is inside the lighting substrate 823. Is not irradiated to.

First, the internal structure can be visually recognized in FIG. 69 between the member edge portion 875a of the first lining portion 875 and the member edge portion 885a of the second lining portion 885 arranged to face the member edge portion 875a. A certain degree of gap VA1 is formed. Since the outer plating portion 871b projects to the outside of the frame of the first lining portion 875 through the gap VA1, the light LD1 passing through the gap VA1 can be reflected by the outer plating portion 871b.

Further, the member interference with the metal rod 832 is between the member outer end portion 875b of the first lining portion 875 arranged to face the metal rod 832 and the member outer end portion 885b of the second lining portion 885. A large gap VA2 is formed that exceeds the area required to avoid.

First, the gap VA2 makes it possible to secure a sufficient length of the metal rod 832 by avoiding a collision between the metal rod 832 and the decorative members 870 and 880, and the metal rod 832 makes the linear motion member 833 and the rotation member 833 and rotate. It is formed for the purpose of ensuring the function of guiding the linear displacement of the member 834.

The gap VA2 is secondly a fastening screw inserted into the skeleton portion 871,881 and is screwed into the cylindrical projecting portion 834b of the rotating member 834 to make the decorative members 870 and 880 into the rotating member 834. It is formed for the purpose of ensuring an assembly path for fastening screws for fastening and fixing.

Further, the gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of ensuring a light passage for advancing the light passing through the transparent portion of the skeleton portion 871,881. Since the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at equal intervals on the circumference, the light traveling outward through the gap VA passes through the equidistant positions on the circumference and travels radially from the center of the circle. It is visually recognized as light.

Therefore, by executing the integral rotation operation of the decorative members 870 and 880, the light passing through the gap VA2 can be rotated in the same manner. This eliminates the need to control the lighting mode of the light from the outer light emitting unit 823b (for example, while the full lighting is continued), and the light emitted radially from the rotation center of the third operating unit 800 is emitted. It is possible to perform a light emission effect that is visually recognized in a rotating light emission mode.

In the one-association state (see FIG. 32), the entire second skeleton portion 881 is formed of a translucent resin material, so that the reflection action of the light LD1 by the second skeleton portion 881 is suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to irradiate the inside of the frame of the second lining portion 885 with light (weak light) away from the optical axis in the optical LD1, so that the method of illuminating the second lining portion 885. The degree of can be weakened. On the other hand, since the light in the optical axis direction of the optical LD1 passes through the gap VA2, the intensity of the light emitted radially from the rotation center of the third operation unit 800 can be improved.

Inside the frame of the second covering portion 885, a colored (in this embodiment, an arbitrary color is set as the color of the circular body) and light-transmitting resin material is formed, and a light diffusion process is formed inside. The light diffusion decorative portion 885c to be formed is arranged along the circumferential direction. Therefore, in the light LD1, the light incident on the light diffusion decoration portion 885c is refracted and acts to cause the entire light diffusion decoration portion 885c to emit surface light.

By this surface emission, it is possible to make the light visually recognized through the light diffusing decorative part 885c arranged in the circumferential direction uniform, and each light diffusing decorative part of the five second decorative members 880 can be achieved. The effect that the 885c is integrally visible to the player can be produced.

Here, as described above, it is possible to improve the effect performance when the player can visually recognize the second lining portion 885 if the plurality of second lining portions 885 can be firmly integrated with each other. This integration can be performed by visually recognizing the light diffusion decorative portion 885c so as to be continuously connected in the circumferential direction. Therefore, when the second lining portion 885 is arranged on the front side, it is possible to improve the effect performance in the combined state.

The member outer end portion 885b of the second lining portion 885 is formed in a concave shape facing the metal rod 832, and the end surface 885b1 that is close to (contacts) with the member outer end portion 875b of the first lining portion 875 is The metal rod 832 is projected toward the first decorative member 870 with respect to the plane on which the metal rod 832 is arranged.

As a result, when the third operation unit 800 is viewed from an oblique direction in a unified state (see FIG. 32), the first lining portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 arranged on the back side is in the player's field of view. The degree of entry can be reduced, and the influence on the production can be reduced.

As a result, when the frame portion of the first lining portion 875 and the frame portion of the second lining portion 885 are colored in different colors, the second lining portion 885 is arranged on the front side. Occasionally, it is possible to easily prevent the color of the first lining portion 875 from entering the field of view.

In particular, in the case where the third operating unit 800 is in the overhanging state independently in the one-association state (see FIG. 32), it is compared with the case where the other operating units 600 and 700 are both in the overhanging state (FIG. 32). 33, see F9), there are many gaps around the third operating unit 800, and it is easy for the line of sight to see the third operating unit 800 from an oblique direction to pass through. Therefore, without countermeasures, the side surface of the third operation unit 800 is visually recognized, and the effect of the effect is likely to be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in the one-association state, the end surface 885b1 of the second lining portion 885 is arranged closer to the rear than the center of the front-rear width of the side surface, so that the third operation is performed in an oblique direction. Even if the side surface of the unit 800 is visually recognized, most of the side surface can be visually recognized as a portion of the second lining portion 885, and the degree to which the first lining portion 875 is visually recognized can be reduced. As a result, in the one-association state, the second lining portion 885 can be made easier to see than the first lining portion 875, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

In the switching rotation operation for switching between the individual united state and the one-unit state, the driving force of the drive motor 861 is transmitted to the inner rotating member 830, so that the inner rotating member 830 rotates while the outer rotating member 840 is a torque limiter. The rotation is stopped by the load from 866.

Although the contact area is reduced by the sliding ridge portion 831b, if the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830 itself is large, the load transmitted to the outer rotating member 840 becomes large, and the torque limiter 866 There is no choice but to increase the allowable value of load transmission, and it is easy to hinder the miniaturization of the torque limiter 866.

Therefore, it is preferable that the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830 can be suppressed. Therefore, the present embodiment has the following features. For example, the support points between the fixed cylindrical member 820 related to the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 are only the front end portion in contact with the sliding member 825 and the rear end portion supported by the central annular gear 864. , The other parts are configured to leave a gap. As a result, the contact area between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 can be reduced, and the displacement resistance can be easily reduced.

For example, since the inner rotating member 830 is not fastened and fixed to the central annular gear 864, it is considered necessary to have a stopper for suppressing the displacement to the front side with respect to the central annular gear 864. The sliding member 825 functions as this stopper. That is, the sliding member 825 can receive a load in the direction of pushing forward from the inner rotating member 830, but the sliding member 825 has a front surface of the sliding member 825 that is in contact with the short-diameter annular portion 822a of the circular plate portion 822. Contact.

The short diameter annular portion 822a is arranged on the back surface side of the circular plate portion 822 as an annular protrusion having an outer diameter similar to the outer diameter of the sliding member 825, and the outermost diameter portion has a semicircular cross section on the back surface. The ridge portion 822b projecting to the side is formed in an annular shape.

Since the ridge portion 822b abuts on the front surface of the sliding member 825 in the front-rear direction, the contact area should be reduced as compared with the case where the entire back surface of the short-diameter annular portion 822a and the sliding member 825 come into contact with each other. Can be done. As a result, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 in the rotational direction can be reduced.

Since the fastening screw is not used between the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 that is expected when the weight of the fastening screw increases is reduced by that amount. Can be done.

The fixing of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 to the rotating member 834 will be described. In the explanation of this fixation, FIGS. 62 and 63 are appropriately referred to.

To fix the first decorative member 870 to the rotating member 834, a fastening screw to be inserted into the insertion hole 872 of the first skeleton portion 871 is a female screw of the fastened portion 876 formed at the rear portion of the frame of the first lining portion 875. After the first skeleton portion 875 is fastened and fixed to the first skeleton portion 871 by screwing into the first skeleton portion 871, the overhanging portion 873 protruding from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the first skeleton portion 871 is formed. This can be done by entering the recessed groove 833d (slidingly fitted) and screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 874 into the cylindrical projecting portion 834b.

To fix the second decorative member 880 to the rotating member 834, the fastening screw to be inserted into the insertion hole 882 of the second skeleton portion 881 is a female screw of the fastened portion 886 formed at the rear portion of the frame of the second lining portion 885. After the second skeleton portion 885 is fastened and fixed to the second skeleton portion 881 by screwing into the second skeleton portion 881, the overhanging portion 883 protruding from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the second skeleton portion 881 is provided. This can be done by entering the recessed groove 833d (slidingly fitted) and screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 884 into the cylindrical projecting portion 834b.

In this way, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 870 and the second decorative member are accompanied by the linear displacement or the rotational displacement of the rotating member 834. The member 880 can be configured to be linearly displaced or rotationally displaced.

In the process of fixing, the overhanging portion 873,883 enters the recessed groove 833d of the linear motion member 833, so that the skeleton portion 871,881 is arranged on the linear motion member 833 (arrangement of the metal rod 832 in the long direction). ) Is specified, and it is possible to prevent the skeleton portions 871,881 from falling off from the linear motion member 833.

Since the skeleton portion 871,881 is fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the linear motion member 833 (arrangement of the metal rod 832 in the long direction) is similarly defined, and the rotating member 834 is rotated. It is possible to prevent the member 834 from falling off from the linear motion member 833.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the assembly of the rotary member 834 to the linear motion member 833, the skeleton portion 871,881 in which the portion defining the arrangement of the rotary member 834 on the linear motion member 833 is fixed to the rotary member 834. Therefore, unlike the case where the portion defining the arrangement on the linear motion member 833 is formed on the rotating member 834 itself, the man-hours for assembling and disassembling can be reduced.

That is, for example, at the time of disassembly, if the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the skeleton portion 871,881 to the rotating member 834 is removed, the regulation of the arrangement of the skeleton portion 871,881 on the linear motion member 833 can be released. However, the regulation of the arrangement on the linear motion member 833 can be canceled for the rotary member 834 as well. This makes it possible to improve work efficiency.

The combined operation of each operation unit 600 to 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. 70 (a) to 70 (d) and 71 (a) to 71 (d) show an operation unit 500 schematically explaining an example of a combination operation of each operation unit 600 to 800 in chronological order. It is a front schematic diagram of. In the description of FIGS. 70 and 71, FIGS. 33 to 35 will be referred to as appropriate.

In FIGS. 70 and 71, the effect surfaces 661a to 661c of the first operation unit 600, the decorative surfaces 787a1,787a2, 787b1,787b2 of the second operation unit 700, and the covering portions 875,885 of the third operation unit 800 are shown. The decoration in is schematically illustrated so as to be identifiable by letters and the like.

That is, the character "normal" is written vertically on the first effect surface 661a, the character "activate" is written horizontally on the second effect surface 661b, and the character "activate" is written horizontally on the third effect surface 661c in the longitudinal direction. Along the lines, the "!" Symbols are shown.

Further, the first main decorative surface 787a1 has the characters "war start", the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 has the characters "pinch is a chance", and the second main decorative surface 787b1 has "attack". The characters "Patience !?" are illustrated on the second sub-decorative surface 787b2.

Further, different alphanumerical characters (“I” to “V”) corresponding to different characters are illustrated inside the frame of the first concealed portion 875, and the second concealed portion 885 has five integrated “◯”. The symbol is illustrated.

In FIG. 70A, the operation units 600 to 800 are arranged in the effect standby state (see FIG. 28). Above the second operation unit 700, a first sub-decorative surface 787a2 as a surface that cannot be seen from the front but is visible from the player's point of view is illustrated by an imaginary line.

Further, in FIG. 70 (b), the first operation unit 600 is in the intermediate effect state, the second operation unit 700 is in the intermediate effect state, and the third operation unit 800 is in the overhanging state.

By executing the integral rotation operation of the third operation unit 800, the first lining portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700 can be replaced one after another. Further, by setting the first operation unit 600 to the intermediate effect state during the continuous rotation operation or after the stop, the third effect surface 661c is projected inside the frame of the center frame 86, and the operation units 600 to 800 You can make the movement lively.

For example, when the third effect surface 661c is visible, by controlling the effect so that the jackpot expectation of the lottery increases, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who visually recognizes the operation of the first operation unit 600. can.

When the integral rotation operation is stopped, the decoration formed on the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the second operation unit 700 and the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700. Can be visually recognized integrally.

As a result, the attention to the first decorative member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700 can be improved, and the display effect related to the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 can be displayed by the third symbol display device. By returning the third operation unit 800 to the effect standby state while starting at 81, the line of sight of the player can be smoothly guided to the third symbol display device 81.

The first decorative member 870 to be noticed is not limited to the first decorative member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700. For example, by controlling the lighting pattern of the outer light emitting portion 823b (see FIG. 60) arranged so that the first decorative member 870 can be irradiated with light, the LED that irradiates the light LD1 to the first decorative member 870 side to be noticed. It is possible to draw attention to any first decorative member 870 by turning on the light and turning off the other LEDs.

At this time, the LED lighting pattern may be switched while the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 is stopped, or the LED lighting pattern may be switched according to the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870. ..

When switching the lighting pattern of the LED according to the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870, the light and the first decorative member 870 are rotationally displaced along the coaxial circle by sequentially switching the LEDs to be turned on in the rotation direction. You may make it visible to the player as if you were doing it. Further, the LED to be lit is fixed, and the first decoration to be irradiated with light is utilized by utilizing the fact that each first decorative member 870 reaches the position where the light is irradiated from the LED in order by the integral rotation operation. The member 870 may be switched.

In the state shown in FIG. 70A, the second decorative rotating member 660 and the decorative fixing member 670 of the first operation unit 600 both have a vertically elongated decoration and can be visually recognized integrally. In particular, the front side surface of the decorative fixing member 670 is formed as a surface facing in an oblique direction, similarly to the first effect surface 661a in the effect standby state, so that the effect of being integrally visible is enhanced.

On the other hand, when the state shown in FIG. 71 (a) is reached, the lower end portion of the second decorative rotating member 660 is displaced so as to be separated from the decorative fixing member 670 in the middle of the process shown in FIG. 70 (b), and the first operation is performed. Since the second decorative rotating member 660 of the unit 600 is a decoration formed horizontally, the sense of unity with the decorative fixing member 670 is reduced, and this time, the second operation unit 700 having a decoration similarly formed horizontally is provided. It can be visually recognized integrally with the lining member 787 of the above.

In FIG. 35, the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700 is shown, but as shown in FIG. 71 (a), if the second operation unit 700 is in the overhanging state, the lining member 787 and the second operation unit 700 are shown. 2 The vertical distance from the decorative rotating member 660 is further shortened, and the effect of being integrally visible can be enhanced.

At this time, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is overhanging to a visible position, and the right edge of the third symbol display device 81 is visually recognized as if it is enlarged to the right of the right end RE1 of the region. 2 Even if the arrangement of the production surface 661b is closer to the right edge, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a cramped impression.

Further, as a result, similarly to the second main decorative surface 787b1, the second effect surface 661b can be visually recognized by the player as if it is arranged on the center side of the third symbol display device 81, and the second main decoration surface can be visually recognized. It is possible to enhance the effect that the surface 787b1 and the second effect surface 661b are integrally visible.

In this case, the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is formed with the content related to the decoration of the second effect surface 661b and the decoration of the second main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1). It is possible to enhance the effect that the main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second effect surface 661b, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b are integrally visible.

In FIGS. 70 (c) and 70 (d), the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 are in the effect standby state, and the second operation unit 700 is in the overhanging state. The reversing operation of the second operating unit 700 is illustrated in FIG. 70 (d), but in the overhanging state of the first operating unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 is on the left and right outer sides of the covering member 787 of the second operating unit 700. Since it is not arranged in, the reversing operation of the lining member 787 (see FIG. 59) can be executed even when the first operation unit 600 is in the overhanging state.

In the reversing operation of the lining member 787, the sub-decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2, which are different on the left and right, are directed to the front side. In addition, the contents may be identifiable by the player by combining different sub-decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2.

According to FIG. 70 (d), the player can identify the content of "pinch !?", and by stopping the driving of the second operating unit 700 in this state, attention is paid to the subsequent movement of the second operating unit 700. Therefore, the line of sight of the player can be focused on the second operation unit 700.

For example, when notifying that the lottery is out of order, the state of FIG. 70 (d) is controlled to return to FIG. 70 (c), and the lottery result is not yet notified or the lottery is a big hit. In this case, the player's line of sight can be focused on the second operation unit 700 by continuing the inversion from the state of FIG. 70 (d) and performing control so as to be in the state shown in FIG. 71 (a).

In FIG. 71 (a), the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700 are in the overhanging state, and the third operation unit 800 is in the effect standby state. Above the second operation unit 700, a second sub-decorative surface 787b2 as a surface that cannot be seen from the front but is visible from the player's point of view is illustrated by an imaginary line.

In the state shown in FIG. 71 (a), the second effect surface 661b and the second main decorative surface 787b1 are arranged close to each other, and the characters described in each are both horizontally written, so that the player can see them integrally. Easy to make. In addition, since the content has a series of meanings of "attack activation", it is even easier to visually recognize it integrally.

In the first operation unit 600, in the effect standby state (see FIG. 70 (a)), the first effect surface 661a and the decorative fixing member 670 are arranged close to each other, and the characters described in each are both written vertically. Therefore, it is easy for the player to see it integrally. In addition, the content has a series of meanings of "normal time", so that it is easier to visually recognize the content as a whole.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect surfaces 661a and 661b of the first operation unit 600 are integrated with the side surfaces of different members (for example, the second main decorative surface 787b1 or the front surface of the decorative fixing member 670). It is composed. As a result, the effect of production can be improved.

In FIGS. 71 (b) to 71 (d), the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700 are in the effect standby state, and the third operation unit 800 is in the overhanging state. The arrangement of the first decorative member 870 is different from the state shown in FIG. 71 (b) and the state shown in FIG. 71 (c) because the third operation unit 800 executes the integral rotation operation. On the other hand, regardless of which state the switching rotation operation is executed, the player can visually recognize the same united state (see FIG. 71 (d)).

That is, when the second decorative member 880 faces the front side, the player cannot recognize the difference in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870. As a result, as the operation control of the third operation unit 800, it is set to notify the success or failure of the jackpot by executing the switching rotation operation at the end of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the symbol change. In such a case, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting whether or not the jackpot is successful or not from the arrangement of the first decorative member 870.

In other words, regardless of the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 at the end of the display effect (whether in the state shown in FIG. 71 (b) or in the state shown in FIG. 71 (c)), the game of winning or losing the jackpot. The expectation of the person can be maintained in the same way. Therefore, the player's attention to the third operation unit 800 can be maintained in a high state.

As described above, each of the operation units 600 to 800 can form a case where the decoration is visually recognized independently and a case where the decoration is visually recognized integrally as a combination. Therefore, the decoration formed in each operation unit 600 to 800 is not completed only by each operation unit 600 to 800, but is designed as a decoration related to each other in each operation unit 600 to 800.

The drive control of each operation unit 600 to 800 is influenced by the arrangement of each other depending on whether or not it can be executed. That is, if the drive of each operation unit 600 to 800 is executed at an inappropriate timing, the member operations may collide and fail. Therefore, the drive control is performed after determining the arrangement of the members of the other units. Is controlled.

For example, the change of the first operation unit 600 to the overhanging state may be controlled so that the state of the second operation unit 700 may be arbitrary and the third operation unit 800 is executed when it is determined to be in the effect standby state. NS.

As for the change of the first operation unit 600 to the intermediate effect state, the state of the second operation unit 700 may be arbitrary, the vertical arrangement of the third operation unit 800 may be arbitrary, and the rotation operation is not a switching rotation operation. It is controlled to be executed when it is determined.

The change to the overhanging state of the second operating unit 700 may be arbitrary in the state of the first operating unit 600, and the third operating unit 800 is controlled to be executed when it is determined to be in the effect standby state.

As for the change of the second operation unit 700 to the intermediate effect state, the state of the first operation unit 600 may be arbitrary, the vertical arrangement of the third operation unit 800 may be arbitrary, and the rotation operation is not a switching rotation operation. It is controlled to be executed when it is determined.

In the control in which the third operation unit 800 changes to the overhanging state and the rotation is not executed or only the integrated rotation operation occurs, the first operation unit 600 is determined to be in the intermediate effect state or the effect standby state, and the second operation unit 700 determines. It is executed when it is determined to be in the intermediate effect state or the effect standby state.

The control in which the third operation unit 800 changes to the overhanging state and the switching rotation operation occurs is executed when the first operation unit 600 is determined to be in the effect standby state and the second operation unit 700 is determined to be in the effect standby state. Will be done.

As described above, the drive control of each operation unit 600 to 800 is not possible at an arbitrary timing, and is controlled so as to be executed after determining the arrangement of the members of the other units.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the sphere once flows down to the front side by the distribution device 300 and then flows back to the rear side has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to secure the time required for the ball to flow down by forming a deceleration convex portion for decelerating the ball and bending the path a plurality of times without forming a portion flowing down to the front side.

In the first embodiment, the case where the lower bottom surface of the front design member 141 of the second winning opening 140 has a curved surface shape has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the flow of the ball is blocked by contact. Any shape that can be used is sufficient. For example, it may be configured in an inclined plane shape, or it may be formed so that a large number of fine protrusions are projected from the plane so that an irregular load can be applied to the colliding sphere.

In the first embodiment, when the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a flows down the distribution device 300, the case where the ball flows down the flow path constituents 334 to 336 in order has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, an opening penetrating downward may be formed in the left-right center portion of the specific winning opening 65a, and a ball may be formed so as to be able to directly flow into the third flow path constituent portion 336 through this opening.

For example, when the balls enter one by one, the balls do not pass through the opening, but when a plurality of balls collectively enter the specific winning opening 65a, the balls can pass through the opening. Is also good. In this case, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be changed depending on whether the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a passes through the opening or not.

In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 are arranged behind the specific winning opening 65a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may be arranged directly below the downstream end of the second flow path constituent unit 335. Further, in this case, the order of the first flow path constituent unit 334 and the second flow path constituent unit 335 may be reversed. That is, when entering the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, a branch may occur immediately after the flow in the left-right direction to the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, or immediately after the flow in the front-back direction (flow toward the front side). There may be a branch to each of the detection sensors SE11 and SE12.

In the first embodiment, the flow path direction and inclination of each flow path constituent unit 334 to 336 have been described as a feature of the distribution device 300 alone, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed on an island, the direction and inclination of the flow path may be designed in consideration of the daily “nekase”.

Nekase means that the pachinko machine 10 is not installed in a vertical position, but is installed in a state of being tilted in the front-rear direction. Normally, the pachinko machine is installed in a posture of tilting backward about once (quarters and five squares). Considering the installation angle of about 1 degree as compared with the above description of the distribution device 300 alone (in a state without skein), the first flow path component portion 334 and the second flow path having an inclination in the front-rear direction The meaning of the inclination of the component 336 changes.

That is, in the distribution device 300 alone, as described above, the first flow path component 334 is tilted downward by 7 degrees from the horizontal to the front side, and the third flow path component 336 is lowered by 5 degrees from the horizontal to the rear side. Although it is designed to be inclined, when the installation angle is also examined, both the first flow path constituent unit 334 and the third flow path constituent unit 336 also form a flow path that is inclined downward by 6 degrees. .. On the other hand, since the second flow path constituent portion 335 is inclined in the left-right direction, it is not easily affected by the installation angle, and can be regarded as having an inclination of about 5 degrees as described above.

In this case, with respect to the flow of the sphere in the distribution device 300, the acceleration of the sphere in the first flow path constituent unit 334 and the third flow path constituent unit 336 is the same, and the acceleration in the second flow path constituent unit 335 is slightly higher. It gets smaller. Therefore, since the flow speed of the ball in the left-right direction can be reduced, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the ball flowing down in the second flow path constituent portion 335. Further, since the first flow path component 334 is still shorter than the third flow path component 336, the first flow path component 334 is shorter than the third flow path component 336. Can be passed between.

As described above, the flow of the sphere inside the sorting device 300 is affected by the slingshot of the pachinko machine 10 because it has a flow path in the front-rear direction. Therefore, if the inclination angle of each flow path constituent part 334, 336 is made smaller than the skein angle (about 1 degree), the flow direction of the sphere in the flow path constituent parts 334, 336 changes depending on the quality of the skein (angle setting). It is necessary to set the tilt angle to be larger than the angle of the skein because it will be (reversed).

Further, in the configuration in which the flow of the sphere inside the distribution device 300 has a flow path in the front-rear direction and the flow path is visible, the flow velocity of the sphere flowing down the flow path is slightly different. There is a possibility that the degree of sneaking of the pachinko machine 10 can be grasped. If you dare to grasp the degree of sneaking, you can make the flow path of the sorting device 300 easy to see.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the fixed member 161 and the front design member around the front side of each flow path constituent portion 334 to 336 so that the degree of "sneaking" cannot be grasped from a slight difference in the flow speed of the sphere. The 162 is arranged so as to surround it, the variable winning device 65 is arranged so as to cover the upper side, and the light diffusion processed surface 340 is configured to deteriorate the visibility on the lower side.

In this way, the visibility of the ball flowing down each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336 is deteriorated except for the normal player's line of sight (range of about 0 degrees to about 30 degrees in front view). As a result, it is possible to avoid grasping the degree of "sneaking" of the pachinko machine 10 by comparing the flow velocities of the spheres flowing down each of the flow path constituents 334 to 336.

In the first embodiment, the case where the inclination of the first flow path constituent unit 334 is larger than the inclination of the third flow path constituent unit 336 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the relationship of this inclination may be reversed, or the same inclination may be configured.

Further, each of the flow path constituent portions 334 to 336 has been described as having a linear flow path bent to form a spiral flow path, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be a meandering flow path shape or a flow path shape that bends in a staircase shape.

Further, the flow path is configured to be bent at a right angle at the connection points of the flow path constituent portions 334 to 336, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the flow path may be bent at an acute angle or at an obtuse angle at the connection point. Further, a crune may be adopted as each flow path constituent unit 334 to 336.

In the first embodiment, the case where the time required for the sphere to pass through the third flow path constituent portion 336 is designed to be 0.3 seconds has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be designed so that the time required to pass through the third flow path constituent unit 336 is 1 second (0.6 seconds or more). As a result, even if the ball enters the distribution device 300 while maintaining the firing interval (0.6 seconds), the ball on the upstream side flowing down the third flow path component 336 can be moved to the downstream side thereof. Can function as a blindfold for a sphere flowing down the third flow path component 336.

In the first embodiment, the case where the flow time of the sphere is secured by securing the path length of the flow path constituent portions 334 to 336 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a long protrusion is provided from both inner walls of the path to the slide displacement member 370 in a direction intersecting the flow direction of the game ball, and the protrusions are provided so as to project alternately, and the protrusions collide with the game ball. It may be configured to decelerate the ball. As a result, it is possible to secure the flow time of the ball without increasing the path length.

The ridges for deceleration may be evenly arranged in the entire range of the path to the slide displacement member 370, or may be unevenly arranged. For example, the first flow path component 334 and the second flow path component 335 do not form a ridge, and the ridge is formed only in the third flow path component 336, whereby the third flow path component 336 is formed. The sphere can be configured to slowly flow down the third flow path component 336 while the sphere can reach the sphere quickly.

Further, the projecting direction of the ridges may be a direction in which the protrusions are alternately projected from the left-right direction to the inside of the path along the flow path of the sphere, or are projected upward from the lower side at a predetermined interval. It may be in the same direction.

In the case of projecting from the left-right direction, since the load applied to the sphere from the ridge has a component in the left-right direction, it is preferable to consider the arrangement so that the sphere is not erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by this load. For example, at the position closest to the slide displacement member 370, the load from the ridge is directed toward the partition plate portion 338 side instead of the normal detection sensor SE12 side by projecting from the left and right outer wall portions to the left and right inside. By doing so, it is possible to easily prevent the sphere from being accidentally guided to the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of projecting from the lower side to the upper side, the protrusion itself may function as a blindfold for the slide displacement member 370, so it is preferable to design the formation height and formation position in consideration of the player's line of sight. ..

The ridge may be formed so as to be movable. In this case, the flow of the ball may be stopped in the out state, and the flow of the ball may be restarted in the case of the sinking state.

In the first embodiment, the case where the blindfold is made by the ball flowing down on the front side of the slide displacement member 370 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a movable decorative member may be arranged in front of the sorting device 300, and the decorative member may blindfold the flow path constituent portions 334 to 336. This decorative member may be driven or may be operated by the weight of a sphere.

Further, when the ball is blindfolded, it is not limited to the case where the ball is arranged on the front side. For example, when a mirror is arranged on the back side of the slide displacement member 370 and the state of the slide displacement member 370 is visually recognized by utilizing the reflection of the mirror, a sphere is arranged between the slide displacement member 370 and the mirror. If it is done, the blindfold function can be generated.

In the first embodiment, the case where the sphere reaching the slide displacement member 370 is blindfolded has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first winning opening 64 may be arranged behind the game area such as the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, and the first winning opening 64 may be blindfolded, or the other general winning opening 63 may be blindfolded. It may be a thing.

In the first embodiment, the case where the flow path constituents 334 to 336 are formed from a flow path that is linear and can guide the spheres one by one has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a meandering flow path, it may be formed as a flow path in which a plurality of branches occur, or a ball may easily stay in a place where the flow path width is large or small and the flow path width is large. It may be configured.

In the first embodiment, the case where the effect of the blindfold is generated by the ball toward the slide displacement member 370 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a discharge path for discharging a ball that has entered another winning opening 63, 64, 65, 140 is arranged on the front side of the slide displacement member 370 (for example, arranged so as to intersect on the front side). The slide displacement member 370 may be blindfolded by the discharge path and the balls arranged in the discharge path.

In the first embodiment, the case where the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a flows exclusively through the first flow path constituent portion 334 to the second flow path constituent portion 335 side (front side) has been described. It is not always limited to this. For example, a seesaw-shaped distribution mechanism for distributing balls is arranged on the downstream side of the specific winning opening 65a, and the distribution mechanism selects the balls flowing to the second flow path component 335 side, thereby partially sorting the balls. The sphere may be allowed to flow toward the second flow path component 335 side.

The distribution mechanism may be displaced by the weight of the sphere, may be driven by a drive device to operate constantly from the opening and closing of the opening / closing plate 65b, or may be driven in a constant pattern from the power-on of the pachinko machine. It may be controlled as follows.

In the case of drive control, for example, when the type of incoming ball changes, the ball may be controlled to flow toward the second flow path constituent portion 335 side. For example, in the case of entering a ball into the specific winning opening 65a, if there is a winning ball (excess winning) exceeding the count number (10 pieces / round), the ball is configured to flow to the second flow path component 335 side. May be. In this case, the number of balls flowing down on the second flow path component 335 side can be compared with the number of excess prize balls paid out, and the player can grasp the additional profit obtained at an early stage. In this case, the structure of the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream may be maintained or may be omitted.

Further, for example, in a configuration in which a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 flows down the distribution device 300, if there is a ball entering when the number of reserved special symbols 1 is 4 (full tank), The sphere may be configured to flow toward the second flow path component 335 side. In this case, by visually recognizing the sphere flowing on the side of the second flow path constituent portion 335, the player can be made aware that the number of reserved special symbols 1 is full. In this case, the structure of the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream may be maintained or may be omitted.

When the displacement operation is performed by the weight of the sphere, the predetermined operation may be repeated every time the sphere arrives, or the operation may be configured to be different depending on the number of spheres to be reached. For example, when one ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, it does not flow to the second flow path component 335 side, and when two or more balls are collectively entered into the specific winning opening 65a, the ball does not flow to the second flow path component 335 side. The sphere may flow toward the second flow path component 335 side. The reverse is also possible.

Further, these operation modes may be the same downstream of the detection sensor SE1 arranged in pairs on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a, or may be configured to be different on the left and right.

Here, when the flow time of the ball from the specific winning opening 65a to the slide displacement member 370 is long, the game may be delayed due to the long ball ejection time. Therefore, for example, by using the above-mentioned distribution mechanism, some balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a are allowed to flow down to the second flow path component 335 side, and the subsequent balls are the second. It may be configured so that it is discharged without passing through the flow path constituent portion 335. As a result, it is not necessary to wait for the sphere of the count number to flow down the flow path constituents 334 to 336, so that the length between rounds can be set short.

In the first embodiment, the case where the distribution device 300 is arranged under the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is flown toward the front side near the lower end of the game area has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not it. For example, the specific winning opening 65a is arranged above the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81, and the flow path constituents 334 to 336 of the distribution device 300 are arranged close to the third symbol display device 81 or viewed from the front. It may be configured to be arranged on the front side of the display area.

In this case, the line of sight for visually recognizing the sphere flowing down the sorting device 300 can be set to the line of sight facing the display area side of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, by associating the magnitude of the profit obtained by the player by the flow of the ball in the distribution device 300 with the content of the notification on the liquid crystal display, the player can confirm the display and obtain the profit of either magnitude. It is easy to know if it was acquired.

Further, the case where the sphere rolling on the inner rail 61 is visually recognized at a position shifted downward in the front view with respect to the sphere rolling on the third flow path component 336 has been described, but it is not always the case. Not limited. For example, the sphere that rolls on the inner rail 61 is configured in an arrangement relationship so that the sphere that rolls on the third flow path component 336 does not shift vertically in front view and can be visually recognized as overlapping. Is also good. In this case, not only the sphere that has entered the distribution device 300 but also the sphere that rolls on the inner rail 61 can function as a blindfold for the sphere that flows down the third flow path constituent portion 336.

In the first embodiment, as the operation pattern Y of the slide displacement member 370, a case where the slide displacement member 370 is switched to the front position at a time when the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a cannot reach is described, but this is not always the case. It is not limited to. For example, the slide displacement member 370 may be controlled to be switched to the front position after 1.2 seconds have elapsed from the opening timing of the opening / closing plate 65b.

In this case, the forward flow ball that has reached the slide displacement member 370 before 1.2 seconds have elapsed can be entered into the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, the trailing ball that flows so as to follow the front flow ball and reaches the slide displacement member 370 after 1.2 seconds has passed will normally enter the through hole of the detection sensor SE12.

Here, when the trailing ball has a positional relationship that functions as a blindfold for the front-flowing ball, the player sets the timing at which the flow of the front-flowing ball switches (downward) toward the probability change detection sensor SE11 to the trailing ball. Being hidden, it cannot be seen. Moreover, since the trailing ball normally enters the detection sensor SE12, it is considered that the player thinks that the ball has not entered the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

In this way, it is possible to make it appear as if the ball has not entered the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, so that the display effect of the time saving state and the probability change state is similarly maintained to maintain the expectation of the player. It is possible to improve the effect of the display effect on various gaming machines.

In the first embodiment, the case where the sphere colliding with the left and right inner protrusions 318 does not normally flow to the detection sensor SE12 side only by the load due to the collision has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a flow path on the upstream side of the left and right inner protrusions 318 is configured so that the velocity and rotation of the sphere until being guided by the left and right inner protrusions 318 can be configured by a plurality of types (for example, a croon). (Increase the degree of freedom in the flow direction of the ball by arranging it or widening the path width), depending on the speed and rotation of the ball, only the load due to the collision with the left and right inner protrusions 318 It may be configured so that it can be guided by the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the first embodiment, the case where the slide displacement member 370 and each of the projecting portions 317 to 319 are formed as separate bodies has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least one of each of the projecting portions 317 to 319 may be integrally formed with the slide displacement member 370. That is, at least one of the protruding portions 317 to 319 may be projected from the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370.

In the first embodiment, the operation pattern Y in consideration of the possibility of being hidden by a sphere has been described as the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370, but the operation pattern Y is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a control for causing the LED of the light emitting means 351 to emit light at a timing hidden by a sphere may be interwoven.

In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement resistance of the axis O1 is changed depending on the shape of the guide slot 616 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the displacement resistance may be changed by changing the width and length of the guide slot 616 to form the outer phase of the gap, or the displacement resistance may be changed by using the magnetic force or the urging force of the coil spring.

In the first embodiment, the shape of the guide elongated hole 616 is configured to be bent at an intermediate position, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape may be bent a plurality of times. In this case, it is possible to form a plurality of positions where the resistance of the vertical displacement of the axis O1 increases.

Further, the shape of the guide elongated hole 616 may be designed for the purpose of changing the magnitude of the change amount of the angle θ during the rotation of the rotating member 620. For example, the guide elongated hole 616 may be formed in a shape capable of guiding the supported member 640 so that a range in which the size of the angle θ can be maintained during the rotation of the rotating member 620 can be partially formed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the guide elongated hole 616 is fixed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of guide elongated holes 616 on which the axis O1 can move are formed, and the axis O1 is moved by a predetermined switching means (for example, another driving device or a button-type switching device that can be switched by abutting on a rotating member 620). The guided elongated hole 616 may be configured to be switchable, or the guided elongated hole 616 may be configured to be shape-changeable.

In the first embodiment, the configuration in which the first effect surface 661a is directed to the front diagonally left side in a state where the second decorative rotating member 660 is arranged on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the effect surface may be configured to face the front diagonally right side while being arranged on the left side of the third symbol display device 81, or may be arranged on the lower side (upper side) of the third symbol display device 81. The production surface may be configured to face the front diagonally upper side (lower side).

In the first embodiment, the rotating member 620 is configured to be arranged on the proximal end side of the displacement, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the member that is linearly displaced may be arranged on the proximal end side of the displacement. good. On the other hand, the use of the rotating member 620 instead of the linearly moving member preferably functions to secure the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

For example, when the laterally sliding member is fixed to the driven side of the supported member 640, the angle that affects the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b is an angle above the horizontal (angle a1 or the like). Limited to. On the other hand, when the rotating member 620 is used, not only the angle above the horizontal but also the angle below the horizontal (angle b1 and the like) can be used. Regardless of this preferred effect, a member that slides linearly may be connected to the driven side of the supported member 640.

In the first embodiment, the case where the second decorative rotating member 660 is formed of a rectangular parallelepiped and the three side surfaces intersecting at right angles are decorated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second decorative rotating member 660 may be formed with a pentagonal cross section, and may be configured so that stop control is possible with each side surface facing the front side.

In the first embodiment, the decorative fixing member 670 is a fixed decorative member, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be arranged. In this case, it is possible to easily switch the display that can be easily integrated with the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation axis of the rotating member 620 and the second decorative rotating member 660 can intersect at a right angle has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 may be configured with a component in the front-rear direction as an axis (as an oblique rotation axis).

In the first embodiment, the case where the second operation unit 700 is configured to be easily maintained in the intermediate effect state from the setting of the urging force of the coil spring CS2 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet is arranged near the elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and the magnet is configured to generate an attractive force with the magnet arranged on the right front plate member 710, and this attractive force is generated. May be more likely to occur in the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700.

Further, for example, instead of forming the inclined portions 751 and 762 linearly, they may be formed from a curved shape such as a wave shape or a sawtooth shape. Further, also when the coil spring CS2 is used, the urging force is not limited to the one in which the urging force is generated only when the coil spring CS2 is compressed, and the urging force may be generated in response to the extensional displacement of the coil spring CS2.

In the first embodiment, the case where the posture of the shaft rotating member 785 is maintained by elastically deforming the tooth portion 783c and the tooth member 785c until the attractive force of the magnet Mg is exceeded has been described, but this is not always the case. It is not limited to. For example, instead of elastic deformation of the gear, a permissible value may be provided for the sliding friction between the rotating shaft rod and the support cylinder that supports the shaft rod.

In the first embodiment, the case where the lining member 787 rises from the bottom and enters the front side from the rear end portion of the game area has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be a mode in which it overhangs to the front side by a downward displacement. In this case, the upper edge of the center frame 86 may be crossed from the bottom to the front, or may be projected from above the gaming area (for example, above the front frame 14) to the front side.

In the first embodiment, the case where the sub-decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 are not visually recognized due to the rotation of the lining member 787 in the opposite direction has been described, but the discriminating power is reduced, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not it. For example, instead of rotating the sub-decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 while facing the front side, the mode may rotate while facing the left and right outside. Further, even if the rotation is in the same direction, the rotation may be configured to be rotated by shifting the rotation angle.

In the first embodiment, the shaft rotation member 785 and the rotation member are commonly used in the second operation unit 700 and the third operation unit 800 by utilizing the rotation angle of the link mechanism (intermediate arm member 783, intermediate arm member 850). It is configured to rotate (reverse) the 834, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a configuration in which a groove is dug in a metal rod 832 that guides the rotating member 834 in a single stroke, and a projecting piece projecting from the rotating member 834 is inserted into the groove, the rotating member depends on the design of the groove. The rotation timing of 834 can be specified.

In the first embodiment, a case will be described in which control is performed so that it is determined that the switching rotation operation is switched to the integrated rotation operation by switching the output of the detection sensor 813 from the state where the detected unit 844 is arranged on the detection sensor 813. However, it is not always limited to this. For example, after reversing the drive direction of the drive motor 861 in a state where the detected unit 844 is not arranged on the detection sensor 813, by detecting that the detected unit 844 has entered the detection sensor 813, the switching rotation operation is performed. It may be determined that the operation has been switched to the integrated rotation operation.

In the first embodiment, the case where the configuration of the first decorative member 870 and the configuration of the second decorative member 880 are configured to be different in some places has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the magnet Mg2 may be arranged on both decorative members 870 and 880, or both decorative members 870 and 880 may be plated.

In the first embodiment, the case where the switching rotation operation and the integrated rotation operation are clearly separated by disposing the torque limiter 866 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an oil damper that causes viscous resistance may be provided. In the case of the oil damper, resistance always continues to be generated regardless of the switching of the operation mode, so that the torque limiter can reduce the displacement resistance in the rotation direction after the operation mode is switched to the integrated rotation operation. It is possible to realize high-speed rotation after switching to integrated rotation operation.

In the first embodiment, the case where the light LD1 is reflected to the front side by the plating portion 871a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the metal rod 832 may reflect the light. During the integral rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is arranged on the base end side (inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832, so that the metal rod 832 is hidden by the linear motion member 833. When the 833 is arranged on the tip end side (outer diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832, the optical LD1 can be reflected by exposing the base end side (inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832. Is.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of spheres are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Point where the sphere passing through the route constructing means becomes a blindfold for the means to be passed>
The route-constructing means is provided with a route-constructing means configured to allow the game ball to flow down and a passage-passed means configured to allow the game ball flowing down the route-constructing means to pass through. It is characterized in that it is provided with a displaceable means that can be arranged at a position that overlaps with at least a part of the first game ball on the front side of the first game ball that flows down the path forming means on the upstream side of the means to be passed. Game machine A1 to play.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game in which a large prize-winning component 300 capable of configuring a plurality of types of flow paths of a game ball toward the ball detection hole 431 is provided, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is difficult to be recognized by the decorative plate 302. There is a machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since it is difficult to always recognize the ball detection hole 431 by the decorative plate 302, it is confirmed that the ball has entered the ball detection hole 431 and the launching of the game ball is continued or stopped. There was a possibility that the player would be dissatisfied because he could not cope with the game mode of performing. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the part related to the launch operation of the game ball.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the means for reducing the visibility of the first gaming ball in the path forming means is a predetermined displaceable means, it is possible to configure a state in which the first gaming ball is easy to see. Will be done. Therefore, in a state where the first game ball is easily visible, it is easy to confirm the flow of the first game ball and determine whether to continue or stop the launch operation of the game ball. Can be improved in relevant areas.

The mode of the predetermined displaceable means is not limited at all. For example, another game ball may be used, or a decorative member configured to be displaceable between the flow path of the game ball and the glass unit may be used.

The mode of the means to be passed is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, an entry port (for example, a start opening) related to a lottery of symbols, a prize ball opening related to payout of prize balls, and others through which a game ball can pass. It may be the means of.

In the gaming machine A1, the displaceable means is a second gaming ball flowing down the upstream side of the first gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the visibility of the first gaming ball can be changed by using the gaming ball guided toward the passing means, so that the displaceable means can be used. As compared with the case of preparing other decorative members, the material cost and the design cost can be reduced.

In the game machine A2, the path forming means includes a game machine A3 having a front-back direction path formed with a front-back width length on which a second game ball can be arranged on the front side of the first game ball. ..

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, a front-back path is configured so that the second gaming ball can be arranged on the front side of the first gaming ball, so that the second gaming ball can be viewed from the front. At least a part of the first game ball can be hidden by the game ball of.

In the gaming machine A3, the front-back direction path is the second path when the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball flow down the path forming means at a firing interval set in the launching device. A gaming machine A4, characterized in that the gaming ball is configured to hide at least a part of the first gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, it is difficult for the second gaming ball to recognize the first gaming ball when a plurality of gaming balls flow down the path forming means at the firing interval. Can produce the effect of This makes it possible to create a situation that is difficult to recognize from normal times.

In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the front-rear direction path is characterized in that the front side component is arranged on the center side of the game area with respect to the back side component.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3 or A4, the front-back path can be configured as a path having an inclination along the line of sight of the player looking at the means to be passed, so that the first gaming ball can be configured. Can easily occur in a state of being hidden by the second game ball. That is, the effect of the blindfold can be improved.

In the gaming machine A5, the front side component is arranged in the line of sight of the player looking at the means to be passed.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A5, the same blindfolding effect is produced regardless of the length of the distance between the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball arranged in the front-rear path. be able to.

That is, normally, it is considered that the closer the first game ball and the second game ball are, the more the blindfold effect can be improved, but the first game ball and the second game ball are on the line of sight. When the game balls of are arranged, the influence of the length of the interval can be eliminated.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the path forming means includes a front-rear path formed by a front-rear width length in which a second game ball can be arranged on the front side of the first game ball, and a front-rear direction thereof. The gaming machine A7 is characterized by comprising a left-right direction path formed with a left-right width in which a game ball can flow down in the left-right direction on the upstream side of the path.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the player's line of sight can be blocked by the gaming ball flowing down the left-right direction path, so that the player can be used as a passing means. On the other hand, the blindfold effect can be produced not only when the passing means is visually recognized with a line of sight that does not shift to the left or right, but also to a line of sight that shifts to the left or right and looks into it. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the mode of entering the ball through the passing means without depending on the direction of the player's line of sight (a blindfold effect can be produced in all directions).

This action is remarkable by sealing the left and right sides of the flow path extending in the front-rear direction with a wall portion. That is, in the configuration in which one side of the left and right sides is sealed by the wall portion, the wall portion is blindfolded on one side of the left and right sides, so that it is easy to configure a state in which the view to the means to be passed is not passed.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the path-constructing means includes a first flow path through which the gaming ball passes through the means to be passed in the first aspect, and a second flow path through which the gaming ball passes in the second aspect. The first gaming ball can be visually recognized by being covered with at least a part of the predetermined displaceable means regardless of which of the flow paths of the path-constructing means. A gaming machine A8, characterized in that it is configured in such a manner.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, it may be difficult to recognize the flowing mode of the gaming ball flowing down the route forming means regardless of whether or not the passing means has passed. , It is possible to improve the attention to the game ball flowing down the route forming means.

The first aspect and the second aspect are not limited in any way. For example, the flow direction of the sphere may be different, or the detection sensor through which the sphere passes may be different.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, a branching means for dividing the flow direction of the game ball is provided on the upstream side of the passing means, and the branching means includes a switching means for switching the flow direction of the accepted game ball. The route-constructing means is a gaming ball whose flow-down route is divided by a branching means, and the gaming machine A9 is characterized in that the gaming ball that has reached the switching means is configured to flow down the same route in a predetermined section.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the gaming ball that has reached the switching means flows down the same path in a predetermined section, so that the gaming ball that has reached the switching means immediately after that. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the flow of the game ball as compared with the case where the flow mode corresponds to the flow path of the game ball. This makes it possible to improve the player's attention to the game ball.

In the gaming machine A9, the path forming means includes a projecting portion projecting on the side of the flowing game ball, and the projecting portion acts on the branching of the gaming ball in the branching means. Machine A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, it can act on the branching of the gaming ball at the projecting portion, so that the structure is compared with the case where the branching is caused by the movement of the valve body, for example. Durability can be improved.

In the gaming machine A10, the protrusion portion includes a first protrusion portion extending in a predetermined direction and a second protrusion portion extending in a direction different from the first protrusion portion, and the first protrusion portion. The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the protrusion amount of the second protrusion is different from that of the second protrusion.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A10, the influence of the first projecting portion on the gaming ball and the effect of the second projecting portion on the gaming ball are determined according to the flow mode of the gaming ball. Can be different. As a result, it is possible to generate an action of branching the game ball according to a predetermined rule according to the flow mode of the game ball while using the fixed first protrusion portion and the second protrusion portion.

<Points where the sphere passing through the route constructing means appeals to the means to be passed>
The route-constructing means is provided with a route-constructing means configured to allow the game ball to flow down and a passage-passing means configured to allow the game ball flowing down the route-constructing means to pass through. A gaming machine B1 comprising a predetermined portion constituting an upstream side, the predetermined portion being arranged on a side that stands out from the means to be passed, and being configured to be able to guide a game ball to the means to be passed.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a large prize-winning component 300 capable of configuring a plurality of types of flow paths of a game ball toward the ball detection hole 431 is provided, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is configured to be difficult to recognize by the decorative plate 302. Depending on the state of the winning component 300, there is a gaming machine in which the gaming ball flows down at a position off the decorative plate 302, or the gaming ball flows down so as to be hidden behind the decorative plate 302 (for example, special feature). Kai 2017-185021). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the game ball having good visibility that flows off the decorative plate 302 is rather configured to deviate from the ball detection hole 431 and flows down, so that it is hidden behind the decorative plate 302. Since a part of the flowing game ball is guided to the ball detection hole 431, the visibility of the game ball does not correspond to the amount of profit that the player can obtain, so attention was paid to the game ball. There was a possibility that the player would be dissatisfied because things tend to be wasted. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in that the flow mode of the game ball after attracting attention is made meaningful.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the gaming ball that has flowed down the predetermined portion arranged on the conspicuous side can be guided to the passing means, the degree of improvement in the attention to the gaming ball and the degree of improvement in the attention to the gaming ball. It can be associated with the passing of the game ball through the means to be passed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the possibility that the game ball that has flowed down the predetermined portion passes through the means to be passed, and thus it is possible to improve in that it is meaningful to pay attention to the game ball after it has attracted attention.

Further, by configuring in this way, it is possible to easily guide the line of sight of the player with the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion, and it is less likely that the player misses the game ball heading to the means to be passed. be able to.

The mode of the means to be passed is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, an entry port (for example, a start opening) related to a lottery of symbols, a prize ball opening related to payout of prize balls, and others through which a game ball can pass. It may be the means of.

In addition, the aspect of the conspicuous side is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the display device side that is easy for the player to catch the eye, the winning opening side or the starting opening side, the front side (front side) that is easy for the player to see, or the specific entry opening. It is directly linked to the stage (mainly the place where the game ball is temporarily retained at the lower edge of the frame formed by the center frame) side as the part where the line of sight easily gathers as the place where the probability of entering the ball is remarkably high, and the big hit acquisition. The V winning opening side, the ball lending device side as an operation target, the production operation button side, the range where the game ball deviating from the entry opening flows down (the range where the player regrets and chases with his eyes) , The bright side or the other side may be used for switching between light and dark by the light emitting means. Further, the inconspicuous side may be intentionally formed so as to be relatively conspicuous.

In the gaming machine B1, the path-constructing means includes a second predetermined portion that makes the game ball that has entered the route-constructing means less noticeable than at the time of entering the ball, and the predetermined portion is more than the second predetermined portion. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that it is placed on a prominent side.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the gaming ball that has entered the path-constructing means flows down the predetermined portion by lowering the attention in the second predetermined portion before flowing down the predetermined portion. It is possible to emphasize the attention of the game ball when playing.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the predetermined portion includes a section in which the flow speed of the gaming ball is different, that is, the gaming machine B3.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the effect of gathering the line of sight of the player can be improved as compared with the case where there is no difference in the flow speed of the gaming ball.

The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the second flow-down speed of the game ball flowing down the second predetermined portion is higher than the first flow-down speed of the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion. Game machine B4 to play.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, it is possible to shorten the period until the gaming ball that has entered the route forming means reaches a predetermined portion.

A gaming machine B5, wherein in any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the predetermined portion includes a section in which the displacement speeds of the gaming balls in a predetermined directional view are different.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, a section in which the apparent displacement speed of the gaming ball in a predetermined direction is different regardless of the magnitude of the actual flow speed of the gaming ball. Since it can be configured, by reducing the displacement speed of the game ball in a predetermined direction at an arbitrary predetermined position, the player's line of sight can be easily gathered at the predetermined position and the eyes can be distracted from other parts. ..

It should be noted that the mode in which the apparent displacement speeds of the game balls are different is not limited at all. For example, there may be a difference between the case of displacing on a straight line arranged in a plane orthogonal to the front-back direction in the front view and the case of displacing on a straight line having a front-back direction component, and the case of displacing on a straight line. It may be different from the case of displacement in a curved or serpentine shape, or it may be different in other cases.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, an introduction means configured to be able to introduce a game ball into the path constituting means is provided, and the predetermined portion is arranged outside the introducing means in a predetermined direction view. Characterized gaming machine B6.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the visibility of the introduction means can be ensured. Therefore, it is possible to both ensure the visibility of the introducing means and improve the attention of the game ball that is likely to pass through the passing means.

One of the gaming machines B1 to B6 is characterized by comprising an avoidance means configured such that the gaming ball on the front side of the path forming means flows down so as to avoid the line of sight toward the passing means or the predetermined portion. The gaming machine B7.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the gaming ball is configured to be able to flow down on the front side of the path forming means, and the flowing path of the gaming ball is the line of sight toward the passing means. Since the avoidance means for avoiding the above is provided, it is possible to secure the size of the game area and the visibility of the game ball toward the passing means at the same time.

The flow mode of the game ball affected by the avoidance means is not limited at all. For example, it may flow down while avoiding the front position of the means to be passed, or it may flow down while avoiding the straight line connecting the means to be passed and the position of the player's eyes, or a game ball heading toward the means to be passed. Based on the last position that can be confirmed by the player, it may flow down while avoiding the front position of that position, or it may flow down while avoiding the straight line connecting the above-mentioned last position and the position of the player's eyes. Good or anything else.

In the gaming machine B7, the path constituting means includes a receiving state changing means configured to be able to change the state between an accepting state that can accept the flowing game ball and a non-accepting state that cannot be accepted, and the receiving state changing means is The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that, in the state change from the accepted state to the non-accepted state, the gaming ball that has reached the accepted state changing means in the accepted state can be guided to the route forming means side. ..

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B7, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball that has flowed down so as to be bridged after reaching the receiving state changing means from blocking the line of sight toward the passing means. Can be done.

The gaming machine B7 or B8 is provided with a partitioning means that is arranged above the passaged means in a front view and partitions the gaming area, and the partitioning means is configured so that the gaming ball can flow down the left and right outside. Characterized gaming machine B9.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B7 or B8, the partitioning means can prevent the game ball from flowing down the front position of the passing means, so that the field of view toward the passing means can be improved. It can be easily secured.

The mode of the partitioning means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a plate-shaped portion that constitutes the lower surface of the flow surface of the game ball, or may be a ball entry opening forming means that allows the game ball to enter. Further, the partitioning means may be a means for fixing the shape (appearance) or a means for changing the shape (appearance).

In the gaming machine B9, the path constituting means includes a receiving state changing means configured to be able to change a state between an accepting state in which a flowing game ball is acceptable and a non-accepting state in which it cannot be accepted, and the receiving state changing means of the compartmentalizing means. The gaming machine B10 is characterized in that the portion on the state changing means side is configured to easily guide the gaming ball to the receiving state changing means side.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B9, the gaming ball being accepted by the receiving state changing means can be configured to be received by the partitioning means in a manner of being pushed into the receiving state changing means. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball that has slipped sideways in the middle of being accepted deviates from the receiving state changing means and falls on the front side of the passing means.

For example, as a means for changing the acceptance state, a special winning device provided with an opening / closing plate that tilts and displaces in the left-right direction axis is assumed, and as a partitioning means, a first winning opening arranged above the special winning opening of the special winning device is assumed. .. A game ball that reaches the special winning opening just before the opening / closing plate is often sandwiched between the rotating tip of the opening / closing plate and the edge of the opening covered by the opening / closing plate, and the direction of formation of the edge ( It slides sideways in the direction of the rotation axis of the opening / closing plate).

Since the game ball after skidding can reach any position in the formation range of the rotation tip of the opening / closing plate, if at least a part of the opening / closing plate is placed above the passing means, the gaming ball skids. After the later game ball has fallen to the front side, it may pass through the front position of the means to be passed, and the game ball after skidding should not be dropped to the front side.

If it is not possible to avoid the game ball falling to the front side after skidding, it is necessary to arrange the opening / closing plate while avoiding the front view position of the passing means, which reduces the degree of freedom in designing the opening / closing plate. become.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B10, it is possible to easily prevent the gaming ball after skidding from falling to the front side of the opening / closing plate, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the opening / closing plate.

In any of the gaming machines B7 to B10, the gaming ball flowing down the path-constructing means and the gaming ball flowing down the front side of the path-constructing means are configured to flow down in a similar flow-down manner. The gaming machine B11.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B7 to B10, the gaming ball that may flow down the path-constructing means and pass through the passage-passing means, and the front side of the path-constructing means. By making it difficult to distinguish between a game ball that does not pass through the means to be passed through, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the number of game balls that flow down the path forming means.

In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the case where the game ball easily enters the route forming means and the case where it is difficult to enter from the game ball flowing down in the vicinity of the route forming means.

A gaming machine B12 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, comprising a light emitting means for irradiating light from the rear side of a sphere flowing down the predetermined portion.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, it is possible to easily avoid that the front side of the ball flowing down the predetermined portion is reflected by light and the ball becomes difficult to see.

<Points to secure the route length to the V outlet in a small space>
A route-constructing means configured to allow the game ball to flow down, a passing means configured to allow the game ball flowing down the route-constructing means to pass through, and a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the passing means. A state switching means configured to be switchable between a second state different from the first state is provided, and the path forming means includes a delay means for delaying the vertical displacement of the game ball, and the delay means. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that a gaming ball is configured to be able to flow down toward the means to be passed.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a distribution unit 75 configured to be movable to the left or right is arranged in the flow path of the game ball that has entered the second major winning opening 12, and the game ball is arranged by the arrangement of the distribution unit 75. There is a gaming machine configured so that the flow direction of the machine can be changed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is indispensable for the distribution unit 75 to operate for a short period of time in order to prevent erroneous winning in the specific area 73 and ball biting by the distribution unit 75. In some cases, he felt distrust in the behavior of the division 75 and could not continue the game with peace of mind.

As an example of the means for solving this problem, it is assumed that the length of the flow path from the second large winning opening 12 to the distribution portion 75 is lengthened. For example, by changing the arrangement of the distribution portion 75 from directly below the second major winning opening 12 to a position near the left and right center portions of the game area (near the first major winning opening 10), the second major winning opening 12 can be used. It is possible to secure a long flow path length up to the distribution portion 75. As a result, it is considered that the possibility of erroneous winning in the specific area 73 can be reduced.

On the other hand, when this means is executed, it becomes necessary to secure the visibility of the flow path of the game ball over a wide range from the second prize opening 12 to the first prize opening 10, and the design of the game area is free in this range. The degree is limited. That is, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the game area is limited in a wide range in order to avoid erroneous winning in the specific area 73.

In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of avoiding erroneous entry of the game ball while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the route forming means includes a predetermined delay means, even if the vertical length of the route forming means in the front view is shortened to save space, the path forming means can be entered. It is possible to secure a long time for the ball to be passed through the game ball.

Therefore, the timing at which the state switching means needs to be activated in order to switch whether or not the game ball can enter the passaged means can be set to a predetermined time after the game ball enters the route constituting means. It is possible to avoid erroneous winning without operating the opening / closing device that switches whether or not to allow the ball to enter the constituent means for a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the opening / closing means is operating in a hurry. As a result, it is possible to avoid erroneous entry of the game ball while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

The mode of the delay means is not limited at all. For example, a mode in which a convex portion for deceleration is formed in the flow path may be used, or a mode in which a predetermined flow path for causing the game ball to flow down in the flow path having a front-back direction component may be provided.

In the gaming machine C1, the delay means includes a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the flow path toward the front side of the predetermined flow path is higher than that of the flow path toward the back side. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the acceleration of the machine is increased.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, it is possible to secure a long period for the player to visually recognize the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined flow path.

The cause of the difference in the acceleration of the game ball is not limited at all. For example, the inclination of the predetermined flow path with respect to the horizontal plane may be large or small, or the surface shape of the predetermined flow path on the game ball side may be designed.

In the gaming machines C1 or C2, the delay means includes a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the flow path toward the front side is compared with the flow path that maintains the front-back position and flows down. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the acceleration of the flowing gaming ball is increased.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, it is possible to secure a long period for the player to visually recognize the gaming ball flowing on the front side. As a result, it is possible to easily improve the player's attention to the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path.

The cause of the difference in the acceleration of the game ball is not limited at all. For example, the inclination of the predetermined flow path with respect to the horizontal plane may be large or small, or the surface shape of the predetermined flow path on the game ball side may be designed.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the delay means includes a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow path is such that the gaming ball is located in front of the means to be passed in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine C4 characterized by being configured to pass through.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, when the gaming ball is arranged at the front position, the visibility in the vicinity of the passing means can be lowered. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the range in the vicinity of the means to be passed.

The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that a plurality of front positions can be configured in the gaming machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C5, by arranging the gaming balls at a plurality of front positions, at least a part of the gaming balls on the back side can be hidden by the gaming balls on the front side. Since the means to be passed is arranged on the back side of the game ball on the back side, the field of view toward the means to be passed can be blocked by a plurality of game balls, and the visibility of the means to be passed can be reduced. ..

In this case, when the entry interval of the game ball into the predetermined flow path is short, it is possible to configure a state in which the game ball is always placed at any of the front positions, so that the passaged means cannot be visually recognized. It will be possible.

A gaming machine C6, wherein in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the path forming means is formed so as to be visually recognized in a swirling manner in a top view.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the vertical width required for arranging the path forming means having the same length can be shortened.

Further, since it is not necessary to reduce the thickness of the path wall as compared with the case where the folded path is formed, the strength of the channel can be improved, and compared with the case where the folded path is folded at 180 degrees, the strength of the channel can be improved. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball is clogged.

A gaming machine C7, wherein in any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the path forming means includes a front-rear flow path portion extending in the front-rear direction.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the left-right width of the route forming means can be suppressed. Can be done.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the passing means is arranged diagonally downward and rearward with respect to the ball receiving portion of the path forming means.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, it is possible to easily accommodate the passing means and the ball receiving portion of the route forming means in the field of view of the player who is visually recognized from the front side. ..

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the path-constructing means is configured to accept a first receiving means configured to accept a gaming ball and a means different from the first accepting means to accept a gaming ball. The game is characterized in that the second receiving means is provided, and the profit obtained by the player changes depending on the receiving mode of the game ball of the first receiving means and the second receiving means. Machine C9.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the first receiving means and the second receiving means are configured to be able to receive the game ball at all times, and further, the first receiving means and the game machine C9. Since the profit obtained by the player changes depending on the mode of accepting the game ball of the second receiving means, it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball.

The mode of accepting the game ball is not limited at all. For example, the game ball may be accepted only by the first receiving means, the game ball may be accepted only by the second receiving means, or a predetermined number of balls may be accepted by the first receiving means and the second receiving means. A predetermined number may be accepted by the means. Further, the frequency of ball entry to each receiving means may be different, or the ball entry position may be different.

In the gaming machine C9, the change in profit obtained by the player is limited to either the first receiving means or the second receiving means, or the gaming ball is accepted, or the first receiving means and the second receiving means are accepted. The gaming machine C10, characterized in that it is generated depending on whether or not the gaming ball is accepted in both of the above.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C9, the player can easily launch the gaming ball in a predetermined firing mode by setting the magnitude of the profit obtained by the player. ..

The profits that the player can obtain are not limited in any way. For example, it may be easy to recognize the flowing game ball, or the profit related to the game obtained by the flowing game ball (payment of prize balls, acquisition of big hit, and the game state after the big hit is in a probable state). The game state may be changed to the normal state (falling, etc.).

In the gaming machine C9 or C10, the path constituting means is characterized in that the first receiving means and the second receiving means are symmetrically configured from the passing means to the passing means.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C9 or C10, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player suffers a disadvantage regardless of whether the gaming ball is launched mainly on the left or right side.

In any one of the gaming machines C9 to C11, the route forming means includes a receiving state changing means configured to be able to change the state between an accepting state in which a flowing game ball is acceptable and a non-accepting state in which the flowing game ball is unacceptable. The gaming machine C12 is characterized in that the acceptance mode changes depending on the shape of the acceptance state changing means or the mode of state change.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C9 to C11, the receiving mode changes depending on the shape of the receiving state changing means or the mode of the state change. It is possible to reduce the influence of skill level on the profits obtained by the player.

In the gaming machine C12, the gaming machine C13 is characterized in that the mode of changing the state of the receiving state changing means is composed of a plurality of types.

According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C12, the receiving mode of the gaming ball to the first receiving means and the second receiving means even when the gaming ball is launched in a certain firing mode. Can be changed. Thereby, the profit obtained by the player can be adjusted from the aspect of the state change of the receiving state changing means.

<Points about the opening / closing member that moves in parallel with the flow direction of the sphere>
A route-constructing means in which a game ball can flow down, a passaged means in which a game ball flowing down the route-constructing means can pass through, an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the route-constructing means, and the above-mentioned The state switching means is provided with a state switching means configured to be able to change the state in a non-introduced state in which the game ball cannot be introduced into the route forming means. A gaming machine XA1 characterized in that it is configured to follow a direction.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a large prize-winning component 300 capable of configuring a plurality of types of flow paths of a gaming ball toward a ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the flow direction of the gaming ball and the opening / closing direction of the opening / closing plate of the prize-winning component 300 are substantially perpendicular to each other, and the opening / closing operation is completed without the opening / closing being involved in the rolling of the gaming ball. Therefore, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the role of the opening / closing plate (state switching means).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XA1, the displacement direction of the state switching means is configured to be along the flow direction of the gaming ball, so that the gaming ball is in a state of being close to or in contact with the state switching means. By causing the displacement of the switching means, it is possible to influence the rolling mode of the game ball. Thereby, the role of the state switching means can be improved.

For example, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, by sliding the state switching means to the right while the game ball is on top, the rolling rotation is forward with respect to the game ball. Since the load for rotating is given, the game ball can be accelerated.

On the contrary, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means is slid to the left while the game ball is on the top, so that the game ball rolls and rotates with respect to the game ball. Since the load for rotating in the opposite direction is applied, the rotation of the game ball can be delayed.

Further, when the state switching means slides to grab the lower end of the rolling game ball, the game ball is given a load having not only the rolling direction of the game ball but also a component in the direction orthogonal to the rolling direction. Therefore, it is possible to cause changes in the flow mode of the game ball in a complicated and irregular manner.

Due to the influence of these effects on the flow mode of the game ball, the flow mode of the ball on the state switching means can be changed in various ways when the state switching means is opened and closed, so that the player who visually recognizes the game ball gets bored. You can concentrate on the game without having to.

Further, the relationship between the opening / closing operation of the state switching means and the game ball is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged so as to rub against the side surface of the game ball, or it may be arranged so as to oppose the game ball in the flow direction and collide with the game ball.

In the state switching means that is displaced in a manner of colliding with the game ball, the direction of the closing operation is not limited at all. For example, the closing operation may be performed in a direction opposite to the flow direction of the game ball so that the game ball can be repelled, or the game ball may be closed in the forward direction in the flow direction of the game ball, and the game ball is introduced thereafter. May be configured to be regulateable with less resistance.

<Points about the opening / closing member that allows the ball to flow in the first direction when it is open and in the second direction when it is closed>
A route-constructing means configured to allow the game ball to flow down, a passing means configured to allow the game ball flowing down the route-constructing means to pass through, an introduction state in which the game ball can be introduced into the passing means, and the above-mentioned A state switching means configured to be able to change the state in a non-introduced state in which the game ball cannot be introduced into the passing means is provided, and the state switching means can guide the game ball in the first direction in the introduced state. The gaming machine XB1 is configured so that the gaming ball can be guided in the second direction in the non-introduced state.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a large prize-winning component 300 capable of configuring a plurality of types of flow paths of a gaming ball toward a ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the lower movable body 371 guides the gaming ball to the right in the state of projecting to the front side, but in the state of retracting to the rear side, it does not come into contact with the gaming ball and falls freely. I will not guide you. In other words, the lower movable body 371 does not affect the flow of the game ball. Therefore, in the state of being retracted to the rear side, it is necessary to prepare a portion (frame portion, etc.) for guiding the flow of the game ball other than the lower movable body 371, in order to guide the flow of the game ball. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from the viewpoint of reducing the number of configurations (members).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XB1, the state switching means is configured to guide the gaming ball in different directions depending on whether the gaming ball is introduced or not, so that it is dedicated to guiding the flow path of the gaming ball. Since no member is required, the number of required configurations (members) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to diversify the flow direction of the game ball in a limited space.

The relationship between the first direction and the second direction is not limited at all. For example, the angle between the directions may be an acute angle, a right angle, or an obtuse angle. For example, in the case of a right angle, the first direction may be set downward and the second direction may be set to the left-right direction with respect to the game ball flowing down along the front-back direction. In this case, in front view, the difference (difference) in the direction after the guidance by the state switching means is maximized while allowing only a slight displacement of the game ball to be recognized before being guided by the state switching means. Can be planned.

The arrangement of the guide portion that causes the guide action by the state switching means is not limited at all. For example, the guide portion may be arranged on the movable member provided in the state switching means, or the guide portion is arranged on the non-movable portion around the state switching means, and the game ball becomes the guide portion by the operation of the movable member. It may be configured so that it can be switched to a state in which it is easy to come into close contact with or in close contact with each other.

When the guide portion is arranged on the movable member, the design is not limited to the guidance after the state switching between the introduced state and the non-introduced state is completed, but also considers the influence on the game ball during the operation of switching the state. It is preferable to do.

For example, when the state switching means includes a movable member that is displaced in a direction opposite to the flow direction of the game ball, a surface (planar surface, curved surface, etc.) that is inclined with the flow direction rather than providing a wall portion having a planar shape orthogonal to the flow direction. ) It is possible to avoid a situation in which the load generated when the movable member collides with the game ball increases in the direction in which the game ball flows backward by providing the wall portion having a shape. This makes it easier to avoid the backflow of the game ball.

<Separation, inversion, coalescence, rotation are a series of operations>
A displacement means configured to be displaceable so that the surface to be visually recognized changes, the displacement means includes a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and the first displacement in a predetermined mode of displacement. The gaming machine D1 characterized in that the member and the second displacement member are configured to be relatively displaced.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which the rotating base 214 arranged at the tip of the base arm 220 is configured to be rotatable a plurality of times (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116782). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, although the rotation base 214 is rotationally displaced, there is a problem that it is difficult to maintain the attention to the displacement means because the surface visible to the player is the same.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the visible surface of the displacement means can be changed according to the displacement, the attention to the displacement means can be maintained.

Further, since the appearance of the displacement means can be changed by the relative displacement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member, it is possible to improve the attention to the displacement means.

In the game machine D1, the displacements of the predetermined embodiment are the first displacement that is close to each other with respect to the collective portion in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member are collectively arranged, and the first displacement member and the said. A gaming machine D2 characterized in that the second displacement member includes at least a second displacement that rotates with respect to the gathering portion.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, it is possible to make it easy to dynamically generate a relative motion between the first displacement member and the second displacement member. That is, as the displacement with respect to the gathering portion, the displacement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member is likely to be reduced at the terminal portion where the distance from the gathering portion is the shortest or the longest only by the first displacement. Where the 1st displacement member and the 2nd displacement member appear to stop and the effect of effect may be reduced, by mixing the 2nd displacement, displacement in the rotational direction can be generated even at the end portion. Therefore, the effect of production can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the displacement of the predetermined embodiment includes at least a third displacement in which the visible surface of the displacement means is inverted.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, by inverting the surface visually recognized by the third displacement, the decoration to be visually recognized by the player before and after the third displacement is significantly different. Can be made.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be fixable by suction or adhesion, and the load related to the fixing is the first displacement member and the second displacement member. The gaming machine D4 characterized in that it acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the member.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the load related to the fixing acts in a direction to limit the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member, so that the load related to the fixing acts. Can be taken into consideration to design the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

For example, in the case of driving force transmission that is closer to the gear, if deformation of the shape is not taken into consideration, mechanical displacement occurs, and if a load related to fixing is taken into consideration, the elastic change of the member due to the load becomes apparent. As a result, the displacement timing of the member can be delayed.

Further, the degree of fixation may be different depending on the visible surface of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

In this case, since the action of fixing differs depending on the surface on which the player can see the effect, the degree of fixing on the side surface where the player can see can be adjusted.

As a result, for example, with respect to the inverted surfaces of the same displacement means, one surface is tightly united and easily visible as an integral unit, and the other surface is loosely united and easily visible in a state of being easily displaced relative to each other. Can be done.

Further, for example, by configuring the first displacement member and the second displacement member to have different degrees of suction for each fixed position, it is possible to configure a state in which the degree of fixation of the first displacement member and the second displacement member differs. can.

It should be noted that the mode in which adsorption is possible is not limited in any way. For example, it may be bonded with an adhesive tape, or it may be one that utilizes the suction force between the magnet and the metal portion. Further, as the metal portion attracted to the magnet, for example, a first reversing member or a second reversing member may be designed so as to use a fixing screw, a screw, or the like.

In any of the game machines D1 to D4, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in the forward and reverse directions, and in a predetermined state, the displacement means is displaced in the forward direction in the first displacement mode, and the displacement means is displaced in the reverse direction. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that it is displaced in a second displacement mode different from the displacement mode, and the second displacement mode is configured to be displaced in the first displacement mode after the displacement in the predetermined mode.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D4, the displacement modes of the displacement means are configured to be different in the forward and reverse directions, and the second displacement mode is before the first displacement mode. Since the predetermined mode is configured as an additional displacement mode, it is possible to reduce the amount of displacement required for the displacement means when retracting the displacement means. As a result, the attention force to the displacement means at the time of evacuation can be reduced, so that the attention force of the displacement means that is displaced at the effect position can be relatively improved.

In the conventional machine, the mode of rotation is the same in the forward and reverse directions, so after projecting to the effect position (front side position of the liquid crystal display area) and then retracting to the evacuation position (outside position of the liquid crystal display area). It had to be rotated multiple times in the opposite direction again. In this case, there is a possibility that it becomes easy for the line of sight to gather on the member retracted from the effect position.

The displacement mode is not limited to any one. For example, it may be a rotational displacement or a linear displacement. Further, the displacement may be on a plane, may span a plurality of planes, or may be three-dimensional.

In the gaming machine D5, the displacement means is provided with a releasing means configured to release the load transmission when the operating resistance becomes larger than a predetermined amount.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D5, the change of the displacement mode of the displacement means can be caused by the magnitude of the operating resistance of the internal configuration of the displacement means.

In any of the game machines D1 to D6, a light emitting means for irradiating light toward the displacement means is provided, the displacement means includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the said. The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the second displacement member is configured so that the visible mode of light from the light emitting means can be changed depending on whether the surface to be visually recognized is one side or the other side.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the appearance of the displacement means with respect to the light from the light emitting means corresponds to the visible surface of the first displacement member and the second displacement member. Can be changed.

For example, there are cases where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as individually emitting light, and cases where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as integrally emitting light. Can be changed with.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, a detecting means for detecting the arrangement of the displacement means is provided, and the detecting means is configured to be able to detect whether or not the displacement of the displacement means is in an acceptable state. Characteristic gaming machine D8.

According to the gaming machine D8, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the state in which the displacement of the displacement means is acceptable can be detected by the detecting means, so that the displacement means collides with the surrounding structural portion during the displacement. It can be avoided.

Further, since the displacement of the displacement means can be executed while detecting the displaceable section of the displacement means by the detecting means, the displacement mode including enlargement / reduction after the displacement from the effect position to the retracted position to some extent. By controlling the displacement, it is possible to suppress an increase in the attention force to the displacement means as compared with the case where the displacement from the effect position to the retracted position is displaced in a displacement mode including enlargement / reduction from the start of the displacement. ..

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, a detecting means for detecting the state of the displacement means is provided, and the detecting means is configured to be able to detect two or more kinds of numerical values for the displacement of the displacement means. Amusement machine D9.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the number of detection means arranged can be reduced. Various aspects are exemplified as the types of numerical values for the displacement of the displacement means. For example, it may be a numerical value for each arrangement or posture of different movable members, or it may be a numerical value involved in the change of the operation mode when the operation mode changes at a predetermined timing.

Moreover, the arrangement of the detecting means is not limited at all. For example, by arranging the detecting means on the displacement base end side of the displacement means, it is easy to construct a structure for detecting the arrangement and the posture of the second displacement means connected to the displacement tip side of the displacement means.

In any of the game machines D1 to D9, the displacement means includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member have a surface facing the player side on one side. When the first displacement member and the second displacement member face one side toward the player side, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be capable of reversing operation between the posture as a surface and the attitude as a surface on the other side. While the displacement member and the second displacement member can be distinguished from each other, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member have the other side facing the player side, the first displacement member and the second displacement member D10 is a gaming machine characterized in that the displacement is indistinguishable.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the reversing operation is performed regardless of the states of the first displacement member and the second displacement member when one side is directed to the player side. It is possible to maintain a high expectation of the player for the occurrence of.

<Points to change the easily visible surface by arranging the displacement means having multiple visible surfaces>
A displacement means including a first visible surface and a second visible surface configured to be visible is provided, and the displacement means includes a first state in which the first visible surface is easily visible and the above-mentioned first state, depending on the arrangement. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the second visible surface can be switched between a second state in which the visible surface is easily visible and the second state.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that is provided with a reversing operation unit 71 that is configured to be reversible and is configured to be able to change the appearance visually recognized by the player by changing the surface to be visually recognized (for example). , Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-153095). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the reversing of the reversing operation unit 71 is performed in a state where the position is fixed, the line of sight of the player cannot be changed by the change of the surface to be visually recognized. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of efficiently changing the line of sight of the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the displacement means can switch between a state in which the first visible surface is easy to see and a state in which the second visible surface is easy to see, depending on the arrangement. The line of sight of the player who wants to see the visible surface or the second visible surface can be changed in an manner along the path of the arrangement change of the displacement means.

The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the displacement means is provided with an opening portion that is visually open to the displacement means, and the displacement means is configured so that the opening portion side is easily visible.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, a player who visually recognizes the back side through the opening portion can easily visually recognize the first visible surface or the second visible surface of the displacement means.

In the gaming machine E2, the displacement means is arranged closer to the back side when it is arranged on the edge side of the opening portion than when it is arranged on the center side of the opening portion. ..

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, when the displacement means is arranged on the center side of the opening portion, the displacement means is largely visible on the front side, and the displacement means is on the edge side of the opening portion. When arranged, the movement of the line of sight when looking at the displacement means can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to achieve both the visibility of the displacement means and the suppression of fatigue of the player who follows the displacement means with his / her eyes.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the displacement means comprises a plurality of sets of the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and a set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that it is difficult to visually recognize the first visible surface and the second visible surface of another set in a state where the surfaces are visible.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, different characters and figures are applied to the first visible surface and the second visible surface for each set to displace the displacement means. It is possible to make different characters and figures visually visible to the player who visually recognizes the above, and the first visible surface and the second visible surface of the set which are not intended to be visually recognized are difficult to see. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the displacement means from being completely lost.

For example, in the first group, characters and figures indicating that the lottery result is a big hit and the expectation is low are displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and in the second group, the lottery result is displayed. When characters or figures indicating that there is a high expectation of a big hit are displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, the expectation of a big hit is achieved through the displacement means regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. You can check the height. In this case, even after the displacement means retracts from the front side of the display area of the display device, the display of the expectation of the jackpot by the displacement means can be maintained, so that the player who has taken his / her eyes off the liquid crystal display device can see. However, it is possible to continue to visually recognize the display of the expectation of the jackpot.

It should be noted that the configuration that is difficult to see is not limited in any way. For example, it may be arranged on a surface different from the player side (rear side surface, left and right outer surface, etc.), or may be configured to reduce visibility by shielding with a shielding means.

In the gaming machine E4, the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface to be visually recognized is such that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to be recognized during the operation. A gaming machine E5 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine E5, in the gaming machine E4, the first visible surface displayed on the player side during the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface to be visually recognized (before confirmation). And it is possible to make it easier to avoid predicting a pair of second visible surfaces. This makes it possible to improve the attention to the displacement means.

The mode in which the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to be recognized during the above-mentioned switching operation is not limited at all. For example, the displacement means may be rotated at a high speed to make it difficult to recognize, or a part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and the other part may be coupled and separated so as to be able to be coupled and separated. It may be difficult to recognize by operating the part and other parts in a separated state, or it may be difficult to recognize by creating a relatively dark part by setting the light and darkness by the light emitting means.

In this case, the mode of the separated state is not limited at all. For example, during the above-mentioned switching operation, only one of a part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and the other part is visually recognized, and the other is operated facing the back side so as not to be visually recognized. It may be configured so that some of them and other parts can be visually recognized at the same time, but they may be configured to operate in a state where they are visually recognized out of alignment.

The gaming machine E5 includes an opening portion in which the displacement means is visually opened, and the switching operation is executed in a state where the displacement means is arranged on the center side of the opening portion. Gaming machine E6.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5, the switching motion can be easily made visible to the player, and the attention to the switching motion can be improved.

The gaming machine E5 or E6 is characterized in that, during the switching operation, one of a part of the first visible surface and the other portion faces the front side and the other faces a side different from the front side. Pachinko machine E7.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5 or E6, a part of the first visible surface is visible during operation and the whole is invisible, so that the first visibility is possible during operation. It can make it difficult to recognize possible aspects.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, a second displacement means configured to be able to shield at least a part of the line of sight to the second visible surface is provided, and the displacement means is provided with the second displacement means together with the second displacement means. 1 A gaming machine E8 characterized in that it can be switched to a third state for visually recognizing a visible surface.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, at least a part of the second visible surface is made difficult to be visually recognized by the second displacement means, so that the effect position of the displacement means can be determined. The degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the displacement means is configured to change the surface visible in a predetermined direction between the first visible surface and the second visible surface according to the displacement. The gaming machine E9 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the surface visually recognized in a predetermined direction changes between the first visible surface and the second visible surface. The surface that is easy to see can be arbitrarily changed without depending on the amount of change in the line of sight of the person.

In the gaming machine E9, the gaming machine E10 is characterized in that the posture of the displacement means changes between the first state and the second state.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E9, the difference between the appearance of the displacement means in the first state and the appearance of the displacement means in the second state can be increased by changing the posture of the displacement means. can.

The gaming machine E9 or E10 includes an auxiliary means configured to be placed close to the displacement means. In the first state, the displacement means is placed close to the auxiliary means, and in the second state, the displacement means. Is a gaming machine E11 characterized in that it is arranged away from the auxiliary means.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E9 or E10, a state in which the auxiliary means is arranged close to the displacement means so that they can be visually recognized integrally, and a state in which the auxiliary means and the displacement means are visually recognized separately. It can be configured, and a plurality of impressions given to the player by the displacement means can be configured.

The mode of the auxiliary means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means having a fixed arrangement or a means having a movable arrangement.

The gaming machine E11 is characterized in that the auxiliary means is configured to be switchable between a state in which the auxiliary means is made visible integrally with the displacement means and a state in which the auxiliary means is made visible separately from the displacement means. ..

According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E11, it is possible to switch whether the displacement means and the auxiliary means are visually recognized integrally or separately, so that there are variations in the visible mode with respect to the number of members. Can be increased.

<Point where the ratio of the displacement amount of the displacement means and the displacement amount of the arrangement means at the same point differs depending on the section>
The displacement means configured to be displaceable, the disposing means in which the first portion is disposed on the displacement means, and the supporting means for supporting the second portion of the disposing means are provided, and the supporting means thereof is provided. Is a gaming machine F1 characterized in that the arrangement of the second portion with respect to the first portion in the displacement of the displacement means can be controlled.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base arm 220 that can be tilted and displaced, a rotating accessory 211 rotatably attached to the tilting tip side of the base arm 220, and the rotating accessory 211 are rotated. There is a gaming machine that includes a drive motor 222 that generates a driving force for the purpose of the pachinko machine, and is configured to be able to rotate the rotating accessory 211 independently of the displacement of the base arm 220 (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116782). See publication). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the rotating accessory 211 tends to wobble at the tip of the base arm 220, and if the rotating accessory 211 is rotated during the tilt displacement of the base arm 220, a malfunction may occur in the mechanism. As a result, since it is assumed that the rotational displacement of the rotating accessory 211 is performed while the base arm 220 is stopped, the degree of freedom of displacement is low.

That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the displaceable portion.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the disposing means is supported by the displacement means and the support means at at least two points, and the two support points are configured to be relatively displaced during the displacement of the displacement means. Since the support means can control the arrangement of the second portion with respect to the first portion, the disposing means can be displaced during the displacement of the displacement means while stably supporting the disposing means. Can be done. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the disposing means (displaceable portion).

The mode of the supporting means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be supported by a guide groove formed in the fixed base means in a manner in which the displacement is restricted, or may be supported by being connected to a second displaceable displacement means. Further, the control by the support means is not limited to the electronic control, but also includes mechanical control such as regulating (guidance) the displacement of the second portion by the wall portion.

In the gaming machine F1, the displacement means is configured to be able to displace the first section and the second section, and the support means is the second portion when the displacement means displaces the first section. The second range is provided with a first range for supporting the second range and a second range for supporting the second portion when the displacement means displaces the second section, and the second portion is displaced in the first range. The gaming machine F2 is configured such that the direction and the direction in which the second portion is displaced in the second range are different.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the displacement speed of the displacement means can be made different even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, and the support means is the second. Since it is configured to allow a change in the displacement direction of the portion, the displacement of the disposing means can be smoothed even if the displacement direction of the second portion changes irregularly.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the supporting means includes a limiting portion that limits the displacement of the second portion.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the displacement of the second portion can be limited at the boundary position (restricted portion) between the first range and the second range. When the portion of is displaced from the side with a large displacement to the side with a small displacement, the second portion can be easily stopped at the boundary position (restricted portion) between the first range and the second range.

The mode of the load required for the displacement with respect to the first portion of the second portion is not limited at all. For example, the second portion may be pulled or the second portion may be pushed.

The mode of the limiting unit is not limited at all. For example, it may be an embodiment in which an increase or decrease in the displacement resistance of the second portion is set, or an embodiment in which the displacement direction of the second portion is switched.

In the gaming machine F2 or F3, the first section is arranged closer to the end side of the displacement range of the displacement means than the second section, and the arrangement means based on the displacement means in the second section. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the relative displacement amount of the above-mentioned first section is configured to be smaller than the relative displacement amount of the disposing means with the displacement means as a reference.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2 or F3, it is possible to form a section in which the relative displacement amount of the displacement means with respect to the displacement means is small at the displacement intermediate position of the displacement means. Therefore, in addition to the displacement end position of the displacement means, a position where the displacement means and the disposing means can be easily visually recognized can be provided, and as a result, the displacement means and the disposing means can be visually recognized integrally. Easy positions can be increased.

The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the displacement speed (ratio) of the second portion based on the displacement speed of the first portion can be changed.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the displacement speed of the second portion of the disposing means on the support means side even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant. Is possible, so that a simple drive control (constant speed drive) of the drive means can be used to configure an operation effect in which the displacement speed of the arrangement means is variable.

A gaming machine F6, wherein in any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the supporting means is configured to reduce the displacement speed at the displacement termination of the second portion.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F5, it is possible to prevent the second portion from bouncing back, and it is possible to easily stop the disposing means at an early stage at the displacement end.

The method for preventing the second part from bouncing back is not limited in any way. For example, a method may be used in which the displacement velocity of the second portion at the displacement end (for example, the displacement amount of the second portion when the first portion is displaced by a predetermined unit length) is reduced. A method may be used in which the displacement of the second portion is regulated by a shape device such as erecting a wall in the displacement direction of the second portion when the first portion is stopped.

Further, the method is not limited to the method of reducing the displacement amount of the second portion, and the displacement resistance of the second portion may be increased. For example, a load may be applied by a magnetic force or the like at the displacement end of the second portion to improve the displacement resistance of the second portion, or the displacement resistance may be improved by an urging force such as a coil spring. good.

In the gaming machine F6, the supporting means is a displacement locus of the displacement of the second portion due to the displacement of the first portion, and the second portion when the first portion is stopped at the displacement end. The gaming machine F7 is characterized in that the displacement loci of the displacement are configured to intersect with each other.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F6, a support means having a function of guiding the displacement of the second portion due to the displacement of the first portion causes the first portion to stop. The return displacement (bound) of the portion 2 can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, a supported means that is displaceably supported by the disposing means is provided, and the supported means has a relative displacement amount of the disposing means with respect to the displacement means. The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that it is configured to be displaced by a corresponding displacement amount.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, a complicated effect can be executed by the supported means that is displaced jointly with the disposing means.

The mode of displacement of the supported means is not limited at all. For example, the arrangement means may be displaced so as to run parallel to the arrangement means on the predetermined plane on which the arrangement means is displaced, or the arrangement means may be displaced at a position distant from the predetermined plane on which the arrangement means is displaced (for example,). , A displacement mode different from the slide displacement mode on a predetermined plane (for example, a rotational displacement mode centered on a predetermined axis) may be used.

The mode of displacement of the disposing means according to the displacement amount of the disposing means is not limited at all. For example, the posture may be changed, or the displacement may be maintained while maintaining the posture.

The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that, while the first portion is displaced in a predetermined direction, the second portion includes a section capable of reciprocating displacement in a direction intersecting the displacement locus of the first portion. Gaming machine F9.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F8, while the first portion is displaced, the relative displacement amount of the second portion with respect to the first portion returns and changes (for example, after the increase). Since the mode can be reduced), it is possible to realize a displacement mode in which the displacement amount of the supported means is increased while maintaining the arrangement of the second portion.

The gaming machine F8 or F9 is characterized in that the displacement speed of the (relative) rotation of the supported means with respect to the disposing means is configured to be equal to the displacement speed of the displacement means. F10.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F8 or F9, the displacement mode of the supported means can be made equivalent to the displacement means with the disposing means interposed therebetween. This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that the supported means is displaced by the original driving means.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the disposing means includes a posture changing means for changing the posture so that the surface facing the player side is switched between the first surface and the second surface according to its own displacement. The posture changing means is characterized in that the first surface or the second surface is oriented toward the player side in a state where the second portion is arranged at the displacement end. Machine F11.

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the first surface or the second surface of the posture changing means is directed to the player side, so that the second part becomes the displacement end. Since the player can grasp that the ball has been reached, the end of the effect operation by the displacement means can be configured in an easy-to-understand manner.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, and F1 to F11, the gaming machine Z1 is a slot machine. .. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, and F1 to F11, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Z2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, and F1 to F11, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. The gaming machine Z3 characterized by being. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board (part of area construction means)
65b Open / close plate (introduction means, acceptance state change means, part of avoidance means)
86 Center frame (open part)
141 Pre-design member (part of division means, avoidance means)
163b Ball passage hole (first receiving means, second receiving means)
312 Opening (second predetermined part, ball receiving part)
317 Front and rear long protrusions (part of the first flow path, part of the protrusion, second protrusion, part of the state switching means)
318 Left and right inner protrusions (part of branching means, part of protrusions, first protrusion, part of state switching means)
319 Left and right outer protrusions (part of the second flow path, part of the state switching means)
310 Upper member (part of route construction means)
330 Middle member (part of delay means, part of route construction means)
334 First flow path component (part of the path configuration means, front and rear flow path)
335 Second flow path constituent part (predetermined part, part of route constituent means, left-right direction route)
336 Third flow path constituent part (part of the route constituent means, front-back direction path, front-back flow path part)
351 Light emitting means 370 Slide displacement member (part of branching means, switching means, part of state switching means)
380 Lower member (part of route construction means)
600 1st operation unit (displacement means)
616 Guide slot (supporting means)
616a Linear part (part of support means, first range, limiting part)
616b Curved part (part of support means, second range, limiting part)
620 Rotating member (displacement means)
640 Supported member (part of disposing means)
642 Cylindrical part (first part)
652 Front rotating member (supported means)
652b Overhanging decoration part (part of auxiliary means)
660 Second decorative rotating member (posture changing means)
661a 1st production surface (1st visible surface, 1st surface)
661b 2nd production surface (2nd visible surface, 2nd surface)
670 Decorative fixing member (part of auxiliary means)
700 Second operation unit (displacement means)
787a1 1st main decorative surface (part of the 1st visible surface)
787a2 1st sub-decorative surface (part of the 2nd visible surface)
787b1 2nd main decorative surface (part of the 1st visible surface)
787b2 Second sub-decorative surface (part of the second visible surface)
800 Third operation unit (displacement means, second displacement means)
813 Detection sensor (detection means)
823b Outer light emitting part (light emitting means)
840 outer rotating member (part of the gathering part)
866 Torque limiter (release means)
870 First decorative member (first displacement member, second displacement member)
875 1st lining part (part of the visible surface)
880 Second decorative member (first displacement member, second displacement member)
885 Second lining part (part of the visible surface)
C1 color (part of disposing means, second part)
C2 dish-shaped lid (part of the disposing means, second part)
P1 sphere (part of displaceable means)
SE11 Probability change detection sensor (part of means to be passed)
SE12 Normal detection sensor (part of means to be passed)

Claims (1)

A route-constructing means in which a game ball can flow down, a passaged means in which a game ball flowing down the route-constructing means can pass through, an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the route-constructing means, and the above-mentioned It is equipped with a state switching means that can change the state in a non-introduced state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the route forming means.
The state switching means is a gaming machine characterized in that the direction of displacement generated in the state change is configured to be along the flow direction of the gaming ball.

Images